owners manual -...

Owners Manual ��S60

DEAR VOLVO OWNERTHANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo.The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and yourpassengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvohas also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmentalrequirements.

In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend thatyou familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and mainte-nance information contained in this owner's manual.

Table of contents

2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

0000 Introduction

Important information................................. 6Volvo and the environment....................... 11

0101 Safety

Seatbelts .................................................. 16Airbags...................................................... 19Activating/deactivating the airbag*........... 22Side airbags (SIPS bags) ......................... 24Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................... 26WHIPS ...................................................... 27When the systems deploy ........................ 29Safety mode.............................................. 30Child safety............................................... 31 02

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade.................. 42Privacy locking*......................................... 48Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*......................................................... 49Keyless drive*............................................ 51Locking/unlocking..................................... 55Child safety locks...................................... 61Alarm*....................................................... 62

Table of contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

0303 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls.......................... 66Volvo Sensus ........................................... 75Key positions............................................ 76Seats......................................................... 78Steering wheel.......................................... 82Lighting..................................................... 83Wipers and washing.................................. 95Windows, rearview and door mirrors........ 97Compass*............................................... 102Power sunroof*....................................... 103Alcolock*................................................. 105Starting the engine.................................. 109Starting the engine – Flexifuel................. 114Starting the engine – external battery..... 116Gearboxes............................................... 117DRIVe Start/Stop*................................... 123All-wheel drive – AWD*........................... 130Foot brake............................................... 131Parking brake.......................................... 133

HomeLink *............................................ 137

0404 Driver support

DSTC – Stability and traction control sys-tem.......................................................... 142Road sign information - RSI*.................. 144Speed limiter*.......................................... 146Cruise control*........................................ 148Adaptive cruise control*.......................... 150Distance Warning*.................................. 161City Safety™........................................... 164Collision Warning with Auto Brake &Pedestrian Protection*............................ 169Driver Alert System*................................ 177Driver Alert System - DAC*..................... 178Driver Alert System - LDW*..................... 181Park assist syst*...................................... 184Park assist camera*................................ 187BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System. . 190 05

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages............................. 196Menu source MY CAR............................ 198Climate control........................................ 206Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas-senger compartment heater*.................. 216Additional heater*.................................... 219Trip computer......................................... 220Adapting driving characteristics............. 222Comfort inside the passenger compart-ment........................................................ 223

Table of contents


0606 Infotainment system

General information on infotainment...... 230Radio....................................................... 241Media player........................................... 248External audio source via AUX/USB*input........................................................ 252

Media Bluetooth * ................................. 255

Bluetooth handsfree*............................ 258Voice recognition* mobile phone............ 267TV*........................................................... 271Remote control* ..................................... 275 07

07 During your journey

Recommendations during driving........... 280Refuelling................................................ 283Fuel......................................................... 284Loading................................................... 288Cargo area ............................................. 291Driving with a trailer................................ 292Towing and recovery.............................. 298

0808 Wheels and tyres

General ................................................... 304Changing wheels ................................... 308Tyre pressure ......................................... 311Warning triangle and first-aid kit*............ 312Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*.......... 313Emergency puncture repair (TMK) ......... 315

Table of contents

5

0909 Maintenance and service

Engine compartment............................... 322Lamps..................................................... 329Wiper blades and washer fluid................ 335Battery..................................................... 337Fuses...................................................... 343Car care.................................................. 354

1010 Specifications

Type designations................................... 362Dimensions and weights......................... 364Engine specifications.............................. 368Engine oil................................................ 370Fluids and lubricants............................... 373Fuel......................................................... 376Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pres-sure ........................................................ 380Electrical system..................................... 383Type approval......................................... 384Symbols in the display............................ 396 11

11 Alphabetical Index

Alphabetical Index.................................. 400

Introduction

Important information


Reading the Owner's Manual

Introduction

A good way of getting to know your new car isto read the owner's manual, ideally before yourfirst journey. This will give you the opportunityto familiarise yourself with new functions, tosee how best to handle the car in different sit-uations, and to make the best use of all thecar's features. Please pay attention to thesafety instructions contained in the manual.

The specifications, design features and illus-trations in this owner's manual are not binding.We reserve the right to make modificationswithout prior notice.© Volvo Car Corporation

Option

All types of option/accessory are marked withan asterisk*.

In addition to standard equipment, this manualalso describes options (factory fitted equip-ment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extraequipment).

The equipment described in the owner's man-ual is not available in all cars - they have dif-ferent equipment depending on adaptationsfor the needs of different markets and nationalor local laws and regulations.

In the event of uncertainty over what is stand-ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvodealer.

Special texts

WARNING

Warning texts advise of a risk of personalinjury.

IMPORTANT

Important texts advise of a risk of materialdamage.

NOTE

NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitatethe use of features and functions for exam-ple.

Footnote

There is footnote information in the owner'smanual that is located at the bottom of thepage. This information is an addition to the textthat it refers to via a number. If the footnoterefers to text in a table then letters are usedinstead of numbers for referral.

Message texts

There are displays in the car that show textmessages. These text messages are high-

lighted in the owner's manual by means of thetext being slightly larger and printed in grey.Examples of this are in menu texts and mes-sage texts on the information display (e.g.Audio settings).

Decals

The car contains different types of decal whichare designed to convey important informationin a simple and clear manner. The decals in thecar have the following descending degree ofimportance for the warning/information.

Warning for personal injury

G031590

Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,white text/image on black message field. Usedto indicate the presence of danger which, if the

Introduction


7

warning is ignored, may result in serious per-sonal injury or fatality.

Risk of property damage

G031592

White ISO symbols and white text/image onblack or blue warning field and message field.Used to indicate the presence of danger which,if the warning is ignored, may result in damageto property.

Information

G031593

White ISO symbols and white text/image onblack message field.

NOTE

The labels shown in the owner's manual arenot provided as exact reproductions ofthose in the car. The purpose is to showtheir approximate appearance and locationin the car. The information that applies toyour car in particular is available on the labelin question in your car.

Procedure lists

Procedures where action must be taken in acertain sequence are numbered in the owner'smanual.

When there is a series of illustrations forstep-by-step instructions each step isnumbered in the same way as the corres-ponding illustration.

There are numbered lists with letters adja-cent to the series of illustrations where theorder of the instructions is not significant.

Arrows appear numbered and unnum-bered and are used to illustrate a move-ment.

Arrows with letters are used to clarify amovement when the reciprocal order is ofno relevance.

If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions then the different steps arenumbered with normal numbers.

Position lists

Red circles containing a number are usedin overview images where different com-ponents are pointed out. The numberrecurs in the position list featured in con-nection with the illustration that describesthe item.

Introduction



Bulleted lists

A bulleted list is used when there is a list ofpoints in the owner's manual.

Example:

• Coolant

• Engine oil

To be continued

�� This symbol is located furthest down to theright when a section continues on the followingpage.

Recording data

Your vehicle contains a number of computerswhose function is to continuously check andmonitor the vehicle's operation and function-ality. Some of the computers can record infor-mation during normal driving if they detect anerror. In addition, information is recorded in theevent of a collision or incident. Parts of therecorded information are required so that tech-nicians can diagnose and rectify faults in thevehicle during servicing and maintenance andso that Volvo can fulfil legal requirements andother regulations. In addition to this, the infor-mation is used for research purposes by Volvoin order to continually develop quality andsafety, as the information can contribute to abetter understanding of the factors that causeaccidents and injuries. The information

includes details of the status and functionalityof various systems and modules in the vehiclewith regard to engine, throttle, steering andbrake systems, amongst other things. Thisinformation may include details regarding theway the driver drives the vehicle, such as vehi-cle speed, brake and accelerator pedal use,steering wheel movement and whether or notthe driver and passengers have used theirseatbelts. For the reasons given this informa-tion may be stored in the vehicle's computersfor a certain length of time, but also as a resultof a collision or incident. This information maybe stored by Volvo as long as it can help tofurther develop and further enhance safety andquality and as long as there are legal require-ments and other regulations that Volvo needsto consider.

Volvo will not contribute to the above-descri-bed information being disclosed to third partieswithout the vehicle owner's consent. However,due to national legislation and regulationsVolvo may be required to disclose such infor-mation to authorities such as police authorities,or others who may assert a legal right to haveaccess to it.

To be able to read and interpret the informationrecorded by the computers in the vehiclerequires special technical equipment thatVolvo, and workshops that have entered intoagreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo

is responsible that the information, which istransferred to Volvo during servicing and main-tenance, is stored and handled in a securemanner and that the handling complies withapplicable legal requirements. For further infor-mation - contact a Volvo dealer.

Accessories and extra equipment

The incorrect connection and installation ofaccessories can negatively affect the car'selectrical system. Certain accessories onlyfunction when their associated software isinstalled in the car's computer system. Volvotherefore recommends that you always con-tact an authorised Volvo workshop beforeinstalling accessories which are connected toor affect the electrical system.

Change of ownership for cars withVolvo On Call*

Volvo On Call is a supplemental service thatconsists of safety, security and comfort serv-ices. If the car has Volvo On Call and there is achange of owner, it is very important that theseservices are discontinued so that the formerowner cannot access the services in the car.Contact the call centre by pressing the ON

CALL button in the car or contact an author-ised Volvo workshop. See also "Changing thesecurity code" in the owner's manual for VolvoOn Call.

Introduction


9

Laser sensor

This vehicle is equipped with a sensor whichtransmits laser light. It is absolutely essential tofollow the prescribed instructions when han-dling the laser sensor.

The following two labels in English are fitteddirectly on the laser sensor unit:

The upper label in the figure describes the laserbeam's classification:

• Laser radiation - Do not look into the laserbeam with optical instruments - Class 1Mlaser product.

The lower label in the figure describes the laserbeam's physical data:

• IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complieswith FDA (U.S. Food Administration) stand-ards for laser product design with the

exception of deviations in accordance with"Laser Notice No. 50" from 26 July 2001.

Radiation data for the laser sensor

The following table specifies the laser sensor'sphysical data.

Maximum pulse energy 2.64 J

Maximum average output 45 mW

Pulse duration 33 ns

Divergence (horizontal x verti-cal)

28° × 12°

WARNING

If any of these instructions are not followedthen there is a risk of eye injury!

• Never look into the laser sensor (whichemits spreading invisible laser radiation)at a distance of 100 mm or closer withmagnifying optics such as a magnifyingglass, microscope, lens or similar opti-cal instruments.

• Testing, repair, removal, adjustmentand/or replacement of the laser sen-sor's spare parts must only be carriedout by a qualified workshop - we rec-ommend an authorised Volvo work-shop.

• To avoid exposure to harmful radiation,do not carry out any readjustments ormaintenance other than those specifiedhere.

• The repairer must follow speciallydrawn up workshop information for thelaser sensor.

• Do not remove the laser sensor (thisincludes removing the lenses). Aremoved laser sensor does not fulfillaser class 3B as per standard IEC60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eye-safeand therefore entails a risk of injury.

Introduction


10

• The laser sensor's connector must beunplugged before removal from thewindscreen.

• The laser sensor must be fitted onto thewindscreen before the sensor's con-nector is plugged in.

• The laser sensor transmits laser lightwhen the remote control key is in posi-tion II and also with the engine switchedoff (see page 76 on key positions).

For more information on the laser sensor, seepage 164.

Information on the Internet

At www.volvocars.com there is further infor-mation concerning your car.

To be able to read the QR code, you need a QRcode reader, which is available as an add-onfor a number of mobile phones. A QR codereader can be downloaded from the App Storeor Android Market.

QR code

Introduction

Volvo and the environment


Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy

G000000

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-ration's core values which influence all opera-tions. We also believe that our customers shareour consideration for the environment.

Your Volvo complies with strict internationalenvironmental standards and is also manufac-tured in one of the cleanest and most resource-efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo-ration has global ISO certification, whichincludes the environmental standard ISO14001 covering all factories and several of ourother units. We also set requirements for ourpartners so that they work systematically withenvironmental issues.

Fuel consumption

Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumptionin each of their respective classes. Lower fuelconsumption generally results in lower emis-sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.

It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con-sumption. For more information read under theheading, Reducing environmental impact.

Efficient emission control

Your Volvo is manufactured following the con-cept "Clean inside and out" – a concept thatencompasses a clean interior environment aswell as highly efficient emission control. In

many cases the exhaust emissions are wellbelow the applicable standards.

Clean air in the passenger compartment

A passenger compartment filter prevents dustand pollen from entering the passenger com-partment via the air intake.

A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte-rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom-ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out-side.

The system consists of an electronic sensorand a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-tored continuously and if there is an increase in

Introduction

Volvo and the environment


the level of certain unhealthy gases such ascarbon monoxide then the air intake is closed.Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,queues and tunnels for example.

The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozoneand hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbonfilter.

Interior

The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea-sant and comfortable, even for people withcontact allergies and for asthma sufferers.Extreme attention has been given to choosingenvironmentally-compatible materials.

Volvo workshops and the environment

Regular maintenance creates the conditionsfor a long service life and low fuel consumptionfor your car. In this way you contribute to acleaner environment. When Volvo's workshopsare entrusted with the service and mainte-nance of your car it becomes part of our sys-tem. Volvo makes clear demands regarding theway in which our workshops are designed inorder to prevent spills and discharges into theenvironment. Our workshop staff have theknowledge and the tools required to guaranteegood environmental care.

Reducing environmental impact

You can easily help reduce environmentalimpact - here are a few tips:

• Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off theengine when stationary for longer periods.Pay attention to local regulations.

• Drive economically - think ahead.

• Perform service and maintenance inaccordance with the owner's manual'sinstructions - follow the Service and War-ranty Booklet's recommended intervals.

• If the car is equipped with an engine blockheater*, use it before starting from cold - itimproves starting capacity and reduceswear in cold weather and the engine rea-ches normal operating temperature morequickly, which lowers consumption andreduces emissions.

• High speed increases consumption con-siderably due to increased wind resistance- a doubling of speed increases wind resis-tance 4 times.

• Always dispose of environmentally hazar-dous waste, such as batteries and oils, inan environmentally safe manner. Consult aworkshop in the event of uncertainty abouthow this type of waste should be discarded- an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-mended.

Following this advice can save money, theplanet's resources are saved, and the car'sdurability is extended. For more informationand further advice, see the pages 280 and376.

Recycling

As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it isimportant that the car is recycled in an envi-ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of thecar can be recycled. The last owner of the caris therefore requested to contact a dealer forreferral to a certified/approved recyclingfacility.

The owner's manual and theenvironment

The Forest Stewardship Council symbolshows that the paper pulp in this publicationcomes from FSC certified forests or othercontrolled sources.

Introduction

13


Seatbelts ................................................................................................ 16Airbags.................................................................................................... 19Activating/deactivating the airbag*......................................................... 22Side airbags (SIPS bags) ....................................................................... 24Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................................................................. 26WHIPS .................................................................................................... 27When the systems deploy ...................................................................... 29Safety mode............................................................................................ 30Child safety............................................................................................. 31

SAFETY

01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

16

General information

Heavy braking can have serious consequencesif the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that allpassengers use their seatbelts.

It is important that the seatbelt lies against thebody so it can provide maximum protection.Do not lean the backrest too far back. Theseatbelt is designed to protect in a normalseating position.

Putting on a seatbelt

Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by press-ing its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle. Aloud "click" indicates that the belt has locked.

Correctly fitted seatbelt.

Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest onthe shoulder.

Seatbelt height adjustment. Press the button andmove the belt vertically. Position the belt as highas possible without it chafing against your throat.

The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rearseat1.

Releasing the seatbelt

Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle andthen let the belt retract. If the seatbelt does notretract fully, feed it in by hand so that it doesnot hang loose.

The seatbelt locks and cannot be with-

drawn:

• if it is pulled out too quickly

• during braking and acceleration

• if the car leans heavily.

1 Certain markets.

01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

17

Make sure that you:

• do not use clips or anything else that canprevent the seatbelt from fitting properly

• ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted orcaught on anything

• the hip strap must be positioned low down(not over the abdomen)

• tension the hip strap over the lap by pullingthe diagonal shoulder belt up towards theshoulder.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-belt is not used or is used incorrectly, thismay diminish the protection provided by theairbag in the event of a collision.

WARNING

Each seatbelt is designed for only one per-son.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seatbelts your-self. Volvo recommends that you contact anauthorised Volvo workshop.

If a seatbelt has been subjected to a majorload, such as in conjunction with a collision,the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Someof the protective characteristics of the seat-belt may have been lost, even if it appearsto be undamaged. In addition, replace theseatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged. Thenew seatbelt must be type-approved andintended for installation in the same positionas the replaced seatbelt.

Seatbelts and pregnancy

G02

0998

The seatbelt should always be worn duringpregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the

correct way. The diagonal section should wrapover the shoulder then be routed between thebreasts and to the side of the abdomen.

The lap section should lay flat over the thighsand as low as possible under the abdomen. –It must never be allowed to ride upward.Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensurethat it fits as close to the body as possible. Inaddition, check that there are no twists in theseatbelt.

As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant driversshould adjust their seats and steering wheelsuch that they can easily maintain control of thevehicle as they drive (which means that theymust be able to easily operate the foot pedalsand steering wheel). The aim should be to posi-tion the seat with as large a distance as possi-ble between abdomen and steering wheel.

01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

18

Seatbelt reminder

G01

7726

Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fastentheir seatbelts by means of an audio and visualreminder. The audio reminder is speeddependent, and in some cases time depend-ent. The visual reminder is located in the roofconsole and the combined instrument panel.

Child seats are not covered by the seatbeltreminder system.

Rear seat

The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has twosubfunctions:

• Provides information on which seatbeltsare being used in the rear seat. A messageappears in the information display whenthe seatbelts are in use, or if one of the reardoors has been opened. The message iscleared automatically after driving forapproximately 30 seconds or after press-ing the indicator stalk's OK button.

• Provides a warning if one of the rear seat-belts is unfastened during travel. Thiswarning takes the form of a message onthe information display along with theaudio/visual signal. The warning stopswhen the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it canalso be acknowledged manually by press-ing the OK button.

The message on the information display show-ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail-able. Press the OK button to see stored mes-sages.

Certain markets

An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remindthe driver and front seat passenger to use aseatbelt if either of them is not wearing one. Atlow speed, the audio reminder will sound forthe first 6 seconds.

Seatbelt tensioner

All the seatbelts are equipped with belt ten-sioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensionertightens the seatbelt in the event of a suffi-ciently violent collision. The seatbelt then pro-vides more effective restraint for the occu-pants.

WARNING

Never insert the tongue of the passenger'sseatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side.Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt intothe buckle on the correct side. Do not makeany damages on seatbelts nor insert anyforeign objects into a buckle. The seatbeltsand buckles would then possibly not func-tion as intended in the event of a collision.There is a risk of serous injury.

01 Safety

Airbags 01

19

Warning symbol on the combinedinstrument panel

The warning symbol in the combined instru-ment panel illuminates when the remote con-trol key is in key position II. The symbol clearsafter approx. 6 seconds provided the airbagsystem is fault-free.

WARNING

If the warning symbol for the airbag systemremains illuminated or illuminates while driv-ing, it means that the airbag system doesnot have full functionality. The symbol indi-cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys-tem, SIPS, the IC system or some other faultin the system. Volvo recommends that youcontact an authorised Volvo workshopimmediately.

As well as the warning symbol, a message mayappear on the information display in appropri-ate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions,the warning triangle illuminates and SRS

Airbag Service required or SRS Airbag

Service urgent appears in the display. Volvorecommends that you contact an authorisedVolvo workshop immediately.

Airbag system

G01

8665

Airbag system, left-hand drive car.

G01

8666

Airbag system, right-hand drive car.

The system consists of airbags and sensors. Asufficiently violent collision trips the sensorsand the airbag(s) are inflated and become hot.To cushion the impact, the airbag deflateswhen compressed. When this occurs, smokeescapes into the car. This is completely nor-mal. The entire process, including inflation anddeflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths ofa second.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that you contact anauthorised Volvo workshop for repair.Defective work in the airbag system couldcause malfunction and result in serious per-sonal injury.

01 Safety

Airbags 01

20

NOTE

The sensors react differently depending onthe course of the collision and whether ornot the seatbelts on the driver and passen-ger side are used.

It is therefore possible that only one (ornone) of the airbags may inflate in a colli-sion. The airbag system senses the force ofthe collision on the car and adapts accord-ingly so that one or more airbags aredeployed.

The capacity of the airbags is also adaptedto the collision force to which the vehicle issubjected.

Airbag on the driver's side

The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-tection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver'sside. It is folded up into the centre of the steer-ing wheel. The steering wheel is markedAIRBAG.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-belt is not used or is used incorrectly, thismay diminish the protection provided by theairbag in the event of a collision.

Passenger airbag

Location of the front passenger airbag in a left-hand drive car.

Location of the front passenger airbag in a right-hand drive car.

The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen-ger side. It is folded up into a compartmentabove the glovebox. Its cover panel is markedAIRBAG.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the beltis not used or is used incorrectly, this maydiminish the protection provided by the air-bag in the event of a collision.

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbagdeploys, passengers must sit as upright aspossible with their feet on the floor andbacks against the backrest. Seatbelts mustbe secured.

WARNING

Do not put objects in front of or above thedashboard where the passenger airbag islocated.

01 Safety

Airbags 01

21

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on abooster cushion in the front seat if the airbagis activated.

Never allow anybody to stand or sit in frontof the front passenger seat.

No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sitin the front passenger seat if the airbag isactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above canendanger life.

01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01


Key switch off - PACOS*

General information

The airbag for the front passenger seat can bedeactivated if the car is equipped with a switch,PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). Forinformation on how to activate/deactivate, seeunder the heading Activating/deactivating.

Key switch off/switch

The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)is located on the passenger end of the instru-ment panel and is accessible when the pas-senger door is open (see under the headingbelow, Activating/deactivating).

Check that the switch is in the required posi-tion. Volvo recommends that the remote con-trol key's key blade be used to change posi-tion.

For information on the key blade, seepage 46.

WARNING

Failure to follow the advice given abovecould endanger the life of passengers in thecar.

WARNING

If the car is equipped with a front passengerairbag, but does not have a PACOS switch(Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then theairbag will always be activated.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on abooster cushion in the front seat if the airbagis activated and the symbol in the roofconsole is illuminated. Failure to follow thisadvice could endanger the life of the child.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas-senger seat if the message in the roof con-sole (see page 23) indicates that the air-bag is deactivated and if the warning sym-bol for the airbag system is also displayedin the combined instrument panel. This indi-cates that there has been a severe malfunc-tion. Visit a workshop as soon as possible.Volvo recommends that you contact anauthorised Volvo workshop.

Activating/deactivating

Switch location.

The airbag is activated. With the switch inthis position, persons taller than 140 cmcan sit in the front passenger seat, butnever children in a child seat or on abooster cushion.

The airbag is deactivated. With the switchin this position, children in a child seat oron a booster cushion can sit in the frontpassenger seat, but never persons tallerthan 140 cm.

01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01


WARNING

Activated airbag (passenger seat):

Never place a child in a child seat or on abooster cushion on the front passenger seatwhen the airbag is activated. This applies toeveryone shorter than 140 cm.

Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):

No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit inthe front passenger seat when the airbag isdeactivated.


NOTE

When the remote control key is in key posi-tion II the warning symbol for the airbag isdisplayed on the combined instrumentpanel for approx. 6 seconds (see page 19).

Following which, the indicator in the roofconsole is illuminated showing the correctstatus for the front passenger seat airbag.For more information about the different keypositions for the remote control key, seepage 76.

Activated airbag

G01

7800

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag isactivated.

A warning symbol in the roof console indicatesthat the airbag for the front passenger seat isactivated (see preceding illustration).

Deactivated airbag

2

2

G01

7724

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag isdeactivated.

A text message and a symbol in the roof con-sole indicate that the airbag for the front pas-senger seat is deactivated (see preceding illus-tration).

01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01

24

Side airbag

G03

2949

In a side impact collision a large proportion ofthe collision force is transferred by the SIPS(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil-lars, the floor, the roof and other structuralparts of the body. The side airbags at the driv-er's and front passenger seats protect thechest area and the hip and are an importantpart of the SIPS.

The SIPS bag system consists of two maincomponents, side airbag and sensors. Theside airbags are located in the front seat back-rests.

WARNING

• Volvo recommends that repairs are onlycarried out by an authorised Volvoworkshop. Defective work in the SIPS-bag system could cause malfunctionand result in serious personal injury.

• Do not put objects in the area betweenthe outside of the seat and the doorpanel, since this area is required by theside airbag.

• Volvo recommends the use only of carseat covers approved by Volvo. Otherseat covers may impede the operationof the side airbags.

• The side airbag is a supplement to theseatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Child seats and side airbags

The protection provided by the car to childrenseated in a child seat or on a booster cushionis not diminished by the side airbag.

A child seat or booster cushion can be placedon the front passenger seat provided that thecar does not have an activated1 passenger air-bag.

Location

Driver's seat, left-hand drive.

Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.

The SIPS bag system consists of side airbagsand sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips

1 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag, see page 22.

01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01

25

the sensors and the side airbags are inflated.The airbag inflates between the occupant andthe door panel and thereby cushions the initialimpact. The airbag deflates when compressedby the collision. The side airbag is normally onlydeployed on the side of the collision.

01 Safety

Inflatable Curtain (IC) 01

26

Properties

The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is apart of SIPS and the airbags. It is fitted in theheadlining along both sides of the roof andprotects the car's occupants sitting in the outerseats. A sufficiently violent collision trips thesensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.The inflatable curtain helps to prevent thedriver and passengers from striking their headson the inside of the car during a collision.

WARNING

Never hang or attach heavy items onto thehandles in the roof. The hook is onlydesigned for light clothing (not for solidobjects such as umbrellas for example).

Do not screw or install anything onto thecar's headlining, door pillars or side panels.This could compromise the intended pro-tection. Volvo recommends that you onlyever use Volvo genuine parts that areapproved for placement in these areas.

WARNING

Do not load the car higher than 50 mm underthe top edge of the door windows. Other-wise, the intended protection of the inflat-able curtain, which is concealed in the head-lining, may be compromised.

WARNING

The inflatable curtain is a supplement to theseatbelts.

Always use a seatbelt.

01 Safety

WHIPS 01

27

Protection against whiplash injury –WHIPS

The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con-sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe-cially designed head restraints in the frontseats. The system is actuated by a rear-endcollision, where the angle and speed of the col-lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle allhave an influence.

WARNING

The WHIPS system is a supplement to theseatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Properties of the seat

When the WHIPS system is deployed, the frontseat backrests are lowered backward to alterthe seating position of the driver and front seatpassenger. This reduces the risk of whiplashinjury.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPSsystem yourself. Volvo recommends thatyou contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WHIPS system and child seats/booster

cushions

The protection provided by the car to childrenseated in a child seat or on a booster cushionis not diminished by the WHIPS system.

Correct seating position

For the best possible protection, the driver andfront seat passenger should sit in the centre ofthe seat with as little space as possiblebetween the head and the head restraint.

Do not obstruct the WHIPS system

Do not leave any objects on the floor behind thedriver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent theWHIPS system from functioning.

WARNING

Do not squeeze rigid objects between therear seat cushion and the front seat back-rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct thefunction of the WHIPS system.

01 Safety

WHIPS 01

28

Do not place objects on the rear seat that mayprevent the WHIPS system from functioning.

WARNING

If a rear seat backrest is folded down, thecorresponding front seat must be movedforward so that it does not touch the foldedbackrest.

WARNING

If a seat has been subjected to extremeforces, such as due to a rear-end collision,the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvorecommends that it is checked by anauthorised Volvo workshop.

Part of the WHIPS system's protectivecapacity may have been lost even if theseats appear to be undamaged.

Volvo recommends that you contact anauthorised Volvo workshop to have the sys-tem checked even after a minor rear-endcollision.

01 Safety

When the systems deploy 01

29

When the systems deploy

System Triggered

Seatbelt tensioner,front seat

In the event of afrontal collision,and/or side-impactcollision, and/orrear-end collisionand/or overturning

Seatbelt tensioner,rear seat

In a frontal collisionand/or side-impactaccident and/oroverturning

Airbags (SRS) In a frontal collisionA

Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impactaccident

Inflatable Curtain IC In the event of a sideimpact and/or over-turning and/or somefrontal collisions

Whiplash protectionWHIPS

In a rear-end colli-sion

A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a col-lision without airbag deployment. A number of factors suchas the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of thecar, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the differentsafety systems of the car are activated.

If the airbags have deployed, the following isrecommended:

• Recovering the car. Volvo recommendsthat you have it conveyed to an authorisedVolvo workshop. Do not drive withdeployed airbags.

• Volvo recommends that you engage anauthorised Volvo workshop to handle thereplacement of components in the car'ssafety systems.

• Always contact a doctor.

NOTE

The airbags and belt tensioner system aredeployed only once during a collision.

WARNING

The airbag control module is located in thecentre console. If the centre console isdrenched with water or other liquid, discon-nect the battery cables. Do not attempt tostart the car since the airbags may deploy.Recovering the car. Volvo recommends thatyou have it conveyed to an authorised Volvoworkshop.

WARNING

Never drive with deployed airbags. Theycan make steering difficult. Other safetysystems may also be damaged. The smokeand dust created when the airbags aredeployed can cause skin and eye irritation/injury after intensive exposure. In case ofirritation, wash with cold water. The rapiddeployment sequence and airbag fabricmay cause friction and skin burns.

01 Safety

Safety mode 01

30

Driving after a collision

If the car is involved in a collision, the textSafety mode See manual may appear on theinformation display. This means that the carhas reduced functionality. Safety mode is aprotective state that is enforced when the col-lision may have damaged any of the car's vitalfunctions, such as the fuel lines, sensors forone of the safety systems, or the brake system.

Attempting to start the car

First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car.There must be no smell of fuel either.

If everything seems normal and you havechecked for indications of fuel leakage, youmay attempt to start the car.

Remove the remote control key and open thedriver's door. If a message is now shown to the

effect that the ignition is on, press the startbutton. Then close the door and reinsert theremote control key. The car's electronics willnow try to reset themselves to normal mode.Then try to start the car.

If the message Safety mode See manual isstill shown on the display then the car must notbe driven or towed, but a vehicle recovery serv-ice used instead. Even if the car appears to bedriveable, hidden damage may make the carimpossible to control once moving.

Moving the car

If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode

See manual has been reset, the car can bemoved carefully out of a dangerous position.Do not move the car further than necessary.

WARNING

Never attempt to repair your car or reset theelectronics yourself if the car has been insafety mode. This could result in personalinjury or the car not functioning as normal.Volvo recommends that you engage anauthorised Volvo workshop to check andrestore the car to normal status after Safetymode See manual has been displayed.

WARNING

Never, under any circumstances, attempt torestart the car if it smells of fuel when theSafety mode See manual message is dis-played. Leave the car at once.

WARNING

If the car is in safety mode it must not betowed. It must be transported from its loca-tion. Volvo recommends that it is transpor-ted to an authorised Volvo workshop.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

31

Children should sit comfortably andsafely

Volvo recommends that children travel in rear-facing child seats until as late an age as pos-sible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and thenfront-facing booster cushions/child seats untilup to 10 years of age.

The position of a child in the car and the choiceof equipment are dictated by the child's weightand size, for more information, see page 32.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the placement ofchildren in cars vary from country to coun-try. Check what does apply.

Children of all ages and sizes must always sitcorrectly secured in the car. Never allow a childto sit on the knee of a passenger.

Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,booster cushions & attachment devices) whichis designed for your particular car. Using Vol-vo's child safety equipment provides you withoptimum conditions for your child to travelsafely in the car. Furthermore, the child safetyequipment fits and is easy to use.

NOTE

In the event of questions when fitting childsafety products, contact the manufacturerfor clearer instructions.

Child seats

G02

0739

Child seats and airbags are not compatible.

NOTE

When using child safety products it isimportant to read the installation instruc-tions included.

WARNING

Do not secure the straps of the child seat tothe seat's horizontal adjustment bar,springs or the rails and beams under theseat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.

Look in the installation instructions for the childseat for the correct fitting.

Location of child seats

You may place:

• a child seat/booster cushion on the pas-senger seat, provided the passenger air-bag is not activated1.

• one or more child seats/booster cushionsin the rear seat.

Always fit child seats/booster cushions in therear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. Ifa child is sitting on the front passenger seatthen he/she could suffer serious injury if theairbag deploys.

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

32

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on abooster cushion in the front seat if the airbag(SRS) is activated.

No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sitin the front passenger seat if the airbag(SRS) is activated.


WARNING

Booster cushions/child seats with steelbraces or some other design that could reston the seatbelt buckle's opening buttonmust not be used, as they could cause theseatbelt buckle to open accidentally.

Do not allow the upper section of the childseat to rest against the windscreen.

Label Airbag

The label becomes visible when the passengerdoor is opened; see the illustration on page 22.

Recommended child seats2

Weight Front seat (with deactivated air-bag)

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 0

max 10 kg

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) -rear-facing child seat, secured with theISOFIX fixture system.

Type approval: E5 04301146

(L)

Group 0

max 10 kg

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) -rear-facing child seat, secured with thecar's seatbelt.


(U)



(U)



(U)

2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

��

33



Group 0

max 10 kg

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Child seats which are universallyapproved.

(U)


(U)


(U)

Group 1

9-18 kg

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with thecar's seatbelt and straps.


(L)



(L)

Group 1

9-18 kg


(U)


(U)


(U)

Group 2

15-25 kg



(L)



(L)

01 Safety

Child safety 01

34



Group 2

15-25 kg

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with thecar's seatbelt.


(L)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with thecar's seatbelt.


(L)

Group 2/3

15-36 kg

Volvo booster seat with backrest(Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).


(UF)



(UF)



(UF)

Group 2/3

15-36 kg

Booster cushion with and withoutbackrest (Booster Cushion with andwithout backrest).


(UF)



(UF)



(UF)

L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.

U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.

UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

35

Child safety locks, rear doors

The controls for operating the rear door powerwindows and the rear door opening handlescan be blocked from opening from the inside.For more information, see page 61.

ISOFIX fixture system for child seats

Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture systemare concealed behind the lower section of therear seat backrest, in the outer seats.

The location of the mounting points is indicatedby symbols in the backrest upholstery (see pre-ceding illustration).

Press the seat cushion down to access themounting points.

Always follow the manufacturer's installationinstructions when connecting a child seat tothe ISOFIX mounting points.

Size classes

Child seats are in different sizes – cars are indifferent sizes. This means that not all childseats are suitable for all seats in all car models.

Consequently, there is a size classification forchild seats using the ISOFIX fixture system inorder to assist users in choosing the correctchild seat (see the following table).

Sizeclass

Description

A Full size, front-facing childseat

B Reduced size (alt. 1), front-facing child seat

B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-facing child seat

C Full size, rear-facing childseat

D Reduced size, rear-facingchild seat

Sizeclass

Description

E Rear-facing infant seat

F Transverse infant seat, left-hand

G Transverse infant seat, right-hand

WARNING

Never place a child in the passenger seat ifthe car is equipped with an activated airbag.

NOTE

If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi-cation then the car model must be includedon the child seat's vehicle list.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you contact anauthorised Volvo dealer for recommenda-tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvorecommends.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

36

Types of ISOFIX child seat

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Infant seat transverse max 10 kg F X X

G X X

Infant seat, rear-facing max 10 kg E X OK

(IL)

Infant seat, rear-facing max 13 kg E X OK

(IL)

D X OKA

(IL)

C X OKA

(IL)

Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OKA

(IL)

C X OKA

(IL)

01 Safety

Child safety 01

��

37

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X OKB

(IUF)

B1 X OKB

(IUF)

A X OKB

(IUF)

X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.

IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.

IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.

A For the infant/child seat to have space in the rear seat the seat in front must be adjusted longitudinally to a position in front of centre position.B Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

38

Upper mounting points for child seats

The car is equipped with upper mountingpoints for child seats. These mounting pointsare located on the parcel shelf and are con-cealed by plastic covers. Bend aside the plas-tic covers to access each respective mountingpoint.

For cars with folding head restraints on theoutside seats the head restraints should befolded to facilitate installation.

The upper mounting points are primarilyintended for use with front-facing child seats.Volvo recommends that small children shouldsit in rear-facing child seats for as long as pos-sible.

For detailed information on how the child seatshould be tensioned in the upper mounting

points, see the seat manufacturer's instruc-tions.

WARNING

The child seat's straps must always bedrawn through the hole in the head restraintleg before they are tensioned at the attach-ment point.

01 Safety

01

39


Remote control key/key blade................................................................ 42Privacy locking*....................................................................................... 48Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*...................................... 49Keyless drive*.......................................................................................... 51Locking/unlocking................................................................................... 55Child safety locks.................................................................................... 61Alarm*...................................................................................................... 62

LOCKS AND ALARM

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

02

42

General

The car is supplied with 2 remote control keysor PCCs (Personal Car Communicator). Theyare used to start the car and for locking andunlocking.

Additional remote control keys can be ordered- up to 6 can be programmed and used for thesame car.

The remote control key contains a removablekey blade made of metal. The visible section isavailable in two versions so that it is possibleto distinguish between the remote controlkeys.

The PCC has increased functionality com-pared with the remote control key. The contin-uation of this chapter describes the functionsavailable in both the PCC and the remote con-trol key.

WARNING

If there are children in the car:

Remember to switch off the supply to thepower windows and sunroof by removingthe remote control key if the driver leavesthe car.

Loss of a remote control key

If you lose a remote control key then a new onecan be ordered at a workshop - an authorisedVolvo workshop is recommended. The remain-ing remote control keys must then be taken tothe workshop. The code of the missing remotecontrol key must be erased from the system asa theft prevention measure.

The current number of keys registered to thecar can be checked in the menu system MY

CAR under Information Number of keys.For a description of the menu system, seepage 198.

Key memory1 – door mirrors and driver's

seat

The settings are automatically connected toeach respective remote control key, see pages79 and 99.

The function can be activated/deactivated inthe menu system MY CAR under Settings

Car settings Car key memory.

For a description of the menu system, seepage 198.

For cars with the Keyless drive system, seepage 51.

Indicator for locking/unlocking

When the car is locked or unlocked using theremote control key, the direction indicatorsconfirm that locking/unlocking was correctlyperformed.

• Locking - one flash and the door mirrorsare folded2 in.

• Unlocking - two flashes and the door mir-rors are folded2 out.

After locking the indication is only given if alllocks have been activated once the doors havebeen closed.

Selecting the function

Different options for indicating locking/unlock-ing with light can be set in the car's menu sys-tem, see page 198.

Search in the menu system MY CAR forSettings Car settings Light settings

and select Door lock confirmation light and/or Unlock confirmation light.

1 Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.2 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.

02 Locks and alarm


02

43

Lock indicator

Same LED as alarm indicator, see page 62.

A flashing LED by the windscreen verifies thatthe car is locked.

NOTE

Cars that are not equipped with alarm alsohave this indicator.

Immobiliser

Each remote control key has a unique code.The car can only be started with the correctremote control key with the correct code.

The following error messages in the combinedinstrument panel's information display are rela-ted to the electronic immobiliser:

Message Specification

Insert car key Error when readingthe remote controlkey during starting -Remove the keyfrom the ignitionswitch, press it inagain and make anew start attempt.

Car key not found Error reading theremote control keyduring starting - Tryto start again.

If the error persists:Insert the remotecontrol key into theignition switch andtry to start again.

Immobiliser Try

start again

Error in immobilisersystem during star-ting. If the error per-sists: Contact aworkshop - anauthorised Volvoworkshop is recom-mended.

For starting the car, see page 109.

Functions

Remote control key, standard version.

Locking

Unlocking

Approach light duration

Boot lid

Panic function

02 Locks and alarm


02


Remote control key with PCC* - Personal CarCommunicator.

Information

Function buttons

Locking – Locks the doors and boot lidwhile the alarm is activated.

Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to close allthe windows and sunroof* simultaneously.

WARNING

If the sunroof and windows are closed usingthe remote control key, check that no one isin danger of getting hands caught.

Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and bootlid while the alarm is deactivated.

Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to open allwindows simultaneously.

The function can be changed from unlockingall doors simultaneously, to unlocking the driv-er's door only with one press of the button and,after a further press of the button - within 10seconds - unlocking the remaining doors.

The function can be changed in the menu sys-tem MY CAR under Settings Car settings

Lock settings Doors unlock with boththe alternatives All doors and Driver door,

then all. For a description of the menu system,see page 198.

Approach light duration – Used to switchon the car's lighting at a distance. For moreinformation, see page 91.

Boot lid – Unlocks and disarms the alarmfor the boot lid only. For more information, seepage 58.

Panic function – Used to attract attentionin an emergency.

Press and hold the button for at least 3 sec-onds or press it twice within 3 seconds to acti-vate the direction indicators and the horn.

The function can be turned off with the samebutton once it has been active for at least5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches offautomatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.

Range

The remote control key's functions have arange of about 20 m from the car.

If the car does not verify a button being pressed- move closer and try again.

NOTE

The remote control key functions can bedisrupted by surrounding radio waves,buildings, topographical conditions etc. Thecar can always be locked/unlocked usingthe key blade, see page 46.

If the remote control key is removed from thecar when the engine is running or key positionI or II is active (see page 76) and if all doorsare closed, then a warning message is shownin the information display and an audiblereminder signal sounds at the same time.

The warning message clears and the audioreminder signal stops when the remote controlkey is brought back to the car after:

• The remote control key has been insertedin the ignition switch

• Speed exceeds 30 km/h

• the OK button has been pressed.

02 Locks and alarm


02


Unique PCC functions*

Remote control key with PCC* - Personal CarCommunicator.

Information button

Indicator lamps

Using the information button enables access tocertain information from the car via the indica-tor lamps.

Using the information button

– Press the information button .

> All indicator lamps flash for approxi-mately 7 seconds and the light travelsaround on the PCC. This indicates thatinformation from the car has been read.

If any of the other buttons are pressedduring this time then the reading is inter-rupted.

NOTE

If none of the indicator lamps illumi-nates with repeated use of the informationbutton and in different locations (as well asafter 7 seconds and after the light has trav-elled around on the PCC), contact a work-shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-ommended.

Indicator lamps display information in accord-ance with the following illustration:

Green continuous light – the car is locked.

Yellow continuous light – the car isunlocked.

Red continuous light – the alarm has beentriggered since the car was locked.

Red light flashing alternately in both indi-cator lamps – The alarm was triggered lessthan 5 minutes ago.

Range PCC

The PCC's range for locking, unlocking andboot lid is about 20 m from the car - for otherfunctions up to about 100 m.

If the car does not verify a button being pressed- move closer and try again.

NOTE

The information button functions can bedisrupted by surrounding radio waves,buildings, topographical conditions etc.

Out of PCC range

If the PCC is too far away from the car for theinformation to be read then the status the carwas last left in is shown, without the light trav-elling around on the PCC.

If several PCCs are used for the car then it isonly the PCC last used for locking/unlockingthat shows correct status.

02 Locks and alarm


02


NOTE

If no indicator lamps illuminate whenthe information button is used within rangethen this may be because the last commu-nication between the PCC and the car wasdisrupted by surrounding radio waves,buildings, topographical conditions etc.

Detachable key blade

A remote control key contains a detachablekey blade of metal with which some functionscan be activated and some operations carriedout.

The key blade's unique code is provided byauthorised Volvo workshops, which are rec-ommended when ordering new key blades.

Key blade functions

Using the remote control key's detachable keyblade:

• the left-hand front door can be openedmanually if central locking cannot be acti-vated with the remote control key, seepage 52.

• the rear doors' mechanical child safetylocks can be activated/deactivated, seepage 61.

• the right-hand front door and the reardoors can be locked manually, e.g. in theevent of power failure, see page 55.

• access to the glovebox and cargo area(privacy locking*) is blocked, seepage 48.

• the boot lid can be opened manually if thecar is de-energised, see page 58.

• the airbag for front passenger seat(PACOS)* can be activated/deactivated,see page 22.

Removing the key blade

Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.

At the same time pull the key blade straightout backwards.

Attaching the key blade

Carefully refit the key blade into its location inthe remote control key.

1. Hold the remote control key with the slotpointed up and lower the key blade into itsslot.

2. Lightly press the key blade. You shouldhear a "click" when the key blade is lockedin.

Unlocking doors with the key blade

If central locking cannot be activated with theremote control key - e.g. if the batteries aredischarged - then the left-hand front door canbe opened as follows:

1. Unlock the left-hand front door with the keyblade in the door handle's lock cylinder.

See also the illustration and further infor-mation see page 52.

NOTE

When the door has been unlocked using thekey blade and is opened, the alarm is trig-gered.

2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting theremote control key in the ignition switch.

02 Locks and alarm


02

47

For a car with the Keyless system, seepage 52.

02 Locks and alarm

Privacy locking*

02


General information on privacy locking

G02

1083

Active locks for remote control key with key blade.

G02

1084

Active locks for remote control key, without keyblade and privacy locking activated.

The privacy locking function is intended forwhen the car is left for service, with a hotelparking valet or similar. The glovebox is then

locked and the boot lid lock is disconnectedfrom the central locking - the boot lid cannotbe opened with either the central locking but-ton in the front doors or the remote control key.

This means that the remote control key withoutkey blade can only be used to activate/deacti-vate the alarm, to open the doors and to drivethe car.

The remote control key without key blade canthen be handed over to the service or hotel staff- the loose key blade is retained by the carowner.

Activate/deactivate

Activating privacy locking.

To activate privacy locking:

Insert the key blade in the glovebox lockcylinder.

Turn the key blade 180 degrees clockwise.The keyhole is vertical in the locked posi-tion for privacy locking.

Pull out the key blade. The information dis-play shows a message at the same time.

The glovebox is then locked and the boot lidcan no longer be unlocked with the remotecontrol key or the central locking button.

NOTE

Do not reinsert the key blade into the remotecontrol key but keep it in a safe placeinstead.

• Deactivation takes place in reverse order.

For information on locking the glovebox only,see page 57.

02 Locks and alarm

Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*

02


Replacing the battery

The batteries should be replaced if:

• the information symbol is illuminated andthe display shows Low battery in remote

control. Please change batteries.

and/or

• the locks repeatedly do not react to signalsfrom the remote control key within20 metres from the car.

Opening

Slide the spring-loaded catch to theside.

At the same time pull the key bladestraight out backwards.

Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in thehole behind the spring-loaded catch andgently prize the remote control key up.

NOTE

Turn the remote control key over with thebuttons facing up, this is to avoid the bat-teries falling out when it is opened.

IMPORTANT

Avoid touching the battery and its terminalswith your fingers, as this could damage theirfunctionality.

Battery replacement

Closely study how the battery/batteries aresecured on the inside of the cover, withregard to their (+) and (–) sides.

Remove control key (1 battery)

1. Carefully prize out the battery.2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.

PCC* (2 batteries)

1. Carefully prize out the batteries.2. First install one new one with the (+) side

up.3. Position the white plastic tab in between

and finally install a second new battery withthe (+) side down.

Battery type

Use batteries with the designation CR2430, 3V- one in the remote control key and two in thePCC.

Assembly

1. Press the remote control key together.

2. Hold the remote control key with the slotpointed up and lower the key blade into itsslot.

3. Lightly press the key blade. You shouldhear a "click" when the key blade is lockedin.

02 Locks and alarm

Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*

02


IMPORTANT

Make sure that you dispose of old batteriesin an environmentally-friendly way.

02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

02


Keyless lock and ignition system (only

PCC1)

General

G02

0577

The keyless drive function in the PCC allowsthe car to be unlocked, driven and locked with-out the need for a key. You simply have to havethe PCC with you. The system makes it easierand more convenient to open the car, e.g.when your hands are full.

Both of the car's PCCs incorporate the Keylessfunction. Additional PCCs can be ordered, seepage 42.

PCC range

In order to open a door or the boot lid, a PCCmust be no more than approx. 1.5 metres from

the car door handle or boot lid. This means thatthe person who wishes to lock or unlock a doormust have the PCC with him or her. It is notpossible to lock or unlock a door if the PCC ison the opposite side of the car.

The red rings in the preceding illustration indi-cate the range covered by the system's anten-nas.

If all PCCs are removed from the car when theengine is running or key position I or II is active(see page 76) and if all doors are closed, thena warning message is shown in the informationdisplay and an audible reminder signal soundsat the same time.

The warning message clears and the audioreminder signal stops when the PCC is broughtback to the car after:

• a door has been opened and closed

• the PCC is inserted into the ignition switch

• the OK button has been pressed.

Handling the PCC safely

If a PCC with keyless drive function is left in thecar, it is deactivated temporarily when the caris locked. This prevents unauthorised entry.

However, if someone breaks into the car,opens the door and finds the PCC, it can be

reactivated. It is therefore important to handleall PCCs with great care.

IMPORTANT

Never leave a PCC behind in the car.

Interference to PCC function

Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter-fere with the keyless drive system.

NOTE

Do not place/store the PCC near a mobilephone or metal object - no closer than 10-15cm.

If interference is experienced nonetheless, usethe PCC and the key blade as a remote controlkey, see page 43.

1 Personal Car Communicator, see page 45.

02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

02


Locking

Cars with the Keyless system have a pressure-sensitive area on the outer handle of the doors anda rubberised button next to the boot lid's rubber-ised pressure plate.

Lock the doors and the boot lid with one longpress on any of the door handles' pressure-sensitive areas or press the smaller of the bootlid's two rubberised buttons - the lock indicatorin the windscreen confirms that locking hasbeen completed by starting to flash, seepage 43.

All doors and the boot lid must be closedbefore the car can be locked - otherwise thecar is not locked.

NOTE

On cars with automatic transmission, thegear selector must be set in the P position– otherwise the car cannot be locked or thealarm armed.

Unlocking

Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps adoor handle or the boot lid's rubberised pres-sure plate is actuated - open the door or bootlid as normal.

NOTE

The door handles normally register a handthat takes hold of the handle, but with thickgloves on or after a very quick hand move-ment a second attempt may be required, orwith the glove taken off.

Unlocking with the key blade

Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover.

If central locking cannot be activated with thePCC, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, thenthe left-hand front door can be opened with thePCC's detachable key blade (see page 46)

To access the lock cylinder, the door handle'splastic cover must be removed - this is alsodone with the key blade:

1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straightup into the hole on the underside of thedoor handle/cover - do not prize.> The plastic cover loosens automatically

by means of the torque when the blade

02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

02


is pushed straight up and into the open-ing.

2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cylin-der and unlock the door.

3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.

NOTE

When the driver's door is unlocked using thekey blade and is opened, the alarm is trig-gered. It is switched off by inserting the PCCin the ignition switch, see page 63.

Key memory2 – driver's seat and door

mirrors

PCC memory function

If several people each with a PCC approach thecar, then the settings for seat and mirrors areimplemented for the person who opens thedriver's door.

After the driver's door has been opened byperson A with PCC-A, but person B with PCC-B shall drive, the settings can be changed inthree ways:

• Standing by the driver's door, or sittingbehind the steering wheel, person B

presses their PCC's unlock button, seepage 43.

• Select one of three possible memories forseat adjustment with seat button 1-3, seepage 79.

• Adjust seat and mirrors manually, seepage 79 and 99.

Lock settings

The Keyless function can be adapted by indi-cating in the menu system MY CAR whichdoors shall be unlocked, under Car settings

Lock settings Keyless entry - thereselect between All doors unlock, Any door,Doors on same side and Both front doors.


Antenna location

The keyless system has a number of integratedantennae located around the car:

Rear bumper, centre

Door handle, left rear

Parcel shelf, centre, underside

Door handle, right rear

Centre console, under the rear section

Centre console, under the front section.

2 Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.

02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

02


WARNING

People with pacemaker operations shouldnot come closer than 22 cm to the keylesssystem's antennae with their pacemaker.This is to prevent interference between thepacemaker and the keyless system.

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

02


From the outside

The remote control key can lock/unlock alldoors and the boot lid simultaneously. Differ-ent sequences for unlocking can be selected,see "Unlocking with the remote control key"page 44.

In order that the lock sequence can be acti-vated, the driver's door must be closed - if anyof the other doors or the boot lid is open, thenit/they is/are locked and the alarm is activatedonly when it/they are closed. With the Key-less* system all the doors and boot lid must beclosed.

NOTE

Be aware of the risk of locking the remotecontrol key in the car.

If it is not possible to lock/unlock with theremote control key, the battery may be dis-charged - lock or unlock the left-hand frontdoor with the detachable key blade, seepage 46.

NOTE

Remember that the alarm is triggered whenthe door is opened after being unlockedwith the key blade - the alarm is switchedoff when the remote control key is insertedinto the ignition switch.

WARNING

Be aware of the risk of being locked in thecar when it is locked from the outside usingthe remote control key - it is then not pos-sible to open any of the doors from theinside with the door controls. Read moreabout this in the section "Deadlocks" lateron.

Automatic relocking

If none of the doors or the boot lid is openedwithin 2 minutes of unlocking, all are lockedagain automatically. This function reduces therisk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally.(For cars with alarm, see page 62.)

Manual locking

In certain situations the car must be lockablemanually, e.g. in the event of power failure.

The left-hand front door can be locked with itslock cylinder and the remote control key'sdetachable key blade, see page 52.

Other doors do not have lock cylinders andinstead have lock knobs on each door's endface which must be re-turned - then they aremechanically locked/blocked against openingfrom the outside. The doors can still be openedfrom the inside.

Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed upwith child safety locks, see page 61.

– Use the remote control key's detachablekey blade to turn the knob, see page 46.

The door is blocked against opening fromthe outside.

The door can be opened from both theoutside and the inside.

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

02


NOTE

• A door's knob control only locks thatparticular door - not all doors simulta-neously.

• A manually locked rear door with anactivated manual child safety lock can-not be opened from either the outsideor the inside, see page 61. A rear doorthat is locked in this way can only beunlocked with the remote control key orcentral locking button.

From the inside

Central locking

Central locking.

All of the doors and the boot lid can be lockedor unlocked simultaneously using the central

locking button on the driver's door and thepassenger door*.

• Press one side of the button to lock -the other side to unlock.

Unlocking

A door can be unlocked from the inside in twodifferent ways:

• Press the central locking button .

Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to alsoopen all the side windows* simultaneously.

• Pull the door handle and open the door -the door is unlocked and opened in oneoperation.

Lamp in lock button

Central locking is available in two variants - thelamp in the central locking button for the driv-er's door has different meanings dependent onthe variant.

With central locking button only in the driver'sdoor, other doors have no button:

• Illuminated lamp means that all doors arelocked.

With central locking button on both front doorsand electric lock button in each rear door:

• Illuminated lamp means that only that par-ticular door is locked. When all buttons areilluminated all doors are locked.

Locking

• Press the central locking button - allclosed doors are locked.

Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to alsoclose all the side windows and the sunroof*simultaneously.

Lock button* rear doors

The button's lamp illuminates when the door islocked.

The rear door lock buttons only lock theirrespective rear door.

To unlock the door:

• Pull the door handle - the door is unlockedand opened.

Global opening

Press and hold the central locking button (at least 4 seconds) to also open all the win-

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

02

57

dows simultaneously - for example, to quicklyventilate the passenger compartment duringhot weather.

Automatic locking

The doors and boot lid are locked automati-cally when the car starts to move.


Car settings Lock settings Automatic

door locking. For a description of the menusystem, see page 198.

Glovebox

The glovebox can only be locked/unlockedusing the remote control key's detachable keyblade. For information on the key blade, seepage 46.

Locking the glovebox:

Insert the key blade in the glovebox lockcylinder.

Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.The keyhole is horizontal in the lockedposition.

Pull out the key blade.

• Unlock by carrying this out in reverseorder.

For information on privacy locking, seepage 48.

Boot lid

Manual opening

Rubber plate with electrical contact.

The boot lid is held closed by an electrical lock.To open:

1. Push down gently on the wide rubberisedpressure plate under the outer handle - thelock is released.

2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully openthe tailgate.

IMPORTANT

• Minimal force is required to release theluggage compartment lock - just gentlypress the rubberised panel.

• Do not place the lift force on the rubberpanel when opening the luggage com-partment - lift the handle. Using toomuch force may damage the electricalcontact for the rubber panel.

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

02


Unlocking with the remote control key

The alarm for the boot lid can be disarmed* andthe boot lid unlocked and opened on its ownby using the remote control key's button.

The lock indicator on the instrument panelstops flashing which indicates that not all of thecar is locked and the alarm's* level and move-ment sensors and the sensors for opening theboot lid are disconnected.

The doors remain locked and armed.

The boot lid can be opened in two

different ways

One press - The boot lid is unlocked, butremains closed - press lightly on the rubberisedpressure plate under the outer handle and liftthe boot lid.

If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutesthen it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.

Two presses - The boot lid is unlocked and thelock is disengaged at which the boot lid opensabout a centimetre - lift the outer handle toopen. Rain, cold, frost or snow could howeverprevent the tailgate from disengaging from thelock.

NOTE

• When the boot lid/tailgate is unlockedwith 2 presses, automatic relockingdoes not take place because the bootlid/tailgate is open - it must be closedmanually.

• After the boot lid/tailgate has beenclosed it is unlocked and the alarm isnot armed - relock it and re-arm thealarm with the remote control key's lockbutton .

Unlocking with the key blade

Prize gently with the key blade.

The boot lid can be opened manually with thekey blade if the car's battery has drained - theboot lid cannot then be opened with the light-ing panel button.

Prize loose the lock cylinder's cover.

Unlock the boot lid by turning the key bladeapproximately a quarter turn anticlockwiseas illustrated.

3. Refit the cover.

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

02


Locking with the remote control key

• Press the remote control key's button forlocking, , see page 43.

The lock indicator on the instrument panelstarts flashing, which means that the car islocked and the alarm* has been activated.

Unlocking the car from inside

To unlock/open the boot lid:

– Press the lighting panel button (1) - the lockreleases and the boot lid is opened a fewcentimetres.

Deadlocks*1

Deadlocks means that all door handles aremechanically disengaged, which preventsdoors being opened from the inside.

The deadlocks are activated with the remotecontrol key and are set after an approximately10 second delay after the doors have beenlocked.

NOTE

If a door is opened within the delay time thenthe sequence is interrupted and the alarm isdeactivated.

The car can only be unlocked from a deadlockstate with the remote control key. The front leftdoor can also be unlocked with the detachablekey blade.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to remain in the carwithout first deactivating the deadlocks inorder to avoid the risk of anyone beinglocked in.

Temporary deactivation

Active menu options are indicated with a cross.

MY CAR

OK MENU

TUNE knob control

EXIT

If someone is going to stay in the car but thedoors must be locked from the outside, thenthe deadlocks function can be temporarilyswitched off. This is carried out as follows:

1. Access the menu system MY CAR underSettings Car settings Reduced

Guard (for a detailed description of themenu system, see page 198).

1 Only in combination with alarm.

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

02


2. Select Activate once.> The instrument panel display shows the

message Reduced guard See

manual and the deadlocks function isswitched off when the car is locked.

or

– Select Ask when exiting.> Each time the engine is switched off the

centre console display screen showsthe message Activate Reduced Guard

until engine has started again? fol-lowed by the alternatives Confirm with

OK and Cancel with EXIT.

If the deadlocks function shall be switched

off

– Press OK/MENU and lock the car. (Notethat the alarm's movement and tilt detec-tors* are switched off at the same time, seepage 63.)> The next time the engine is started, the

system is reset to zero and the instru-ment panel display shows the messageFull guard at which the deadlocksfunction and the alarm's movement andtilt detectors are re-engaged.

If the locking system shall not be changed

– Press EXIT and lock the car.

NOTE

• Remember that the alarm is activatedwhen the car is locked.

• If any of the doors are opened from theinside then the alarm is triggered.

02 Locks and alarm

Child safety locks

02


Manual blocking of the rear doors

The child safety locks prevent children fromopening a rear door from the inside.

With child safety locks. Not to be mixed up withmanual door locks, see page 55.

The child safety locks are located on the trailingedge of the rear doors and are only accessiblewhen the doors are open.

To activate/deactivate the child safety locks:

– Use the remote control key's detachablekey blade to turn the knob - see page 46.

The door is blocked against opening fromthe inside.

The door can be opened from both theoutside and the inside.

WARNING

Each rear door has two knob controls - donot mix up the child safety lock with themechanical door lock.

NOTE

• A door's knob control only blocks thatparticular door - not both rear doorssimultaneously.

• Cars with an electric child safety lock donot have a manual child lock.

Electrical locking of the rear doors*and power windows

Control panel driver's door.

The child safety locks can be activated/deac-tivated in all key positions higher than 0 - seepage 76. Activation/deactivation can be per-formed up to 2 minutes after switching off theengine, provided that no door is opened.

To activate the child safety locks:

1. Start the engine or choose a key positionhigher than 0.

2. Press the button in the driver's door controlpanel.> The information display shows the mes-

sage Rear child locks Activated andthe button's lamp illuminates - the locksare active.

When the electric child safety lock is activethen the rear:

• windows can only be opened with the driv-er's door control panel

• doors cannot be opened from inside.

The current setting is stored when the engineis switched off - if the child safety locks areactivated at engine shutdown, the function willremain activated the next time the engine isstarted.

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

02


General

Activated alarm is triggered if:

• a door, the bonnet or the boot lid is opened

• a movement is detected in the passengercompartment (if fitted with a movementdetector*)

• the car is raised or towed away (if fittedwith a tilt detector*)

• the battery's cable is disconnected

• the siren is disconnected.

If there is a fault in the alarm system, the infor-mation display shows a message. In whichcase, contact a workshop - an authorisedVolvo workshop is recommended.

NOTE

The movement sensors trigger an alarm inthe event of movement in the passengercompartment - air currents are also regis-tered. For this reason the alarm is triggeredif the car is left with a window or the sunroofopen or if the passenger compartmentheater is used.

To avoid this: Close the window/sunroofwhen leaving the car. If the car's integratedpassenger compartment heater (or a porta-ble electric heater) shall be used - direct theairflow from the air vents so that they are notpointing upwards in the passenger com-partment.

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair or modify alarmsystem components. All such attemptscould affect the terms of insurance.

Alarm indicator

Same LED as lock indicator, see page 43.

A red LED on the instrument panel indicatesthe alarm system's status:

• LED not lit – Alarm not armed

• The LED flashes once every other second– Alarm is armed

• The LED flashes rapidly after disarming thealarm (and until the remote control key isinserted in the ignition switch and key posi-tion I is selected) – Alarm has been trig-gered.

Arming the alarm

– Press the remote control key lock button.

Deactivate the alarm

– Press the remote control key unlock but-ton.

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

02


Deactivating a triggered alarm

– Press the remote control key unlock buttonor insert the remote control key in the igni-tion switch.

Other alarm functions

Automatic re-arming of the alarm

This function prevents the car being left withthe alarm disarmed unintentionally.

If the car is unlocked with the remote controlkey (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of thedoors or the boot lid is opened within 2minutes, then the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car is relocked at the same time.

Remote control key not working

If the alarm cannot be deactivated with theremote control key, e.g. if the key's battery isdischarged - the car can be unlocked, dis-armed and the engine started as follows:

1. Open the driver's door with the detachablekey blade - see page 52.> The alarm is triggered, the alarm indica-

tor flashes rapidly and the siren sounds.

2. Insert the remote control key in the ignitionswitch.> The alarm is deactivated and the alarm

indicator goes out.

3. Start the engine.

Alarm signals

When the alarm is triggered, the following hap-pens:

• A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until thealarm is switched off. The siren has its ownbattery and works independently of the carbattery.

• The direction indicators flash for 5 minutesor until the alarm is switched off.

Reduced alarm level

To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm -e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or duringtransport on a car train or car ferry - temporarilydeactivate the movement and tilt detectors.

The procedure is the same as with the tempo-rary disengaging of deadlocks, see page 59.


Instruments and controls........................................................................ 66Volvo Sensus ......................................................................................... 75Key positions.......................................................................................... 76Seats....................................................................................................... 78Steering wheel........................................................................................ 82Lighting................................................................................................... 83Wipers and washing................................................................................ 95Windows, rearview and door mirrors...................................................... 97Compass*.............................................................................................. 102Power sunroof*..................................................................................... 103Alcolock*............................................................................................... 105Starting the engine................................................................................ 109Starting the engine – Flexifuel............................................................... 114Starting the engine – external battery................................................... 116Gearboxes............................................................................................. 117DRIVe Start/Stop*................................................................................. 123All-wheel drive – AWD*......................................................................... 130Foot brake............................................................................................. 131Parking brake........................................................................................ 133

HomeLink *.......................................................................................... 137

YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT


Instruments and controls

03

66

Instrument overview

Left-hand drive.



03

��


Function Page

Menus and messages,direction indicators,main/dipped beam, tripcomputer

84,89, 196,220

Cruise control 148, 150

Horn, airbags 20, 82

Combined instrumentpanel

69, 73

Menu, audio and phonecontrol

198,232, 258,234

START/STOP ENGINEbutton

109

Ignition switch 76

Display for infotainmentand menus

198,231, 234

Door handle –

Control panel 56, 61,97, 99

Hazard warning flashers 89

Function Page

Control for infotainmentand menu control

198,231, 234

Control panel for climatecontrol

209

Gear selector 117

Controls for active chas-sis (Four-C)*

222

Wipers and washing 95, 96

Steering wheel adjust-ment

82

Bonnet opener 322

Parking brake 133

Seat adjustment* 79

Headlamp control,opener for fuel filler flapand boot lid

57, 83,283



03

68

Right-hand drive.



03

��


Function Page

Display for infotainmentand menus

198,231, 234

Ignition switch 76

START/STOP ENGINEbutton

109

Cruise control 148, 150

Combined instrumentpanel

69, 73

Horn, airbags 20, 82

Menu, audio and phonecontrol

198,232, 258,234

Wipers and washing 95, 96

Door handle –

Control panel 56, 61,97, 99

Headlamp control,opener for fuel filler flapand boot lid

57, 83,283

Seat adjustment* 79

Function Page

Parking brake 133

Steering wheel adjust-ment

82

Menus and messages,direction indicators,main/dipped beam, tripcomputer

84,89, 196,220

Gear selector 117

Controls for active chas-sis (Four-C)*

222

Control panel for climatecontrol

209

Control for infotainmentand menu control

198,231, 234

Hazard warning flashers 89

Bonnet opener 322

Information displays

The combined instrument panel's informationdisplays show information on some of the car'sfunctions, e.g. cruise control, trip computerand messages. The information is shown withtext and symbols.

There are further descriptions under the func-tions that use the information displays.



03


Meters

Meters in the combined instrument panel.

Speedometer

Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page220, and Refuelling, page 283.

Tachometer. The meter indicates enginespeed in thousands of revolutions perminute (rpm).

Indicator and warning symbols

Indicator and warning symbols.

Main beam and direction indicator symbol

warning symbols1

Symbol for DRIVe - Start/Stop*, seepage 123

Indicator symbols

Functionality check

All indicator and warning symbols illuminate inkey position II or when the engine is started.When the engine has started, all the symbolsshould go out except the parking brake sym-bol, which only goes out when the brake is dis-engaged.

If the engine does not start or if the functionalitycheck is carried out in key position II then allsymbols go out after 5 seconds except thesymbol for faults in the car's emissions systemand the symbol for low oil pressure.

Indicator symbols

Symbol Specification

ABL fault

Emissions system

ABS fault

Rear fog lamp on

Stability system

Stability system, sport mode

Engine preheater (diesel)

Low level in fuel tank

Information, read display text

1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text. For information on checking the oil level, see page 323.



03



Main beam On

Left-hand direction indicators

Right-hand direction indicators

DRIVe - Start/Stop*, the engineauto-stopped, see page 123

Tyre pressure system*, seepage 313

ABL fault

The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen inthe ABL function (Active Bending Lights).

Emissions system

If the symbol illuminates then it may be due toa fault in the car's emissions system. Drive toa workshop for checking. Volvo recommendsthat you seek assistance from an authorisedVolvo workshop.

ABS fault

If this symbol illuminates then the system is notworking. The car's regular brake system con-tinues to work, but without the ABS function.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off theengine.

2. Restart the engine.

3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive toa workshop to have the ABS systemchecked. Volvo recommends that youseek assistance from an authorised Volvoworkshop.

Rear fog lamp on

This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lampis on. There is only one fog lamp. It is locatedon the driver's side.

Stability system

A flashing symbol indicates that the stabilitysystem is operating. If the symbol illuminateswith constant glow then there is a fault in thesystem.

Stability system, Sport mode

Sport mode allows for a more active drivingexperience. The system then detects whetherthe accelerator pedal, steering wheel move-ments and cornering are more active than innormal driving and then allows controlled skid-ding of the rear section up to a certain levelbefore it intervenes and stabilises the car.

Engine preheater (diesel)

This symbol illuminates during engine preheat-ing. Preheating takes place mostly due to lowtemperature.

Low level in fuel tank

When the symbol illuminates the level in thefuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.

Information, read display text

When one of the car's systems does notbehave as intended, this information symbolilluminates and a text appears on the informa-tion display. The message text is cleared withthe OK button, see page 196, or it disappearsautomatically after a time (time depending onwhich function is indicated). The informationsymbol can also illuminate in conjunction withother symbols.

NOTE

When a service message is shown, the sym-bol and message are cleared using the OKbutton, or disappear automatically after atime.

Main beam On

The symbol illuminates when main beam is onand with main beam flash.

Left/right-hand direction indicators

Both direction indicator symbols flash whenthe hazard warning flashers are used.

DRIVe – Start/Stop*

The symbol shines when the engine is auto-stopped.

Tyre pressure system

The symbol illuminates in the event of low tyrepressure, or if a fault arises in the tyre pressuresystem.



03

72

Warning symbols


Low oil pressureA

Parking brake applied

Airbags – SRS

Seatbelt reminder

Alternator not charging

Fault in brake system

Warning

A For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressureis not used. Warnings are made via display text, see pages323 and 325.

Low oil pressure

If this symbol illuminates during driving thenthe engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop theengine immediately and check the engine oillevel, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi-nates and the oil level is normal, contact aworkshop. Volvo recommends that you seekassistance from an authorised Volvo work-shop.

Parking brake applied

This symbol illuminates with a constant glowwhen the parking brake is applied. The symbolflashes during application, and then changesover to a constant glow.

A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen.Read the message on the information display.

Airbags – SRS

If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminateswhile driving, it means a fault has beendetected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, orIC systems. Drive immediately to a workshopto have the system checked. Volvo recom-mends that you seek assistance from anauthorised Volvo workshop.

Seatbelt reminder

This symbol illuminates if someone in a frontseat has not put on their seatbelt or if someonein a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.

Alternator not charging

This symbol illuminates during driving if a faulthas occurred in the electrical system. Visit aworkshop. Volvo recommends that you seekassistance from an authorised Volvo work-shop.

Fault in brake system

If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid levelmay be too low. Stop the car in a safe place

and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir,see page 327.

If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at thesame time, there may be a fault in the brakeforce distribution system.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off theengine.

2. Restart the engine.

• If both symbols extinguish, continuedriving.

• If the symbols remain illuminated, checkthe level in the brake fluid reservoir, seepage 327. If the brake fluid level is nor-mal but the symbols are still illuminated,the car can be driven, with great care, toa workshop to have the brake systemchecked. Volvo recommends that youseek assistance from an authorisedVolvo workshop.

WARNING

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in thebrake fluid reservoir, do not drive furtherbefore topping up the brake fluid.

The loss of brake fluid must be investigatedby a workshop. Volvo recommends that youcontact an authorised Volvo workshop.



03


WARNING

If the brake and ABS symbols are illumi-nated at the same time, there is a risk thatthe rear end will skid during heavy braking.

Warning

The red warning symbol illuminates when afault has been indicated which could affect thesafety and/or driveability of the car. An explan-atory text is shown on the information displayat the same time. The symbol remains visibleuntil the fault has been rectified but the textmessage can be cleared with the OK button,see page 196. The warning symbol can alsoilluminate in conjunction with other symbols.

Action:

1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the carfurther.

2. Read the information on the informationdisplay. Implement the action in accord-ance with the message in the display. Clearthe message using the OK button.

Reminder – doors not closed

If one of the doors, the bonnet2 or boot lid isnot closed properly then the information orwarning symbol illuminates together with anexplanatory text message in the combined

instrument panel. Stop the car in a safe placeas soon as possible and close the door, bonnetor boot lid, whichever is open.

If the car is driven at a speed lower thanapprox. 7 km/h then the information

symbol illuminates.

If the car is driven at a speed higherthan approx. 7 km/h then the warning

symbol illuminates.

Trip meter

Trip meter and controls.

Display for trip meter

Controls for switching between trip metersT1 and T2, as well as resetting the tripmeters

The meters are used to measure short dis-tances. The distance is shown in the display.

One short press on the control switchesbetween the two trip meters T1 and T2. A longpress (more than 2 seconds) resets the cur-rently displayed trip meter.

Clock

Clock and setting knob.

Display for showing the time

Controls for setting the clock

Turn the knob clockwise/anticlockwise to setthe clock. Turn first to the end position and thenturn past/over the end position a furtherapprox. 1 mm - a "click" sounds and is felt in

2 Only cars with alarm*.



03


the button. Each "click" scrolls 1 minute. Inorder to change quickly - hold in the "clickposition".

In connection with a message the clock can betemporarily replaced by a symbol, seepage 196.

Setting the clock in MY CAR

In addition to the previous manual/mechanicalmethod the clock can also be set in the menugroup MY CAR, for more information seepage 198.

1. Locate Settings System options

Time.2. The cursor is located in the first box for

Hour: Press OK - the box is activated.3. Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and

press OK - the box is deactivated.

4. Turn TUNE to select the box for Minute (A)and press OK - the box is activated (B).

5. Turn TUNE to set the correct minute andpress OK - the box is deactivated.

6. Turn TUNE to select the box for OK andpress OK - the setting is complete.

The menu option Settings System options

Time format selects the 24h or 12h system(AM/PM).

RSI*

The function RSI (Road Sign Identification)helps the driver to see road signs containinginformation on current speed, that a motorwayor road is starting/ending and when overtakingis prohibited. For detailed information on RSI,see page 144.


Volvo Sensus

03


General

Control panel in centre console

Navigation* - NAV, see separate owner'smanual (Road and Traffic Information Sys-tem - RTI).

Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*), seepage 230.

Car settings - MY CAR, see page 198.

Park assist camera - CAM*, seepage 187.

Climate control, see page 206.

Volvo Sensus is the car's operating system, theheart of your personal Volvo experience. VolvoSensus combines and presents many func-tions in several of the car's systems on thecentre console TV screen. With Volvo Sensus

the car can be personalised by means of anintuitive user interface. Settings can be madein Car settings, Infotainment, Climate, etc.

With the centre console buttons and controlsor the steering wheel's right-hand keypad*functions can be activated or deactivated andmany different settings can be made.

With a press on MY CAR all settings related tothe driving and control of the car are presented,such as City Safety, Locks and alarm, settingthe clock, etc.

With a press on the respective function:RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, NAV* and CAM* othersources, systems and functions can be acti-vated, e.g. AM, FM1, CD, DVD*, TV*, Blue-tooth*, navigation* and park assist camera*.

For more information on all functions/systems,see the respective section in the owner's man-ual.


Key positions

03


Insert and remove the remote controlkey

Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/inserted.

NOTE

For cars with the Keyless* function the keydoes not need to be inserted into the ignitionswitch but can be stored in e.g. a pocket.For more information on Keyless functions -see page 51.

Insert the key

1. Hold the end of the remote control key withthe detachable key blade and insert the keyin the ignition switch.

2. Then press the key in the lock up to its endposition.

IMPORTANT

Foreign objects in the ignition switch mayjeopardise the function or destroy the lock.

Do not press the remote control key incor-rectly turned - Hold the end with the detach-able key blade, see page 46.

Withdraw the key

• Push the remote control key, allow it toeject, then pull it out from the ignitionswitch.

Functions at different levels

In order to enable the use of a limited numberof functions with the engine switched off, thecar's electrical system can be set in 3 differentlevels (key positions) - 0, I and II - with theremote control key. Throughout this owner'smanual these levels are described using thedenomination "key positions".

The following table shows the functions avail-able in each key position/level.

Level Functions

0 • Odometer, clock and tem-perature gauge are illumi-nated.

• Power seats can be adjusted.

• The audio system can beused for a limited time - seepage 230.

I • Sunroof, power windows, 12V socket in the passengercompartment, RTI, phone,ventilation fan and wind-screen wipers can be used.

II • The headlamps come on.

• Warning/indicator lamps illu-minate for 5 seconds.

• Several other systems areactivated. However, heatingin seat cushions and the rearwindow can only be activatedafter the engine has beenstarted.

This key position consumes a

lot of current from the starter

battery and should therefore be

avoided!


Key positions

03


Choosing key position/level

Key position 0

• Unlock the car - this means that the car'selectrical system is at level 0.

Key position I

• With the remote control key fully insertedinto the ignition switch1 - Briefly pressSTART/STOP ENGINE.

NOTE

To reach level I or II without starting theengine - do not depress the brake/clutchpedal when these key positions are due tobe selected.

Key position II

• With the remote control key fully insertedinto the ignition switch1 - Give a long2 presson START/STOP ENGINE.

Back to key position 0

• To return to key position 0 from position IIand I - Briefly press on START/STOP

ENGINE.

Audio system

For information on the audio system's func-tions with remote control key removed - seepage 230.

Starting and stopping the engine

For information about starting/switching off theengine - see page 109.

Towing

For important information about the remotecontrol key during towing - see page 298.

1 Not necessary for cars with the Keyless* function.2 Approx. 2 seconds.


Seats

03


Front seats

Lumbar support adjustment, turn thewheel1.

Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjustthe distance to the steering wheel and ped-als. Check that the seat is locked afterchanging position.

Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion,pump up/down.

Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.

Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.

Control panel for power seat*.

WARNING

Adjust the position of the driver's seatbefore setting off, never while driving. Makesure that the seat is in locked position inorder to avoid personal injury in the event ofsudden braking or an accident.

Lowering the front seat backrest

The passenger seat backrest can be foldedforward to make room for long loads.

Move the seat as far back/down as possi-ble.

Adjust the backrest to an upright position.

Lift the catches on the rear of the backrestand fold it forward.

4. Push the seat forward so that the headrestraint "locks" in under the glovebox.

Raising takes place in reverse order.

WARNING

Grasp the backrest and make sure that it isproperly locked after being folded up inorder to avoid personal injury in the event ofsudden braking or an accident.

1 Also applies to power seat.


Seats

03

��


Power seat*

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Seat forward/backward and up/down

Backrest rake

The power front seats have overload protectionwhich is tripped if a seat is blocked by anobject. If this happens, go to key position I or0 and wait a short time before adjusting theseat again.

Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)can be made at a time.

Preparations

The seats can be adjusted for a certain timeafter unlocking the door with the remote con-

trol key without the key in the ignition switch.Seat adjustment is normally made in key posi-tion I and can always be made when the engineis running.

Seat with memory function*

Store setting

Memory button

Memory button

Memory button

Button for storing settings

1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.

2. Hold the button depressed to store set-tings while depressing one of the memorybuttons.

Using a stored setting

Hold one of the memory buttons depresseduntil the seat and the door mirrors stop. If yourelease the button then the movement of theseat will stop.

Key memory* in remote control key2

All remote control keys can be used by differ-ent drivers to store the settings for the driver'sseat and door mirrors3. Proceed as follows:

• Adjust the seat as you want it.

• Lock the car by pressing the lock button onthe remote control key that you normally

2 For key memory for Keyless function, see page 53.3 Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power door mirrors.


Seats

03

80

use. This stores the positions of the seatand door mirrors in the remote controlkey's memory4.

• Unlock the car (by pressing the unlock but-ton on the same remote control key) andopen the driver's door. The driver's seatand door mirrors will automatically adoptthe positions that are stored in the remotecontrol key's memory (if the seat has beenmoved since you locked the car).

The key memory can be activated/deactivatedin the menu system MY CAR under Settings

Car settings Car key memory. For adescription of the menu system, seepage 198.

Emergency stop

If the seat accidentally begins to move, pressone of the setting buttons for the seat or mem-ory buttons in order to stop the seat.

Restarting to reach the seat position stored inthe key memory is performed by pressing theunlock button on the remote control key. Thedriver's door must then be open.

WARNING

Risk of crushing! Make sure that children donot play with the controls. Check that thereare no objects in front of, behind or underthe seat during adjustment. Ensure thatnone of the backseat passengers will betrapped.

Heated seats

For heated seats, see page 211.

Rear seats

Head restraint, centre seat, rear

Adjust the head restraint according to passen-ger height so that the whole of the back of the

head is covered if possible. Slide it up asrequired.

To lower the head restraint again, the button bythe left-hand shaft must be pressed in while thehead restraint is pressed down carefully.

Lowering the rear seat backrest

IMPORTANT

There must be no objects on the rear seatwhen the backrest is to be folded down. Theseat belts must not be connected either.Otherwise there is a risk of damaging therear seat upholstery.

4 This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.


Seats

03


The backrest is in two parts. The parts can befolded forward, together or separately.

1. Pull on the required handle. They arelocated just inside the hatch opening.

2. Fold the backrest forward.

Lower the centre head restraint fully if thebackrest's wide section shall be lowered.

NOTE

When the backrests have been lowered thehead restraints must be moved forwardslightly so as not to make contact with theseat cushion.

WARNING

Take hold of the backrests and make surethey are locked properly after opening themout in order to prevent injury under hardbraking or in the event of an accident.

Electrical lowering of the rear seat's

outer head restraints*

1. The remote control key must be in positionI or II.

2. Press the button to lower the rear outerhead restraints to improve rearward visi-bility.

WARNING

Do not lower the outer head restraints ifthere are any passengers using of the outerseats.

Move the head restraint back manually until aclick is heard.

WARNING

The head restraints must be in locked posi-tion after being raised.


Steering wheel

03


Adjusting

G02

1138

Adjusting the steering wheel.

Lever - releasing the steering wheel

Possible steering wheel positions

The steering wheel can be adjusted for bothheight and depth:

1. Pull the lever towards you to release thesteering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the positionthat suits you.

3. Push back the lever to fix the steeringwheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press thesteering wheel lightly at the same time asyou push the lever back.

WARNING

Adjust and secure the steering wheel beforedriving.

With speed related power steering* the level ofsteering force can be adjusted, see page 222.

Keypads*

Keypads in the steering wheel.

Cruise control, see page 148

Adaptive cruise control, see page 150

Audio and phone control, see page 231.

Horn

Horn.

Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.


Lighting

03

��


Headlamp control

Overview, headlamp control.

Thumbwheel for adjusting display andinstrument lighting

Rear fog lamp

Headlamp control

Thumbwheel1 for headlamp levelling

Headlamp control with AUTO mode

Overview, headlamp control.

Thumbwheel for adjusting display andinstrument lighting

Rear fog lamp

Headlamp control

Thumbwheel1 for headlamp levelling

Instrument lighting

Different display and instrument lighting isswitched on depending on key position, seepage 76.

The display lighting is automatically subduedin darkness - the sensitivity is set with thethumbwheel.

The intensity of the instrument lighting isadjusted with the thumbwheel.

Headlamp levelling

The load in the car changes the vertical align-ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz-zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjustingthe height of the beam. Lower the beam if thecar is heavily laden.

1. Leave the engine running, or have the car'selectrical system in key position I.

2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/lower beam alignment.

Cars with active Xenon headlamps* have auto-matic headlamp levelling and are therefore notequipped with the thumbwheel.

1 Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps*.


Lighting

03


Main/dipped beam

Headlamp control and stalk switch.

Position for main beam flash

Position for main beam

Position Specification

Dipped beamA/Dipped beamoff.

Main beam can be activatedA.

Main beam flash operates inthis position.

Position/parking lamps

Dipped beam

Main beam can be activated.


A Applies to certain markets.

Headlamp control with AUTO mode


Position for main beam flash

Position for main beam


Dipped beam off.




Lighting

03

��



Dipped beamA/Dipped beamoff in good light conditions. The"Tunnel detection*" functionactivates dipped beam in poorlight conditions.

The function for "Main beamwith automatic activation*" canbe used.


Dipped beam

Main beam can be activated.


A Applies to certain markets.

Volvo recommends that mode is used,as long as the traffic situation or weather con-ditions are not unfavourable for the function for"Main beam with automatic activation*".

Main beam flash

Move the stalk switch gently towards the steer-ing wheel to the position for main beam flash.

Main beam comes on until the stalk switch isreleased.

Dipped beam

When the engine is started, dipped beam isactivated automatically2 if the headlamp con-trol is in position . If necessary, auto-matic dipped beam for this position can bedeactivated by a workshop. Volvo recom-mends that you contact an authorised Volvoworkshop.

In position dipped beam is alwaysswitched on when the engine is running orwhen key position II is active.

Main beam

Main beam can be activated when the head-lamp control is in position 2 or .Activate/deactivate main beam by moving thestalk switch towards the steering wheel to theend position and release. Alternatively, themain beam can be deactivated by a light pressof the stalk switch toward the steering wheel.

When main beam has been activated the sym-bol illuminates in the combined instru-ment panel.

Main beam with automatic activation -

AHB*

Main beam with automatic activation (ActiveHigh Beam - AHB) is a function which uses acamera sensor at the top edge of the wind-screen to detect the headlamp beams ofoncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles infront, and then switches from main beam todipped beam. The lights are switched back tomain beam a second or so after the camerasensor no longer detects any such light.

In cars with this function the headlamp controlhas another design, see page 84.

This function can be activated when the head-lamp control is in position . For activationto take place, the engine must have been run-ning for at least 20 seconds and the speed ofthe car must be 20 km/h or higher.

2 Applies to certain markets, for headlamp control without AUTO mode.


Lighting

03

86

Light switch in position AUTO.

Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the left-hand stalk switch towards the steering wheelto the end position and release. Deactivationwhen main beam is on means that the lightsswitch directly to dipped beam.


When AHB has been activated the symbol

illuminates in the combined instru-ment panel's display. When main beam hasbeen activated the symbol also illumi-nates in the combined instrument panel.

NOTE

Keep the windscreen surface in front of thecamera sensor clean from ice, snow, mistand dirt.

Do not attach or fit anything to the wind-screen in front of the camera sensor, as thiscould reduce or prevent the function of oneor more camera-dependent systems.

If the message AHB temporary unavailable

is shown in the combined instrument panel'sdisplay then you have to switch manuallybetween main and dipped beam. However, theheadlamp control may nevertheless be in posi-tion . The same applies if the messageWindscreen Sensors blocked and the

symbol are shown. The sym-bol goes out when these messages are shown.

AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in sit-uations with dense fog or heavy rain. WhenAHB becomes available again, or the wind-screen sensors are no longer covered, the

message goes out and the symbol illu-minates.

WARNING

AHB is an aid for using optimum light com-position when conditions are favourable.

The driver always bears responsibility formanually switching between main anddipped beam when traffic situations orweather conditions so require.


Lighting

03


IMPORTANT

Examples of when manual switchingbetween main and dipped beam may berequired:

• In heavy rain or dense fog

• In snow flurries or slush

• In moonlight

• When driving in poorly lit built-up areas

• When the traffic ahead has weak light-ing

• If there are pedestrians on or beside theroad

• If there are highly reflective objects suchas signs in the vicinity of the road

• When the lighting from oncoming trafficis obscured by e.g. a crash barrier

• When there is traffic on connectingroads

• On the brow of a hill or in a hollow

• In sharp bends.

For more information on the limitations of thecamera sensor, see page 174.

Tunnel detection*

In cars with rain sensor* the rain sensor detectsthe changed light conditions when the car is

e.g. driven into a tunnel, and dipped beam isactivated within a second in markets withoutautomatic dipped beam. Dipped beam is deac-tivated approx. 20 seconds after the car hasbeen driven out of the tunnel. Note! - The head-lamp control must be in position for tun-nel detection to work.

Active Xenon headlamps - ABL*

Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)and activated (right) respectively.

If the car is equipped with active Xenon head-lamps Active Bending Lights - ABL the lightfrom the headlamps follows the steering wheelmovement in order to provide maximum light-ing in bends and junctions and so provideincreased safety.

The function is activated automatically whenthe car is started. In the event of a fault in thefunction the symbol illuminates in thecombined instrument panel at the same timeas the information display shows an explana-tory text and a further illuminated symbol.

Symbol Display Specifica-tion

Headlamp

failure

Service

required

The systemis disen-gaged. Visita workshopif the mes-sageremains.Volvo rec-ommendsthat youcontact anauthorisedVolvo work-shop.

The function is only active in twilight or dark-ness and only when the car is moving.

The function3 can be deactivated/activated inthe menu system MY CAR under My S60

3 Activated on delivery from the factory.


Lighting

03


Active Bending Lights or under Settings

Car settings Light settings Active

Bending Lights. For a description of the menusystem, see page 199.

For headlamp pattern adjustment, seepage 91.

Auxiliary lamps*

If the car has auxiliary lamps, the driver can usethe MY CAR menu system to choose whetherthey should be deactivated or switched on/offsimultaneously with the main beam4, seepage 200.


Headlamp control in position for position/parkinglamps.

Turn the headlamp control to the position forposition/parking lamps (number plate lightingis illuminated at the same time).

When it is dark outside and the boot lid isopened the rear position lamps illuminate toalert traffic behind. This takes place irrespec-tive of what position the headlamp control is inor what key position the car's electrical systemis in.

Brake lights

The brake light automatically comes on duringbraking. For information on the Emergencybrake lights and automatic hazard warningflashers, see page 131.

Rear fog lamp

Button for rear fog lamp.

The rear fog lamp consists of one rear lamp andcan only be switched on in combination withmain/dipped beam.

Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog lampindicator symbol on the combinedinstrument panel and the light in the button illu-minate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

The rear fog lamp is switched off automaticallywhen the engine is switched off.

NOTE

Regulations for using rear fog lamps varybetween different countries.

4 Auxiliary lamps must be connected to the electrical system by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.


Lighting

03

��

89

Hazard warning flashers

Button for hazard warning flashers.

Press the button to activate the hazard warningflashers. Both direction indicator symbols inthe combined instrument panel flash when thehazard warning flashers are in use.

The hazard warning flashers are activatedautomatically when the car has been braked sosuddenly that the emergency brake lights havebeen activated at a speed below 10 km/h. Thehazard warning flashers remain on when thecar has stopped and are deactivated automat-ically when the car is driven off again or thebutton is depressed. For more information onEmergency brake lights and automatic hazardwarning flashers, see page 131.

Direction indicators/flashers

Direction indicators/flashers.

Short flash sequence

Move the stalk switch up or down to thefirst position and release. The directionindicators flash three times. The functioncan be activated/deactivated in the menusystem MY CAR under Settings Car

settings Light settings Triple

indicator. For a description of the menusystem, see page 199.

Continuous flash sequence

Move the stalk switch up or down to theouter position.

The stalk switch remains in its position and ismoved back manually, or automatically by thesteering wheel movement.

Direction indicator symbols

For direction indicator symbols, see page 70.

Interior lighting

G02

1149

Controls in roof console for the front readinglamps and passenger compartment lighting.

Reading lamp, left-hand side

Reading lamp, right-hand side

Interior lighting

All lighting in the passenger compartment canbe switched on and off manually within30 minutes from when:

• the engine has been switched off and thecar's electrical system is in key position 0

• the car has been unlocked but the enginehas not been started.


Lighting

03

90

Front roof lighting

The front reading lamps are switched on or offby pressing the relevant button in the roof con-sole.

Rear roof lighting

G02

1150

Rear roof lighting.

The lamps are switched on or off by pressingeach respective button.

Courtesy lighting

Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart-ment lighting) is switched on and off respec-tively when a side door is opened or closed.

Glovebox lighting

Glovebox lighting is switched on and offrespectively when the lid is opened or closed.

Vanity mirror

The lighting for the vanity mirror, seepage 225, is switched on and off respectivelywhen the cover is opened or closed.

Automatic lighting

The switch for passenger compartment light-ing has three positions for the lighting in thepassenger compartment:

• Off – right-hand side pressed in, automaticlighting deactivated.

• Neutral position – automatic lighting acti-vated.

• On – left-hand side pressed in, passengercompartment lighting switched on.

Neutral position

When the button is in neutral position the pas-senger compartment lighting is switched onand off automatically in accordance with thefollowing.

The passenger compartment lighting isswitched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:

• the car is unlocked with the remote controlkey or key blade, see pages 43 or 46

• the engine has been switched off and thecar's electrical system is in key position 0.

Passenger compartment lighting is switchedoff when:

• the engine is started

• the car is locked.

The passenger compartment lighting comeson and remains on for two minutes if one of thedoors is open.

If any lighting is switched on manually and thecar is locked then it will be switched off auto-matically after two minutes.

Mood lights

When the normal passenger compartmentlighting is switched off and the engine is run-ning, a number of LEDs illuminate, includingone in the ceiling lighting, in order to provide alow-light and enhance the mood while driving.This lighting goes out for a little while after thenormal passenger compartment lighting whenthe car is locked.

Home safe light duration

Some of the exterior lighting can be keptswitched on to work as home safe lighting afterthe car has been locked.

1. Remove the remote control key from theignition switch.

2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward thesteering wheel to the end position andrelease it. The function can be activated in


Lighting

03

��


the same way as with main beam flash, seepage 84.

3. Get out of the car and lock the door.

When the function is activated, dipped beam,parking lamps, door mirror lamps, numberplate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesylighting are switched on.

The length of time for which the home safelighting should be kept on can be set in themenu system MY CAR under Settings Car

settings Light settings Home safe light

duration. For a description of the menu sys-tem, see page 199.


Approach lighting is switched on with theremote control key, see page 43, and is usedto switch on the car's lighting at a distance.

When the function is activated with the remotecontrol, parking lamps, door mirror lamps,number plate lighting, interior roof lamps andcourtesy lighting are switched on.

The length of time for which the approach light-ing should be kept on can be set in the menusystem MY CAR under Settings Car

settings Light settings Approach light

duration. For a description of the menu sys-tem, see page 199.

Adjusting headlamp pattern

G02

1151

Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic.

G02

1152

Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic.

The headlamp pattern must be adjusted toavoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be

set for right or left-hand traffic. The correct pat-tern will also better illuminate the verge.

Active Xenon headlamps*

The car must be stationary with the engine run-ning when the headlamp pattern is shiftedbetween right and left-hand traffic.

1. Access the menu system MY CAR underSettings Car settings Light

settings.

2. Select between Temporary RH traffic

and Temporary LH traffic.

For a description of the menu system, seepage 199

Halogen headlamps

The headlamp pattern for halogen headlampsis readjusted by masking the headlamp lens.The headlamp pattern may not be as good.

Masking the headlamps

1. Copy the A and B templates for left-handdrive cars or the C and D templates forright-hand drive cars with a scale of 1:1,see page 94:

• A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, rightlens)

• B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)


Lighting

03

92

• C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, rightlens)

• D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left lens)

2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesivewaterproof material and cut it out.

3. Position the self-adhesive templates at theright distance from the edge of the head-lamp lens using the illustration, seepage 93, and the dimensions in the fol-lowing list:

• Template A: horizontal line approx.80 mm, vertical line approx. 20 mm

• Template B: horizontal line approx.80 mm, vertical line approx. 4 mm

• Template C: horizontal line approx.120 mm, vertical line approx. 4 mm

• Template D: horizontal line approx.85 mm, vertical line approx. 15 mm


Lighting

03

��

93

Aligning the templates

Upper row: left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.


Lighting

03

94

Templates for halogen headlamps


Wipers and washing

03


Windscreen wipers1

Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.

Rain sensor, on/off

Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency

Windscreen wipers off

Move the stalk switch to position 0 toswitch off the windscreen wipers.

Single sweep

Raise the stalk switch and release tomake one sweep.

Intermittent wiping

Set the number of sweeps per timeunit with the thumbwheel when inter-

mittent wiping is selected.

Continuous wiping

The wipers sweep at normal speed.

The wipers sweep at high speed.

IMPORTANT

Before activating the wipers during winter -ensure that the wiper blades are not frozenin, and that any snow or ice on the wind-screen is scraped away.

IMPORTANT

Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipersare cleaning the windscreen. The wind-screen must be wet when the windscreenwipers are operating.

Service position wiper blade

For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades andreplacement of wiper blades see seepage 335 and 354.

Rain sensor*

The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-screen wipers based on how much water itdetects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of

the rain sensor can be adjusted using thethumbwheel.

When the rain sensor is activated a light in thebutton the rain sensor symbol is shownin the right-hand display in the combinedinstrument panel.

Activating and setting the sensitivity

When activating the rain sensor, the car mustbe running or the remote control key in positionI or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switchmust be in position 0 or in the position for asingle sweep.

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button. The windscreen wipers make one

sweep.

Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to makean extra sweep.

Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensi-tivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (Anextra sweep is made when the thumbwheel isturned upward.)

Deactivate

Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but-ton or move the stalk switch down toanother wiper program.

1 Replacing the wiper blades see page 335, service position, wiper blade see page 335 and filling washer fluid see page 336.


Wipers and washing

03


The rain sensor is automatically deactivatedwhen the remote control key is removed fromthe ignition switch or five minutes after theengine has been switched off.

IMPORTANT

The windscreen wipers could start and bedamaged in an automatic car wash. Deac-tivate the rain sensor while the car is runningor the remote control key is in position I orII. The symbol in the combined instrumentpanel and the lamp in the button go out.

Washing the headlamps and windows

Washing function.

Washing the windscreen

Move the stalk switch toward the steeringwheel to start the windscreen and headlampwashers.

The windscreen wipers will make several moresweeps and the headlamps are washed oncethe stalk switch has been released.

Heated washer nozzles*

The washer nozzles are heated automaticallyin cold weather to prevent the washer fluidfreezing solid.

High-pressure headlamp washing*

High-pressure headlamp washing consumes alarge quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, theheadlamps are washed automatically at everyfifth windscreen wash cycle.

Reduced washing

If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains inthe reservoir and the message that you shouldfill the washer fluid is shown in the combinedinstrument panel's display, then the supply ofwasher fluid to the headlamps is switched off.This is in order to prioritise cleaning the wind-screen and the visibility through it.


Windows, rearview and door mirrors

03


General

Laminated glass

The glass is reinforced which pro-vides better protection againstbreak-ins and improved sound insu-lation in the passenger compartment.

The windscreen and the side windows* havelaminated glass.

Water and dirt-repellent coating*

Windows are treated with a coatingthat improves the view in difficult

weather conditions. Maintenance, seepage 355.

IMPORTANT

Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove icefrom the windows. Use the defroster toremove ice from the mirrors, see page 101.

Heat-reflecting windscreen*

Areas where IR film is not applied.

Dimensions

A 40 mm

B 80 mm

The windscreen is equipped with a heat-reflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heatradiation into the passenger compartment.

The positioning of electronic equipment, suchas a transponder, behind a glass surface withheat-reflecting film may affect its function andperformance.

For the optimal function of electronic equip-ment, it should be positioned on the part of the

windscreen with no heat-reflecting film (see thehighlighted area in the above illustration).

Power windows

Driver's door control panel.

Switch for electric child safety locks* anddisengaging rear power window buttons,see page 61.

Rear window controls

Front window controls

WARNING

Check that none of the rear seat passengersis in danger of becoming trapped in any waywhen closing the windows from the driver'sdoor.



03

98

WARNING

Make sure that children or other passengersare not in danger of becoming trapped inany way when closing the windows, in par-ticular when the remote control key is used.

WARNING

If there are children in the car - remember toalways switch off the power supply to thepower windows by selecting key position 0and then take the remote control key withyou when leaving the car. For information onkey positions - see page 77.

Operating

Operating the power windows.

Operating without auto

Operating with auto

All power windows can be operated using thecontrol panel for the driver's door - the controlpanels for the other doors can only each oper-ate their respective power window. Only onecontrol panel can be operated at a time.

In order for the power windows to be used thekey position must be at least I - see page 76.The power windows can be operated for a fewminutes after the engine has been switched offand after the remote control key has beenremoved - although not after a door has beenopened.

Closing of the windows is stopped and thewindow is opened if anything prevents itsmovement. It is possible to override the pinchprotection when closing has been interrupted,e.g. if there is ice forming. After two successiveclosing interruptions the pinch protection willbe forced and the automatic function deacti-vated for a short while, now it is possible toclose by continually holding the button pulledup.

NOTE

One way to reduce the pulsating wind noisewhen the rear windows are open is to alsoopen the front windows slightly.

Operating without auto

Move one of the controls up/down gently. Thepower windows move up/down as long as thecontrol is held in position.

Operating with auto

Move one of the controls up/down to the endposition and release it. The window runs auto-matically to its end position.

Operating with the remote control key

and central locking

To remotely operate the power windows fromthe outside with the remote control key or frominside with central locking, see pages 44 and56.



03


Resetting

If the battery is disconnected then the functionfor automatic opening must be reset so that itcan work correctly.

1. Gently raise the front section of the buttonto raise the window to its end position andhold it there for one second.

2. Release the button briefly.

3. Raise the front section of the button againfor one second.

WARNING

Resetting must be carried out to ensure thatpinch protection works.

Sun blind*

There is a sun blind built into the rear parcelshelf.

– Pull up the sun blind and hook it into theroof clip using the two hooks for the blind.> The spring force in the blind keeps the

hooks in position.

When the sun blind is not in use - unhook it,hold onto the handle and allow the blind to rollup slowly.

Door mirrors

Door mirror controls.

Adjusting

1. Press the L button for the left-hand doormirror or the R button for the right-handdoor mirror. The light in the button illumi-nates.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in thecentre.

3. Press the L or R button again. The lightshould no longer be illuminated.



03


WARNING

The mirror on the driver's side is the wide-angle type to provide optimal vision.Objects may appear further away than theyactually are.

Storing the position1

The mirror positions are stored in the key mem-ory when the car has been locked with theremote control key. When the car is unlockedwith the same remote control key the mirrorsand the driver's seat adopt the stored positionswhen the driver's door is opened.


Car settings Car key memory Personal

settings in key memory. For a description ofthe menu system, see page 199.

Angling the door mirror when parking1

The door mirror can be angled down for thedriver to view the side of the road when parkingfor example.

– Engage reverse gear and press the L or Rbutton.

When reverse gear is disengaged the mirrorautomatically returns to its original position

after approx. 10 seconds, or sooner by press-ing the L and R button.

Automatic angling of the door mirror

when parking1

When reverse gear is engaged the door mirroris automatically angled down so that the drivercan see the side of the road when parking forexample. When reverse gear is disengaged themirror automatically returns to its original posi-tion after a short time.


Car settings Side mirror settings Tilt

left mirror or Tilt right mirror. For a descrip-tion of the menu system, see page 199.

Automatic retraction when locking1

When the car is locked/unlocked with theremote control key the door mirrors are auto-matically retracted/extended.


Car settings Side mirror settings Fold

mirrors. For a description of the menu system,see page 199.

Resetting to neutral

Mirrors that have been moved out of positionby an external force must be reset electricallyto the neutral position for electric retracting/extending to work correctly:

1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R but-tons.

2. Fold them out again with the L and R but-tons.

3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.

The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.

Retractable power door mirrors*

The mirrors can be retracted for parking/drivingin narrow spaces:

1. Depress the L and R buttons simultane-ously (key position must be at least I).

2. Release them afterapproximately 1 second. The mirrors auto-matically stop in the fully retracted posi-tion.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the Land R buttons simultaneously. The mirrorsautomatically stop in the fully extended posi-tion.

1 Only in combination with power seat with memory, see page 79.



03


Home safe and approach lighting

The light on the door mirrors illuminates whenapproach lighting or home safe lighting isselected, see page 90.

Rear window and door mirrordefrosters

Use the defroster to quickly remove mistingand ice from the rear window and the door mir-rors.

One press of the button starts the heating. Thelight in the button indicates that the function isactive. Disconnect the heating as soon as theice/misting is cleared in order not to load thebattery unnecessarily. However, the heating isswitched off automatically after a certain time.

The door mirrors and rear window are demis-ted/defrosted automatically if the car is started

in an outside temperature lower than +9 °C.Automatic defrosting can be selected in themenu system MY CAR under Settings

Climate settings Automatic rear

defroster. Select between On or Off. For adescription of the menu system, seepage 199.

Interior rearview mirror

Control for dimming

Manual dimming

Bright light from behind could be reflected inthe rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Usedimming with the dimming control when lightsfrom behind are distracting:

1. Use dimming by moving the control intowards the passenger compartment.

2. Return to normal position by moving thecontrol towards the windscreen.

Automatic dimming*

Bright light from behind is automaticallydimmed by the rearview mirror. The control isnot available in mirrors with automatic dim-ming.

The compass* can only be specified for rear-view mirrors with automatic dimming, seepage 102.


Compass*

03


Operation

Rearview mirror with compass.

The upper right-hand corner of the rearviewmirror has an integrated display that shows thecompass direction in which the front of the caris pointing. Eight different directions are shownwith English abbreviations: N (north), NE (northeast), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW

(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).

The compass is activated automatically whenthe car is started or in key position II, seepage 76. To deactivate/activate the compass -press in the button on the underside of the mir-ror using a paper clip for example.

Calibration

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.The compass is set for the geographic area towhich the car was delivered. The compass

should be calibrated if the car is moved acrossseveral magnetic zones. Proceed as follows:

1. Stop the car in a large open area free fromsteel structures and high-voltage powerlines.

2. Start the car.

NOTE

For optimum calibration - switch off all elec-trical equipment (climate control system,wipers etc.) and make sure that all doors areclosed.

3. Hold the button on the underside of therearview mirror depressedapprox. 6 seconds (using a paper clip forexample) until the character C is shown.

G03

0295

Magnetic zones.

4. Hold the button on the underside of therearview mirror depressedapprox. 3 seconds. The number of the cur-rent magnetic zone is shown.

5. Press the button repeatedly until therequired magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.See the map of magnetic zones for thecompass.

6. Wait until the display resumes showing thecharacter C.

7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of nomore than 10 km/h until a compass direc-tion is shown in the display, indicating thatcalibration is complete. Then drive a further2 circles to fine-tune calibration.

8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.


Power sunroof*

03


General

The sunroof controls are located in the roofpanel. The sunroof can be opened vertically atthe rear edge and horizontally. Key position I orII is required for the sunroof to be opened.

Horizontal opening

G02

1343

Horizontal opening, backward/forward.

Opening, automatic

Opening, manual

Closing, manual

Closing, automatic

Opening

For maximum sunroof opening, move the con-trol back to the position for automatic openingand release.

Open manually by pulling the control back-wards to the point of resistance for manualopening. The sunroof moves to maximum openposition as long as the button is keptdepressed.

Closing

Close manually by pushing the control for-wards to the point of resistance for manualclosing. The sunroof moves to closed positionas long as the button is kept depressed.

WARNING

Risk of crushing when sunroof is closed.The sunroof's pinch-protection functiononly operates during automatic closing, notmanual.

Close automatically by pressing the control tothe position for automatic closing and thenrelease it.

The power supply to the sunroof is switched offby selecting key position 0 and removing theremote control key from the ignition switch.

WARNING

If there are children in the car:

Remember to always switch off the powersupply to the sunroof by selecting key posi-tion 0 and then take the remote control keywith you when leaving the car. For informa-tion on key positions - see page 77.

Vertical opening

G02

8899

Vertical opening, raised at the rear edge.

Open by pressing the rear edge of the con-trol upward.

Close by pulling the rear edge of the con-trol down.


Power sunroof*

03


Closing using the remote control key or

central locking button

G02

1345

One long press on the lock button closes thesunroof and all the windows, see pages 43 and56. The doors and the boot lid are locked. Tointerrupt closing, press the lock button again.

WARNING

If the sunroof is closed using the remotecontrol key, check that no one is in dangerof becoming trapped in any way.

Sunscreen

The sunroof features a manual, sliding interiorsunscreen. The sunscreen slides back auto-matically when the sunroof is opened. Grip thehandle and slide the screen forward to close it.

Pinch protection

The sunroof's pinch protection function is trig-gered if it is blocked by an object during auto-matic closing. If blocked, the sunroof will stopand automatically open to the previous posi-tion.

Wind deflector

The sunroof has a wind deflector that is foldedup when the sunroof is in the open position.


Alcolock*

03


General information on the alcolock

The alcolock's1 function is to prevent the carfrom being driven by individuals under theinfluence of alcohol. Before the engine can bestarted the driver must take a breath test thatverifies that he/she is not under the influenceof alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place inaccordance with each market's limit value inforce for driving legally.

WARNING

The Alcolock is an aid and does not exemptthe driver from responsibility. It is always theresponsibility of the driver to be sober andto drive the car safely.

Functions

1. Nozzle for breath test.2. Switch.3. Transmission button.4. Lamp for battery status.5. Lamp for result of breath test.6. Lamp indicates ready for breath test.

Operation

Battery

Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery sta-tus:

Indicator lamp(4)

Battery status

Green flashing Charging in pro-gress

Green Fully charged

Yellow Semi-charged

Red Discharged - fit thecharger in the holderor connect thepower supply cablefrom the glovebox.

NOTE

Store the Alcolock in its holder. This willkeep the built-in battery fully charged andthe Alcolock is activated automaticallywhen the car is opened.

1 Also called Alcoguard.


Alcolock*

03


Storage

Handheld unit storage and charging station.

• The handheld alcolock unit is released bydepressing it slightly in its holder andreleasing it - it then springs out and can beremoved from the holder.

• Replace the handheld unit in the holder bypushing it in until it engages.

• Store the handheld unit in the holder - thisprovides it with the best protection andkeeps its batteries fully charged.

Before starting the engine

The Alcolock is activated automatically and isthen ready for use when the car is opened.

1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green theAlcolock is ready for use.

2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. Ifthe Alcolock is outside the car when it is

unlocked then it must first be activatedwith the switch (2).

3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breathand blow with an even pressure until a"click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds.The result will be one of the alternatives inthe following table Result after breath

test.4. If no message is shown then the transmis-

sion to the car may have failed - in whichcase, press the button (3) to transmit theresult to the car manually.

5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolockin its holder.

6. Start the engine following an approvedbreath test within 5 minutes - otherwise itmust be repeated.

Result after breath test

Indicator lamp(5) + Display text

Specification

Green lamp + Alco-

guard Approved

test

Start the engine - noalcohol contentmeasured.

Yellow lamp + Alco-

guard Approved

test

Engine starting pos-sible - measuredalcohol content isabove 0.1 promillebut below the limitvalue in forceA.

Red lamp + Disap-

proved test Wait 1

minute

Engine starting notpossible - measuredalcohol content isabove the limit valuein forceA.

A Limits vary between countries, so find out what limits apply.See also the section entitled General information on theAlcolock on page 105

NOTE

After a completed period of driving, theengine can be restarted within 30 minuteswithout a new breath test.


Alcolock*

03


To bear in mind

Before the breath test

In order to obtain correct function and as accu-rate a measurement result as possible:

• Avoid eating or drinking approx.5 minutes before the breath test.

• Avoid excess windscreen washing - thealcohol in the washer fluid may result in anincorrect measurement result.

Change of driver

In order to ensure that a new breath test is car-ried out in the event of a change of driver -depress the switch (2) and the send button (3)simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. Atwhich point the car returns to start inhibitionmode and a new approved breath test isrequired before starting the engine.

Calibration and service

The Alcolock must be checked and calibratedat a workshop2 every 12 months.

30 days before recalibration is necessary thedisplay shows Alcoguard Calibr. required. Ifcalibration is not carried out within these 30days then normal engine starting will beblocked - only starting with the Bypass func-

tion will then be possible, see page 107 sec-tion Emergency situation.

The message can be cleared by pressing thesend button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out onits own after approx. 2 minutes but then reap-pears each time the engine is started - onlyrecalibration at a workshop2 can clear the mes-sage permanently.

Cold or hot weather

The colder the weather the longer it takesbefore the Alcolock is ready for use:

Temperature (ºC) Maximum heat-ing time (sec-

onds)

+10 to +85 10

-5 to +10 60

-40 to -5 180

At temperatures below -20 ºC or above+60 ºC the Alcolock requires additional powersupply. The display shows Alcoguard insert

power cable. In which case, connect thepower supply cable from the glovebox and waituntil indicator lamp (6) is green.

In extremely cold weather the heating time canbe reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors.

Emergency situation

In the event of an emergency situation or theAlcolock is out of order, it is possible to bypassthe Alcolock in order to drive the car.

NOTE

All Bypass activation is logged and saved inmemory, see page 8 in the section, Record-ing data.

After the Bypass function has been activatedthe display shows Alcoguard Bypass

enabled the whole time while driving and canonly be reset by a workshop2.

The Bypass function can be tested without theerror message being logged - in which case,carry out all the steps without starting the car.The error message is cleared when the car islocked.

When the Alcolock is installed, either theBypass or Emergency function is selected asthe bypassing option. This setting can bechanged afterwards at a workshop2.

2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.


Alcolock*

03


Activating the Bypass function

• Depress and hold the left-hand stalkswitch OK button and the button for haz-ard warning flashers simultaneously forapprox. 5 seconds - the display first showsBypass activated Wait 1 minute andthen Alcoguard Bypass enabled - afterwhich the engine can be started.

This function can be activated several times.The error message shown during driving canonly be cleared at a workshop2.

Activating the Emergency function

• Depress and hold the left-hand stalkswitch OK button and the button for haz-ard warning flashers simultaneously forapprox. 5 seconds - the display showsAlcoguard Bypass enabled and theengine can be started.

This function can be used once, after which areset must be made at a workshop2.

Symbols and display messages

In addition to the previously described mes-sages, the combined instrument panel's dis-play can also show the following:

Display text Meaning/Action

Alcoguard Restart

possible

The engine has beenswitched off for lessthan 30 minutes -engine starting pos-sible without newtest.

Alcoguard Service

required

Contact a work-shop2.

Alcoguard No sig-

nal

Transmission failed -send manually withbutton (3) or take anew breath test.

Alcoguard Invalid

test

Test failed - take anew breath test.

Alcoguard Blow

longer

Blowing too short -blow for longer.

Alcoguard Blow

softer

Blowing too hard -blow more gently.

Display text Meaning/Action

Alcoguard Blow

harder

Blowing too weak -blow harder.

Alcoguard wait

Preheating

Heating not finished- wait for text Alco-

guard Blow 5 sec-

onds.



Starting the engine

03


Petrol and diesel engines

Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button.

IMPORTANT

Do not press in the remote control key incor-rectly turned - Hold the end with the detach-able key blade, see page 46.

1. Insert the remote control key in the ignitionswitch and press it in to its end position.Note that if the car is equipped with analcolock then a breath test must first beapproved before the engine can be started- see page 105.

2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed1. (Forcars with automatic gearbox - Depress thebrake pedal.)

3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE buttonand then release it.

The starter motor works until the engine startsor until its overheating protection triggers.

IMPORTANT

If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts -wait for 3 minutes before making a furtherattempt. Starting capacity increases if thebattery is allowed to recover.

WARNING

Never remove the remote control key fromthe ignition switch after starting the engineor when the car is being towed.

WARNING

Always remove the remote control key fromthe ignition switch when leaving the car, andmake sure that the key position is 0 - in par-ticular if there are children in the car. Forinformation on how this works - seepage 77.

NOTE

The idling speed can be noticeably higherthan normal for certain engine types duringcold starting. This is so that the emissionssystem can reach normal operating tem-perature as quickly as possible, which min-imises exhaust emissions and protects theenvironment.

Keyless drive*

Follow steps 2–3 for starting petrol and dieselengines. For more information on Keyless drive- see page 51.

NOTE

A prerequisite for the car to start is that oneof the car's remote control keys with theKeyless drive* function is in the passengercompartment or cargo area.

WARNING

Never remove the remote control key fromthe car while driving or during towing.

Stop the engine

To switch off the engine:

• Press START/STOP ENGINE - the enginestops.

1 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car.


Starting the engine

03


If the gear selector is not in P position or if thecar is moving:

• Press twice on START/STOP ENGINE orhold the button depressed until the enginestops.

Steering lock

A mechanical noise can be perceived when thesteering lock unlocks or locks.

• The steering lock unlocks when the remotecontrol key is in the ignition switch2 and theSTART/STOP ENGINE button isdepressed.

• The steering lock locks when the driver'sdoor is opened after the engine has beenswitched off.

Key positions

For information on the remote control key's dif-ferent key positions - see page 76

Remote start - ERS*

General information on ERS

Remote start (ERS – Engine Remote Start)means that the car's engine can be startedremotely using the remote control key. This isso that the passenger compartment can bewarmed up/cooled down before departure.

The climate control starts with the same set-tings that were being used when the car wasparked.

An ERS-started engine is activated for a maxi-mum of 15 minutes, then it is switched off. Aftertwo ERS-activations the engine must bestarted in the normal way before ERS can bere-used.

The ERS option is only available on cars withautomatic gearbox.

NOTE

Follow local/national rules/regulations onidling.

WARNING

To remote-start the engine, the followingcriteria must be met:

• The car must be supervised

• There must be no people or animalsinside the car

• The car must not be parked in a closed,unventilated area - the exhaust gasesmay seriously injure humans and ani-mals.

2 Cars with Keyless drive must have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.


Starting the engine

03

111

Operation

Remote control buttons for remote start.

Locking

Approach lighting

Information3

Remote starting the engine

Maximum distance for enabling remote star-ting of the engine is approx. 30 metres in unob-structed space - in addition, the car must belocked.

To remote start the engine:

1. Briefly press on the remote control key'slock button (1).

2. Follow this immediately afterwards with along press - at least 2 seconds - onbutton (2).

If the conditions for ERS are fulfilled then thefollowing takes place:

1. All direction indicators flash quickly severaltimes.

2. The engine starts.3. All direction indicators illuminate with a

constant glow for 3 seconds to verify thatthe engine has started.

NOTE

After remote starting, the car continues tobe locked but with the alarm deactivated.

With PCC4 key

The light indication for Approachlighting5 flashes several times whenthe button is pressed and then goesto constant glow if all criteria for ERS

have been fulfilled. However, this does notmean that ERS has started the engine.

To check whether ERS has started the engine,the user can press the Information button (3) -if the engine has started, there is a light indi-cation on the button for Approach lighting (2).

Active functions

The following functions are activated with aremote started engine:

• Ventilation system

• Audio/video system.

Deactivated functions

The following functions are deactivated with aremote started engine:

• headlamps

• Position lamps

• Number plate lighting

• Windscreen wiper.

the engine is switched off

The following steps switch off an ERS-startedengine:

• The remote control key's lock button (1) isdepressed

• The car is unlocked

• A door is opened

3 Only on PCC key, see page 45.4 Read about the PCC key on page 45.5 Read about Approach lighting on page 44 and 91.


Starting the engine

03

112

• Accelerator pedal or brake pedal isdepressed

• The gear selector is moved out of P posi-tion

• There is less than approx.10 litres left in thefuel tank

• Active ERS time passes 15 minutes.

When an ERS-started engine is switched off,all direction indicators illuminate with a con-stant glow for 3 seconds.

Symbols and messages in the display

In situations where the ERS function fails or isinterrupted, a symbol is shown on the instru-ment panel, supplemented by an explanatorymessage - Follow any recommendation given.

ERS function unavailable


No remote start

door open

ERS unavailablebecause a door/boot lid was notclosed.

No remote start

car not locked

ERS unavailablebecause the car wasnot locked.


No remote start

low battery

ERS unavailable dueto low battery volt-age. Charge the bat-tery by starting theengine.

No remote start

driver in car

ERS unavailablebecause someonewas in the passen-ger compartment.

No remote start

engine warning

ERS unavailable dueto warning messagefrom engine. Con-tact a workshopA.

No remote start

gear not in P

ERS unavailablebecause gear selec-tor was not in P posi-tion.

No remote start

engine coolant

ERS unavailable dueto error messagefrom cooling sys-tem, see page 326.


No remote start

low fuel level

ERS unavailablebecause fuel leveltoo low.

No remote start

Max 2 starts

ERS unavailablebecause a maximumof 2 ERS activationsin succession areallowed.

A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Interrupted ERS function


Remote start off

low battery

ERS interruptedbecause batteryvoltage too low.

Remote start off

low fuel level

ERS interruptedbecause fuel leveltoo low.

Remote start off

engine warning

ERS interrupted dueto error messagefrom engine. Con-tact a workshopA.


Starting the engine

03

113


Remote start off

gear not in P

ERS interruptedbecause gear selec-tor is not in P posi-tion.

Remote start off

driver in car

ERS interruptedbecause someone isin the passengercompartment.

A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.


Starting the engine – Flexifuel

03


General information about startingwith Flexifuel

The engine is started in the same way as in apetrol-engined car.

In the event of starting difficulties

If the engine does not start at the first startattempt:

• Make further attempts to start with theSTART/STOP ENGINE button.

If the engine still does not start

The outside temperature is lower than +5 °C:

1. Connect the engine block heater for atleast 1 hour.

2. Make further attempts to start with theSTART/STOP ENGINE button.

IMPORTANT

If the engine does not start despite repeatedstart attempts, you are recommended tocontact an authorised Volvo workshop.

Engine block heater*

Electrical input to the engine block heater.

When the temperature is expected to be lowerthan –10 °C and the car has been refuelled withbioethanol E85, an engine block heater shouldbe used for about 2 hours to facilitate the quickstarting of the engine.

The lower the temperature, the longer the timerequired with the engine block heater. At-20 °C the heater should be used for approx. 3hours.

Cars intended for E85 have an electric engineblock heater*. Starting and driving with a pre-heated engine involves significantly loweremissions and reduced fuel consumption. Forthis reason you should aim to use the engineblock heater throughout the winter months.

WARNING

The engine block heater is powered by highvoltage. Fault tracing and repair of an elec-tric engine block heater and its electricalconnections must only be carried out by aworkshop - an authorised Volvo workshopis recommended.

NOTE

Points to remember for carrying reservefuel:

• In the event of stalling due to an emptyfuel tank, bioethanol E85 from a reservefuel can may make the engine difficultto start in extreme cold. This is avoidedby filling the reserve fuel can with 95octane petrol.

For more information on Flexifuel's bioethanolE 85 fuel, see page 285 and 376.


Starting the engine – Flexifuel

03

115

Fuel adaptation

Flexifuel engines can be driven on both 95octane unleaded petrol and bioethanol E85.Both fuels are filled in the common fuel tank sothat any variations of mixing ratios betweenthese two fuels is possible.

If the fuel tank is filled with petrol after the carhas been driven on bioethanol E85 (or viceversa) then the engine may run slightlyunevenly for a time. For this reason it is impor-tant to allow the engine to accustom itself(adapt) to the new fuel mixture.

Adaptation takes place automatically when thecar is driven for a short period at an evenspeed.

IMPORTANT

After the fuel mixture in the tank has beenchanged an adaptation should be made bydriving at an even speed for about 15minutes.

If the battery has been discharged or discon-nected then a slightly longer period of drivingis required for the adaptation as the memoryfor the electronics has been cleared.


Starting the engine – external battery

03

116

Jump starting

If the battery is flat then the car can be startedwith current from another battery.

When jump starting the car, the following stepsare recommended to avoid short circuits orother damage:

1. Insert the remote control key in key posi-tion 0, see page 76.

2. Check that the donor battery has a voltageof 12 V.

3. If the donor battery is installed in anothercar - switch off the donor car's engine andmake sure that the two cars do not toucheach other.

4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clampsto the donor battery's positive terminal (1).

IMPORTANT

Connect the start cable carefully to avoidshort circuits with other components in theengine compartment.

5. Open the clips on the front cover of thebattery in your car and remove the cover,see page 338.

6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamponto the car's positive terminal (2).

7. Connect one of the black jump lead'sclamps to the donor battery's negative ter-minal (3).

8. Connect the other clamp to a groundingpoint, e.g. right-hand engine mounting atthe top, the outer screw head (4).

9. Check that the jump lead clamps areaffixed securely so that there are no sparksduring the starting procedure.

10. Start the engine of the "donor car" andallow it to run a few minutes at a speedslightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.

11. Start the engine in the car with the dis-charged battery.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the crocodile clips during thestart procedure. There is a risk of sparksforming.

12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order -first the black and then the red.> Make sure that none of the black jump

lead's clamps comes into contact withthe battery's positive terminal or theclamp connected to the red jump lead!

WARNING

• The battery can generate oxyhydrogengas, which is highly explosive. A sparkcan be formed if a jump lead is con-nected incorrectly, and this can beenough for the battery to explode.

• The battery contains sulphuric acid,which can cause serious burns.

• If sulphuric acid comes into contactwith eyes, skin or clothing, flush withlarge quantities of water. If acidsplashes into the eyes - seek medicalattention immediately.

For more information on the car's battery - seepage 337.


Gearboxes

03

117

IMPORTANT

The operating temperature of the gearbox ischecked in order to prevent damage to anyof the drive system's components. In theevent of a risk of overheating a warningsymbol illuminates on the instrument panelcombined with a text message - In whichcase, follow the recommendation given.

Manual gearbox

Gearshift pattern 5-speed gearbox.

Gearshift pattern 6-speed gearbox.

The 6-speed box is available in two versions -reverse gear position differs between them.Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprintedon the gear lever.

• Depress the clutch pedal fully during eachgear change.

• Take your foot off the clutch pedal betweengear changes.

WARNING

Always apply the parking brake when park-ing on a slope - leaving the car in gear is notsufficient to hold the car in all situation.

Gear indicator1

An essential detail in connection with environ-mental driving is to drive in the right gear andchange gear in time.

The driver is assisted by an indicator - GSI(Gear Shift Indicator) - which notifies the driverwhen it is most advantageous to engage thenext higher or lower gear in order to obtain thelowest possible fuel consumption. However,taking into consideration characteristics suchas performance and vibration-free running, itmay be advantageous to change gear at ahigher engine speed.

Indication is made with an up or down arrow inthe combined instrument panel's right-handdisplay.

1 Only manual gearbox for the D2 model.


Gearboxes

03


Reverse gear inhibitor

The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reversegear during normal forward travel.

• Follow the gearing pattern printed on thegear lever and start from neutral position,N before moving it to R position.

• Only engage reverse gear when the car isstationary.

NOTE

With the upper variant of the shifting patternfor 6-speed gearbox (see previous illustra-tion) - first press down the gear lever in theN position in order to engage reverse gear.

Automatic gearbox Geartronic*

D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gearpositions.

The information display shows the position ofthe gear selector using the following indica-tions: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, seepage 69.

Gear positions

Parking position - P

Select P when starting the engine or when thecar is parked. The brake pedal must bedepressed to disengage the gear selector fromthe P position.

The gearbox is mechanically blocked when theP position is engaged. Apply the parking brakeas well, as a precaution - see page 133.

NOTE

The gear selector must be in P position toallow the car to be locked and alarmed.

IMPORTANT

The car must be stationary when positionP is selected.

WARNING

Always apply the parking brake when park-ing on a slope - the automatic transmis-sion's P position is not sufficient to hold thecar in all situation.

Reverse position - R

The car must be stationary when R position isselected.

Neutral position - N

No gear is engaged and the engine can bestarted. Apply the parking brake if the car isstationary with the gear selector in N position.

Drive position - D

D is the normal driving position. Shifting up anddown takes place automatically based on thelevel of acceleration and speed. The car mustbe stationary when the gear selector is movedto D position from R position.


Gearboxes

03

119

Geartronic – Manual gear positions (+/-)

The driver can also change gear manuallyusing the Geartronic automatic gearbox. Thecar engine-brakes when the accelerator pedalis released.

Manual gearshift mode is obtained by movingthe lever to the side from D position to the endposition at +/–. The information display shiftsthe indication from D to one of the figures 1 –6, which is equivalent to the gear that isengaged just then, see page 69.

• Move the lever forwards towards + (plus)to change up a gear and release the lever,which returns to its rest position between+ and –.

or

• Pull the lever back towards – (minus) tochange down a gear and release it.

The manual gearshift mode (+/–) can beselected at any time while driving.

Geartronic automatically shifts down if thedriver allows the speed to decrease lower thana level suitable for the selected gear, in orderto avoid jerking and stalling.

To return to automatic driving mode:

• Move the lever to the side to the end posi-tion at D.

NOTE

f the gearbox has a Sport programme thenthe gearbox will only become manual afterthe lever has been moved forwards or back-wards in its (-+/–) position. The informationdisplay then shifts the indication from S toshow which of the gears 1-6 is engaged.

Geartronic - Sport mode (S)2

The Sport programme provides sportier cha-racteristics and allows higher engine speed forthe gears. At the same time it responds morequickly to acceleration. During active driving,the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading toa delayed upshift.

Sport mode is obtained by moving the lever tothe side from D position to the end position at+/–. The information display shifts the indica-tion from D to S.

Sport mode can be selected at any time whiledriving.

Geartronic - Winter mode

It can be easier to pull away on slippery roadsif 3rd gear is engaged manually.

1. Depress the brake pedal and move thegear lever from D position to the end posi-

tion at +/– - the instrument panel displayshifts the indication from D to the figure 1.

2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the leverforward towards + (plus) twice - the displayshifts the indication from 1 to 3.

3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.

The gearbox "winter mode" means that the carmoves off with a lower engine speed andreduced engine power on the drive wheels.

Kick-down

When the accelerator pedal is pressed all theway to the floor (beyond the position normallyregarded as full acceleration) a lower gear isimmediately engaged. This is known as kick-down.

If the accelerator is released from the kick-down position, the gearbox automaticallychanges up.

Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-tion is needed, such as for overtaking.

Safety function

To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearboxcontrol program has a protective downshiftinhibitor which prevents the kick-down func-tion.

2 Only models D5 and T6.


Gearboxes

03

120

Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick-down which would result in an engine speedhigh enough to damage the engine. Nothinghappens if the driver still tries to shift down inthis way at high engine speed – the originalgear remains engaged.

When kick-down is activated the car canchange one or more gears at a time dependingon engine speed. The car changes up when theengine reaches its maximum speed in order toprevent damage to the engine.

Mechanical gear selector inhibitorG

0213

51

The gear selector can be moved forward andback freely between N and D. Other positionsare locked with a latch that is released with theinhibitor button on the gear selector.

With the inhibitor button depressed the levercan be moved forwards or backwards betweenP, R, N and D.

Automatic gear selector inhibitor

The automatic gearbox has special safety sys-tems:

Parking position (P)

Stationary car with engine running:

Keep your foot on the brake pedal when mov-ing the gear selector to another position.

Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock Parking

position (P)

To be able to move the gear selector from P toother gear positions, the brake pedal must bedepressed and the remote control key must bein position II, see page 76.

Shiftlock – Neutral (N)

If the gear selector is in N position and the carhas been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irre-spective of whether the engine is running) thenthe gear selector is locked.

To be able to move the gear selector from N toother gear positions, the brake pedal must bedepressed and the remote control key must bein position II, see page 76.

Deactivate automatic gear selector

inhibitor

If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flatbattery, the gear selector must be moved fromthe P position so that the car can be moved.

Lift the rubber mat in the compartmentbehind the centre console and open thehatch.

Fully insert the key blade. Press the keyblade down and hold (For information onthe key blade, see page 46.)

Move the gear selector from the P position.


Gearboxes

03


Automatic gearbox Powershift*

D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gearpositions.

Powershift is a 6-stage automatic gearbox thathas double mechanical clutch discs in contrastto a conventional automatic gearbox. A con-ventional automatic gearbox has a hydraulictorque converter instead that transfers powerfrom engine to gearbox.

Powershift transmission operates in the sameway and has similar controls and functions asthe Geartronic automatic transmission, descri-bed in the previous section.

Powershift or Geartronic?

In the event of uncertainty as to whether or notthe car is equipped with Powershift transmis-

sion, this can be verified by checking the des-ignation on the transmission's label under thebonnet - see page 362. The designa-tion ”MPS6” means that it is Powershift – trans-mission otherwise it is Geartronic automatictransmission.

HSA

The HSA (Hill Start Assist) function means thatthe pressure in the brake system remains forseveral seconds while the foot is moved fromthe brake pedal to the accelerator pedal beforesetting off or reversing uphill.

The temporary braking effect releases afterseveral seconds or when the driver acceler-ates.

To bear in mind

The transmission's double clutch has overloadprotection that is activated if it becomes toohot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with theaccelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for along time.

Overheated transmission causes the car toshake and vibrate, and the warning symbol illu-minates and the information display shows amessage. The transmission can also overheatduring slow driving in queues (10 km/h or

slower) on an uphill gradient, or with a trailerhitched. The transmission cools down whenthe car is stationary, with foot brake depressedand the engine running at idling speed.

Overheating during slow driving in queues canbe avoided by driving in stages: Stop the carand wait with your foot on the brake pedal untilthere is a moderate distance to the trafficahead, drive forward a short distance, and thenwait another moment with your foot on thebrake pedal.

IMPORTANT

Use the foot brake to hold the car stationaryon an uphill gradient - do not hold the carwith the accelerator pedal. The gearboxcould then overheat.

For important information regarding Powershifttransmission and towing - see page 298.

Text message and action

In some situations the display may show amessage at the same time as a symbol is illu-minated.


Gearboxes

03

122

Symbol Display Driving characteristics Action

Transm. overheat brake to hold Difficulty in maintaining even speed at con-stant engine speed.

Transmission overheated. Keep the carstationary using the foot brake.A

Transm. overheat park safely Significant pulling in the car's traction. Transmission overheated. Park the carimmediately in a safe manner.A

Transm. cooling let engine run No drive due to overheated gearbox. Transmission overheated. For fastest cool-ing: Run the engine at idling speed with thegear lever in the N or P position until themessage clears.

A For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.

The table shows three steps with an increaseddegree of seriousness should the transmissionbecome too hot. In parallel with the display textthe driver is also advised that the car's elec-tronics are temporarily changing the drivingcharacteristics. Follow the instructions on theinformation display where appropriate.

NOTE

The table's examples are no indication thatthe car is defective but instead show that asafety function has been activated inten-tionally to prevent damage to one of thecar's components.

WARNING

If a warning symbol combined with the textTransm. overheat park safely is ignoredthen the heat in the gearbox may becomeso high that the power transmissionbetween engine and gearbox is temporarilyhalted in order to prevent the clutch frommalfunctioning - the car then loses drive andis stationary until gearbox temperature hascooled to an acceptable level.

For more possible display messages with theirrespective proposals for solutions concerningautomatic transmission, see page 196.

A display text clears automatically after theaction has been carried out or after one presson the indicator stalk OK button.


DRIVe Start/Stop*

03

��


Quieter and cleaner

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-ration's core values and it influences all of ouroperations. This target-orientation has resultedin the DRIVe vehicle series whose conceptconsists of an interaction between several sep-arate energy-saving functions, all with thecommon purpose of reducing fuel consump-tion, which in turn contributes to reducedexhaust emissions.

General information on Start/Stop

The engine is switched off - it becomes quieter andcleaner....

Some engine and gearbox combinations comefitted with a Start and Stop function whichengages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic orwaiting at traffic lights - the engine is thenswitched off temporarily and restarts automat-ically when the journey is due to continue.

The Start/Stop function gives the driver theopportunity for a more active environmentallyconscious way of driving the car by means ofbeing able to allow the engine to stop auto-matically, whenever appropriate.

Manual or Automatic

Note that there are differences in theStart/Stop function depending on whether thegearbox is manual or automatic.

Function and operation

Start/Stop On/Off.

Illuminates briefly on activation and for textmessages.

The engine is auto-stopped.

The Start/Stop function is activatedautomatically when the engine is

started with the key. The driver is alerted to thefunction by means of this symbol on the instru-ment panel illuminating briefly, the display textAuto Start-Stop ON is shown and the greenlamp for the On/Off button illuminates.

All of the car's normal systems such as lighting,radio, etc. work as normal even with an enginethat has stopped automatically, except thatsome equipment may have the function tem-porarily reduced, e.g. the climate control sys-


DRIVe Start/Stop*

03


tem's fan speed or extremely high volume onthe audio system.

Auto-stopping the engine

The following is required for the engine to auto-stop:

Conditions M/AA

Declutch, set the gear lever inneutral position and release theclutch pedal - the engine isswitched off.

M

Stop the car with the foot brakeand then keep your foot on thepedal - the engine stops automat-ically.

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

The AUTO START symbol onthe information display illumi-nates as verification andreminder that the engine ishas stopped automatically.

Auto-starting the engine

Conditions M/AA

With the gear lever in neutral posi-tion: Depress the clutch pedal orpress the accelerator pedal - theengine starts. Engage a suitablegear and continue the journey.

M

The following option is also avail-able on a downhill gradient:

Release the foot brake and let thecar move off - the engine startsautomatically when the speedexceeds normal walking pace.

M

Release the foot pressure on thefoot brake - the engine startsautomatically and the journey cancontinue.

A


Start assistance HSA

The foot brake can also be released on an uphillgradient to start the engine automatically - theHSA function means that the car does not rollbackwards.

HSA (Hill Start Assist) means that the pressurein the brake system remains temporarily avail-able while the driver moves his/her foot fromthe brake pedal to the accelerator pedal for

driving off with the engine having stoppedautomatically. The temporary braking effectreleases after a couple of seconds or when thedriver accelerates.

There is more information available on HSA onpage 121.

Deactivating the Start/Stop function

In certain situations, it mayadvisable to temporarilyswitch off the automaticStart/Stop function - this iscarried out by pressing thisbutton once, at which pointthe button's lamp goes out.

Disengaged Start/Stop func-tion is indicated by the infor-mation display's symbolgoing out and the messageAuto Start-Stop OFF beingdisplayed forabout 5 seconds - while thebutton's lamp goes out at thesame time.

The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it isreactivated with the button or until the nexttime the engine is started with the key.


DRIVe Start/Stop*

03

��


Limitations

The engine does not auto-stop

Even if the Start/Stop function is activated, theengine does not stop automatically if:

Conditions M/AA

the car has not achievedapprox. 5 km/h (= fast walkingpace) first after a key start or thelast auto-stop.

M + A

the driver has opened the seat-belt's buckle.

M + A

the capacity of the battery isbelow the minimum permissiblelevel.

M + A

the engine does not have normaloperating temperature.

M + A

outside temperature is belowfreezing point or aboveapprox. 30 °C.

M + A

the environment in the passengercompartment differs from thepreset values - indicated by theventilation fan running at a highspeed.

M + A

Conditions M/AA

the car is reversed. M + A

battery temperature is belowfreezing point or aboveapprox. 55 °C.

M + A

the driver makes greater steeringwheel movements.

M + A

the exhaust system's particulatefilter is full - the temporarily dis-engaged Start/Stop function isreactivated once an automaticcleaning cycle has been per-formed (see page 286).

M + A

the road is very steep. M + A

a trailer is connected electricallyto the car’s electrical system.

M + A

the atmospheric air pressure isless than equivalent to 1500-2000metres above sea level - the cur-rent air pressure varies with theprevailing weather conditions.

A

adaptive cruise control QueueAssist is activated.

A

Conditions M/AA

the driver’s door has beenopened with the gear selector inD position.

A

the gear selector is moved out ofthe D position to S positionB or"+/-".

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.B Sport mode.

The engine auto-starts

An engine that has stopped automatically mayrestart in some cases without the driver havingdecided that the journey should continue. Inthe following cases the engine also starts auto-matically if the driver has not depressed theclutch pedal (manual gearbox) or takes his/herfoot off the brake pedal (automatic gearbox):

Conditions M/AA

Misting forms on the windows. M + A

The environment in the passen-ger compartment deviates fromthe preset values.

M + A

The outside temperature fallsbelow freezing point or exceedsapprox. 30 °C.

M + A


DRIVe Start/Stop*

03


Conditions M/AA

There is a temporarily high cur-rent take-off or battery capacitydrops below the lowest permissi-ble level.

M + A

Repeated pumping of the brakepedal.

M + A

The car starts to roll - faster thanthe equivalent normal walkingpace.

M

The driver's belt lock is openedwith the gear selector in D or Nposition.

A

Steering wheel movements. A

The gear selector is moved fromthe D position to "+/-" or R.

A

The driver's door is opened withthe gear selector in D position - a"ping" sound and text messageinform that the Start/Stop func-tion is active.

A


WARNING

Do not open the bonnet when the enginehas stopped automatically - the engine maysuddenly start automatically. First switch offthe engine as normal using the START/STOP ENGINE button before opening thebonnet.

The engine does not auto-start

In the following cases the engine does notauto-start after having auto-stopped:

Conditions M/AA

A gear is engaged withoutdeclutching - a display textprompts the driver to set the gearlever in neutral position in order toenable automatic starting.

M

The driver is unrestrained, thegear selector is in P position andthe driver’s door is open - a nor-mal engine start must take place.

A

The gear selector is moved to Pposition - press the START/

STOP ENGINE button to restartthe engine.

If the driver's door is openedbefore starting the engine withthe START/STOP ENGINE but-ton, the Start/Stop function isswitched off.

A


Involuntary engine stop with manual

gearbox

In the event that a start-up fails and the enginestops, proceed as follows:


DRIVe Start/Stop*

03

��


1. Depress the clutch pedal again - the enginestarts automatically.

2. In certain cases the gear lever must be setin neutral position. The information displaythen shows the text Put gear in neutral

More information and settings

The MY CAR menu system in the car includesinstructions which explain parts of the DRIVeconcept along with several possible settingsand options - see page 199.

Text message

In combination with this indicatorlamp the Start/Stop function may dis-

play text messages on the information displayfor certain situations. For some of them thereis a recommended action that should be per-formed. The following table shows someexamples.

Symbol Message Info/Action M/AA

Auto Start-Stop ON Illuminates for about 5 seconds after Start/Stop has beenactivated.

M + A

Auto Start-Stop OFF Illuminates for about 5 seconds after Start/Stop has beenswitched off.

M + A

Auto Start-Stop serv. required Start/Stop is not operational. Contact a workshop - anauthorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

M + A


DRIVe Start/Stop*

03



Engine management system An automatic function check is carried out. M + A

AUTO-

STOP

Engine in Auto Start The engine is ready to start automatically - waiting for thebrake or clutch pedal to be depressed.

M

Press Start button The engine will not start automatically - start the engine asnormal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.

M

Depress clutch pedal to start The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the clutch pedalto be depressed.

M

Depress the foot brake to start The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake pedalto be depressed.

M

Press brake and clutch to start The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake orclutch pedal to be depressed.

M

Put gear in neutral Gear is engaged without declutching - disengage and set thegear lever in neutral position.

M

AUTO-

STOP

Engine in Auto Start The engine is ready to start automatically - waiting for thebrake pedal to be released.

A


DRIVe Start/Stop*

03



Select P or N to start Start/Stop has been deactivated - move the gear selector toN or P position and start the engine as normal with theSTART/STOP ENGINE button.

A

Press Start button The engine will not start automatically - start the engine asnormal with the START/STOP ENGINE button and the gearselector in P or N.

A


If a message does not go out following com-pletion of the action then a workshop shouldbe contacted - an authorised Volvo workshopis recommended.


All-wheel drive – AWD*

03


All Wheel Drive is always available

All Wheel Drive means that the car is driving allfour wheels at the same time.

The power is automatically distributedbetween the front and rear wheels. An elec-tronically controlled clutch system distributesthe power to the wheels that have the best gripon the current road surface. This provides thebest traction and prevents wheel spin. Undernormal driving conditions, the majority ofpower is transmitted to the front wheels.

All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in rain,snow and icy conditions.


Foot brake

03

131

General

The car is equipped with two brake circuits. Ifone brake circuit is damaged then this willmean that the brakes engage at a deeper leveland harder pressure on the pedal is needed toproduce the normal braking effect.

The driver's brake pedal pressure is assistedby a brake servo.

WARNING

The brake servo only works when the engineis running.

If the brake is used when the engine is switchedoff then the pedal will feel stiff and more forcemust be used to brake the car.

In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavyload the brakes can be relieved by using enginebraking. Engine braking is most efficiently usedif the same gear is used downhill as up.

For more general information on heavy loadson the car, see page 370.

Anti-lock braking system

The car is equipped with ABS (Anti-lockBraking System) which prevents the wheelsfrom locking during braking. This means theability to steer is maintained and it is easier toswerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration

may be felt in the brake pedal when this isengaged and this is normal.

A short test of the ABS system is made auto-matically after the engine has been startedwhen the driver releases the brake pedal. Afurther automatic test of the ABS system maybe made when the car reaches 10 km/h. Thetest may be experienced as pulses in the brakepedal.

Emergency brake lights and automatic

hazard warning flashers

Emergency brake lights are activated to alertvehicles behind about sudden braking. Thefunction means that the brake light flashesinstead of - as in normal braking - shining witha constant glow.

Emergency brake lights are activated atspeeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system isworking and/or in the event of sudden braking.After the car's speed has been slowed below10 km/h the brake light returns from flashing tothe normal constant glow - while at the sametime the hazard warning flashers are activated,and they flash until the driver changes enginespeed with the accelerator pedal or they aredeactivated with their button, see page 89.

Cleaning the brake discs

Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discsmay result in delayed brake function. This delayis minimised by cleaning the brake linings.

Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road sur-faces, prior to long-stay parking and after thecar has been washed. Carry this out by brakinggently during a short period while en route.

Emergency Brake Assistance

Emergency Brake Assistance EBA (EmergencyBrake Assist) helps to increase brake force andso reduce braking distance. EBA detects thedriver's braking style and increases brake forceas necessary. The brake force can be rein-forced up to the level when the ABS system isengaged. The EBA function is interrupted whenthe pressure on the brake pedal is reduced.

NOTE

When EBA is activated the brake pedal low-ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)the brake pedal as long as necessary. If thebrake pedal is released then all brakingceases.

Maintenance

To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi-ble, follow the Volvo service intervals as speci-


Foot brake

03

132

fied in the Service and Warranty Booklet, seepage 322.

IMPORTANT

The wear on the brake system's compo-nents must be checked regularly.

Contact a workshop for information aboutthe procedure or engage a workshop tocarry out the inspection - an authorisedVolvo workshop is recommended.

Symbols in the combined instrument

panel


Constant glow – Check thebrake fluid level. If the level islow, fill with brake fluid andcheck for the cause of the brakefluid loss.

Constant glow for 2 secondswhen the engine is started –There was a fault in the brakesystem's ABS function whenthe engine was last running.

WARNING

If and illuminate at the sametime, there may be a fault in the brake sys-tem.

If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor-mal at this stage, drive carefully to the near-est workshop and have the brake systemchecked - an authorised Volvo workshop isrecommended.

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in thebrake fluid reservoir, do not drive furtherbefore topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid mustbe investigated.


Parking brake

03

133

General

Function

A faint electric motor noise can be heard whenthe electrical parking brake is being applied.The noise can also be heard during the auto-matic function checking of the parking brake.

If the car is stationary when the parking brakeis applied then it only acts on the rear wheels.If it is applied when the car is moving then thenormal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake actson all four wheels. Brake function changes overto the rear wheels when the car is almost sta-tionary.

Low battery voltage

If the battery voltage is too low then the parkingbrake can neither be released nor applied.Connect a donor battery if the battery voltageis too low, see page 116.

Applying the parking brake

Parking brake control - apply.

1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

2. Press the control.> The combined instrument panel symbol

starts flashing - once there is aconstant glow it is applied.

3. Release the foot brake pedal and makesure that the car is at a standstill position.

• When parking the vehicle, always engage1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put thegear selector in position P (for automaticgearbox).

In an emergency the parking brake can beapplied when the vehicle is moving by depress-ing the control. When the control is released or

the accelerator pedal is depressed the brakingis interrupted.

NOTE

In the event of emergency braking at speedsabove 10 km/h a signal sounds during thebraking procedure.

Parking on a hill

If the car is parked facing uphill:

• Turn the wheels away from the kerb.

If the car is parked facing downhill:

• Turn the wheels towards the kerb.

WARNING

Always apply the parking brake when park-ing on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or inP if it has automatic transmission, is not suf-ficient to hold the car in all situation.


Parking brake

03

134

Disengaging the parking brake

Parking brake control - release.

Cars with manual gearbox

Releasing manually

1. Insert the remote control key in the ignitionswitch.1


3. Pull the control.> The parking brake releases and the

combined instrument panel symbol goes out.

NOTE

The parking brake can also be releasedmanually by depressing the clutch pedalinstead of the brake pedal. Volvo recom-mends the use of the brake pedal.

Releasing automatically


2. Engage 1st gear or reverse gear.

3. Ease up the clutch and depress the accel-erator.> The parking brake releases and the


Cars with automatic gearbox

Releasing manually

1. Insert the remote control key in the ignitionswitch1.


3. Pull the control.> The parking brake releases and the


Releasing automatically

1. Put the seatbelt on.



4. Move the gear selector to position D or Rand depress the accelerator.> The parking brake releases and the


NOTE

For safety reasons, the parking brake is onlyreleased automatically if the engine is run-ning and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. Theparking brake is released immediately oncars with automatic gearbox when theaccelerator pedal is depressed and the gearselector is in position D or R.

Heavy load uphill

A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause thecar to roll backward when the parking brake isreleased automatically on a steep incline.Avoid this by depressing the control while driv-ing off. Release the control when the engineachieves traction.

1 For a car with the Keyless system: Press START/STOP ENGINE.


Parking brake

03

��

135

Replacing the brake linings

The rear brake linings must be replaced at aworkshop due to the design of the electric

parking brake - an authorised Volvo workshopis recommended.


Symbol Message Meaning/Action

"Message" Read the message on the information display.

A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is applied.

If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen. Read the messageon the information display.

Park brake not fully

released

A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released - Try to apply and release the brake.

If the fault persists after a few attempts: Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-mended.

Note: A warning signal sounds if the journey is continued with this error message.


Parking brake

03

136


Parking brake not applied A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied - Try to release and apply the brake.


The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speedwith the door open in order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionallydisengaged.

Parking brake Service

required

A fault has arisen - Try to apply and release the brake.


• If the car has to be parked before the faulthas been rectified then the wheels must beturned as if parking on a hill and 1st gearengaged (manual gearbox) or the gearselector must be in position P (automaticgearbox).


HomeLink *

03


General

HomeLink 1 is a programmable remote controlwhich can remotely control up to three differentdevices (e.g. garage door opener, alarm sys-tem, outdoor lighting and indoor lighting etc.)and in doing so replace their remote controls.For more information on HomeLink , visit:www.homelink.com or ring00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate phonenumber, +49 6838 907 277).

WARNING

• If HomeLink is used to operate agarage door or gate, make sure thatthere is no-one in the vicinity of the dooror gate while it is moving.

• The car should remain outside thegarage while a garage door opener isbeing programmed.

• Do not use HomeLink for any garagedoor that does not have safety stop andsafety reverse.

Save the original remote controls for futureprogramming (e.g. when changing to anothercar or for use in another vehicle). It is also rec-ommended that the programming for the but-tons is deleted when the car is sold. See thesection "Resetting the HomeLink® buttons" onpage 138.

Programming HomeLink

NOTE

In certain vehicles the ignition must beswitched on or in "accessory position"before HomeLink can be programmed orused. If possible, fit new batteries in theremote control that shall be replaced byHomeLink for faster programming andimproved transmission of the radio signal.The HomeLink buttons should be resetbefore programming. When this has beendone HomeLink is set in "learn mode" andready for programming.

1. Aim the original remote control towards theHomeLink button to be programmed andhold it 5-14 cm from the button. Do notobstruct the indicator lamp onHomeLink .

2. Depress the button on the original remotecontrol and the button to be programmedon HomeLink simultaneously. Do notrelease the buttons until the indicator lamphas changed over from slow to rapid flash-ing. Both the buttons must be releasedwhen the indicator lamp flashes quickly.

1 HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.


HomeLink *

03


3. Depress the HomeLink button being

programmed, hold it depressed for

5 seconds and then release it. Repeat ifnecessary until the garage door is acti-vated. If the door is not activated, press theprogrammed HomeLink button and holdit depressed and check the indicator lamp.> Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu-

minates with a constant glow when thebutton is kept depressed, this indicatesthat the programming is complete.The garage door, gate or similar shouldnow be activated when the pro-grammed HomeLink button isdepressed.

Glow not constant: The indicator lampflashes quickly for approx. 2 secondsand then changes over to a constantglow. In which case, continue with theprogramming steps 4-6 in order to com-plete the programming of a device withrolling code (usually a garage dooropener).

4. Locate the "programming button2" on thereceiver for the garage door for example,normally located close to the antenna'sbracket on the receiver.

5. Depress and release the receiver's "pro-gramming button". The button flashes forapprox. 30 seconds and the next step mustbe carried out within this period.

6. While the receiver's "programming button"is still flashing, press the button onHomeLink being programmed and hold itdepressed for approx. 2 seconds and thenrelease it. Repeat the press/hold/releasesequence up to 3 times to conclude theprogramming.

Operation

When HomeLink is fully programmed it can beused in place of the separate original remotecontrols.

Press the programmed button and hold itdepressed until the garage door, alarm system,etc. is activated (may take several seconds).Naturally the original remote controls can stillbe used in parallel with HomeLink if required.

NOTE

If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink willwork for 30 minutes after the driver's doorhas been opened.

If programming problems persist, contactHomeLink on: www.homelink.com or ring00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate phonenumber +49 6838 907 277).

Resetting the HomeLink buttons

It is only possible to reset all of theHomeLink buttons at the same time, not eachbutton individually. However, individual but-tons can be reprogrammed, see the followingsection "Programming individual buttons".

1. Depress the two outer buttons onHomeLink and do not release until theindicator lamp starts to flash.

2. Release the buttons.> HomeLink is now set in so-called

"learn mode" and is ready to be reprog-rammed, see section "ProgrammingHomeLink®" on page 137.

2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.


HomeLink *

03


Programming individual buttons

To reprogram an individual HomeLink button,proceed as follows:

1. Depress the required button and do not

release.

2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLinkstarts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds,start with step 1 in section "ProgrammingHomeLink®" on page 137.

For more information or to leave commentsabout HomeLink , visit: www.homelink.com orring 00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium ratephone number +49 6838 907 277).

G000000


DSTC – Stability and traction control system....................................... 142Road sign information - RSI*................................................................ 144Speed limiter*........................................................................................ 146Cruise control*...................................................................................... 148Adaptive cruise control*........................................................................ 150Distance Warning*................................................................................. 161City Safety™......................................................................................... 164Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*............... 169Driver Alert System*.............................................................................. 177Driver Alert System - DAC*................................................................... 178Driver Alert System - LDW*................................................................... 181Park assist syst*.................................................................................... 184Park assist camera*.............................................................................. 187BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System................................................ 190

DRIVER SUPPORT

04 Driver support

DSTC – Stability and traction control system

04


General information on DSTC

The stability and traction control system, DSTC(Dynamic Stability & Traction Control) helps thedriver to avoid skidding and improves the car'straction.

The activation of the system during brakingmay be noticed as a throbbing sound. The carmay accelerate slower than expected when theaccelerator pedal is depressed.

Active Yaw Control

The function limits the driving and brake forceof the wheels individually in order to stabilisethe car.

Spin Control

The function prevents the driving wheels fromspinning against the road surface during accel-eration.

Traction control system

The function is active at low speed and trans-fers power from the driving wheel that is spin-ning to the one that is not.

Engine drag control - EDC

EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involun-tary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down orengine braking when driving in low gears onslippery road surfaces.

Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,amongst other things, impair the driver's abilityto steer the car.

Corner Traction Control – CTC

CTC compensates for understeer and allowshigher than normal acceleration in a bend with-out wheelspin on the inner wheel, e.g. on anarcing motorway entrance road to quicklyreach the prevailing traffic speed.

Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA

The function serves to stabilise the car andtrailer combination if it begins to snake, seepage 297.

NOTE

The function is deactivated if the driverselects Sport mode.

Operation

Selection of level - Sport mode

The DSTC system is always activated - it can-not be deactivated.

However, the driver can select the Sport mode,which allows for a more active driving experi-ence. In Sport mode the system detectswhether the accelerator pedal, steering wheelmovements and cornering are more active than

in normal driving and then allows controlledskidding with the rear section up to a certainlevel before it intervenes and stabilises the car.

If the driver stops a controlled skid by releasingthe accelerator pedal then the DSTC systemintervenes and stabilises the car.

With Sport mode, maximum traction isobtained if the car has become stuck, or whendriving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or deepsnow.

Proceed as follows to select Sport mode:

1. Press the centre console button MY CAR

and search in the display screen's menusystem and locate My S60 DSTC. (Forinformation on the menu system, seepage 198).

2. Uncheck the box and back out of the menusystem with EXIT.> The system then allows a more sporty

driving style.

The Sport mode is active until the driver dese-lects it or until the engine is switched off - afterthe engine is started the next time the DSTCsystem is back in its normal mode again.

04 Driver support

DSTC – Stability and traction control system

04

143


Symbol Message Specification

DSTC Temporarily OFF DSTC system temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature. - The function is reac-tivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.

DSTC Service required DSTC system disengaged.

• Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.

• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

and

"Message" There is a message on the speedometer's display - Read it!

Constant glow for 2 seconds. System check when the engine is started.

Flashing light. DSTC system is being activated.

Sport mode is activated.

04 Driver support

Road sign information - RSI*

04


General information on RSI

Examples of readable speed signs1.

The Road sign information function (RSI – RoadSign Information) helps the driver to rememberwhich road signs the car has passed throughinformation on - among other things - the cur-rent speed, the start/end of a motorway orroad, and when overtaking is prohibited.

If a sign for both a motorway/road for motor-ised traffic and a sign showing the maximumpermitted speed are passed, RSI decides toshow the sign symbol for maximum permittedspeed.

WARNING

RSI does not work in all situations but isdesigned merely as a supplementary aid.

The driver always bears ultimate responsi-bility for ensuring that the vehicle is drivensafely and that applicable road traffic rulesand regulations are followed.

Operation

Recorded speed information.

When RSI has recorded a road sign with animposed speed, the sign is displayed as a sym-bol on the instrument panel.

Together with the symbol forthe current speed limit, a signshowing that overtaking isprohibited may also be dis-played where appropriate.

Additional signs

Examples of additional signs1.

Sometimes different speed limits are signpos-ted for the same road - an additional sign thenindicates the circumstances under which thedifferent speeds apply. The road section maybe particularly susceptible to accidents in rainand/or fog, for example.

An additional sign relating to rain is displayedonly if the windscreen wipers are in use.

1 Road signs which are displayed in the instrument panel are dependent on the market - the illustration only shows a few examples.

04 Driver support

Road sign information - RSI*

04


The speed applicable on anexit is indicated by means ofan additional sign containingan arrow. The arrow is dis-played under the symbolshowing the speed.

Speed signs linked to this type of additionalsign are displayed only if the driver is using thedirection indicator.

Limited distance or time of day

Some speeds are applicableonly after a specific distanceor at a certain time of day. Thedriver's attention is drawn tothe situation by means of anempty frame under the sym-bol showing the speed.

Setting in MY CAR

Options in MY CAR.

The instrument panel’s speed symbol displaycan be disabled. To deactivate the RSI func-tion:

• Uncheck the option in MY CAR Settings

Car settings Road Sign

Information and go back by pressingEXIT, see page 199.

Speed warning

The driver can opt to receive a warning (SpeedAlert) when the applicable speed limit is excee-ded by 5 km/h or more. This warning is givenby the symbol showing the applicable maxi-mum speed temporarily flashing when thisspeed is exceeded.

To activate speed warning:

• Check speed warning in MY CAR

Settings Car settings Speed alert

and go back by pressing EXIT, seepage 199.

Limitations

The RSI function's camera sensor is limited -just like the human eye. Find out more aboutthis on page 174.

Signs which indirectly provide information on aprevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs fortowns/districts, are not recorded by the RSIfunction.

Here are several examples of what can disruptthe function:

• Faded signs

• Signs positioned on bends

• Rotated or damaged signs

• Concealed or poorly positioned signs.

• Signs completely or partly covered withfrost, snow and/or dirt.

04 Driver support

Speed limiter*

04


General information on the speedlimiter

A speed limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regar-ded as a reverse cruise control - the driver reg-ulates the speed using the accelerator pedalbut is prevented from accidentally exceeding apre-selected/set speed by the speed limiter.

Operation

Steering wheel keypad and display.

Speed limiter - On/Off.

Standby mode ceases and stored speedresumes - each extra press gives +1 km/h.

Standby mode.

Activate and adjust the maximum speed(each press gives +/-5 km/h).

Stored maximum speed (in brackets =Standby mode).

Switch on and activate

When the speed limiter isactive the display will show itssymbol in combination withthe set maximum speed.

Selection and storage of thehighest possible speed in the

memory can be made both during a journeyand while stationary.

While driving

1. Press the steering wheel button toswitch on the speed limiter.> The symbol for the speed limiter is illu-

minated on the instrument panel dis-play.

2. When the car is moving at the desired high-est possible speed: Press one of the steer-ing wheel buttons or until the instru-ment panel display shows the desiredmaximum speed.> The speed limiter is then active and the

display (5) shows the maximum speedselected and the maximum speedstored in the memory.

When stationary

1. Press the steering wheel button toswitch on the speed limiter.

2. Scroll with the button until the instru-ment panel display shows the desiredmaximum speed.> The speed limiter is then active and the

display (5) shows the maximum speedselected and the maximum speedstored in the memory.

Changing the speed

To change the stored speed:

• Adjust with short presses on or -every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The lastpresses made are stored in the memory.

To adjust +/- 1 km/h:

• Hold the button depressed and releasewhen the instrument panel's display showsa point (5) at the desired maximum speed.

Temporary deactivation - standby mode

To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter andset it in standby mode:

– Press .

> The display shows the stored maximumspeed in brackets (5) and the driver can

04 Driver support

Speed limiter*

04


temporarily exceed the set maximumspeed.

The speed limiter is re-activated by onepress on at which the display'sbrackets disappear and the car's maxi-mum speed is again limited.

Temporary deactivation with the

accelerator pedal

The speed limiter can also be set in standbymode with the accelerator pedal, e.g. for rap-idly accelerating the car out of a situation:

– Depress the accelerator pedal fully.> The display shows the stored maximum

speed in brackets (5) and the driver cantemporarily exceed the set maximumspeed.

The speed limiter is automatically re-activated after the release of the accel-erator pedal and the car's speed isslowed down to below the selected/stored maximum speed - the display'sbrackets disappear and the car's maxi-mum speed is again limited.

Alarm for speed exceeded

On steep roads the engine braking effect maybe inadequate and the selected maximumspeed exceeded. The driver is alerted aboutthis with an acoustic signal.

The signal is active until the driver has slowedto below the selected maximum speed.

NOTE

The alarm is only activated after 5 secondsif the speed has been exceeded by at least3 km/h provided that none of the buttons

or has been depressed during the lasthalf minute.

Deactivate

To deactivate the speed limiter:

– Press the steering wheel button .

> The display's symbol for the speed lim-iter and the set speed (5) are cleared.The selected and stored speed are thusdeleted from the memory and cannot beresumed with the button.

The driver can then use the acceleratorpedal to choose a speed without limita-tion.

04 Driver support

Cruise control*

04


General information on CC

The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helpsthe driver maintain an even speed, resulting ina more relaxed driving on motorways and long,straight roads in regular traffic flows.

WARNING

The driver must always be observant withregard to the traffic conditions and intervenewhen the cruise control is not maintaining asuitable speed and/or suitable distance.

The driver always bears ultimate responsi-bility for ensuring that the vehicle is drivensafely.

Operation

The steering wheel buttons and display in carswith speed limiter1.

G02

1411

The steering wheel buttons and display in carswithout speed limiter1.

Cruise control - On/Off.

Standby mode ceases and the storedspeed is resumed.

Standby mode

Activate and adjust the speed.

Selected speed (in brackets = Standbymode).

Activating and setting the speed

To enable cruise control:

• Press the steering wheel button (1).

1 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

04 Driver support

Cruise control*

04


> The symbol illuminates in the display (5)and the brackets around (---) km/h showthat cruise control is set in standby mode.

To activate cruise control:

• At the required speed - press the steeringwheel button or .

> Current speed is stored in the memory - thedisplay text (---) km/h changes to showthe selected speed, e.g. 100 km/h, withoutbrackets.

NOTE

Cruise control cannot be engaged atspeeds below 30 km/h.

Changing the speed


• Press briefly on the steering wheel button, or - most recent presses are stored

in memory.

A temporary increase in speed with the accel-erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does notaffect the cruise control setting - the car returnsto the set speed when the accelerator pedal isreleased.

NOTE

If any of the Cruise Control buttons are helddown for more than approx. 1 minute, it isblocked and disabled. To be able to reacti-vate Cruise Control, the car must be stop-ped and the engine restarted.


To temporarily disengage cruise control andset it in standby mode:

• Press the steering wheel button .

> Set speed is shown in brackets in the dis-play (5), e.g. (100) km/h.

Automatic standby mode

Cruise control is temporarily disengaged andset in standby mode if:

• wheels lose traction

• the foot brake is used

• speed falls below approx. 30 km/h

• the clutch pedal is depressed

• the gear selector is moved to neutral posi-tion (automatic gearbox)

• the driver maintains a speed higher thanthe set speed for longer than 1 minute.

The driver must then regulate the speed.

Resume set speed

Cruise control in standby mode is re-activatedwith one press on the steering wheel button

- the speed is then set to the last storedspeed.

NOTE

A significant increase in speed may ariseafter the speed has been resumed with .

Deactivate

The cruise control is switched off with thesteering wheel button (1) or by switching off theengine - the set speed is deleted from thememory and cannot be resumed with the button.

04 Driver support

Adaptive cruise control*

04


General information on ACC

The adaptive cruise control (ACC – AdaptiveCruise Control) helps the driver maintain a safedistance from the vehicle ahead. An adaptivecruise control provides a more relaxing drivingexperience on long journeys on motorwaysand long straight main roads in smooth trafficflows.

The driver sets the desired speed and timeinterval to the car in front. When the radardetector detects a slower vehicle in front of thecar, the speed is automatically adapted to that.When the road is clear again the car returns tothe selected speed.

If the adaptive cruise control is switched off orset to the standby mode and the car comes tooclose to a vehicle in front, then the driver iswarned by Distance Warning (see page 161)about the short distance.

WARNING

The driver must always be observant withregard to the traffic conditions and intervenewhen the adaptive cruise control is notmaintaining a suitable speed or suitable dis-tance.

The adaptive cruise control cannot handleall traffic, weather and road conditions.

Read the whole of this section for informa-tion on the limitations of the adaptive cruisecontrol. The driver must be familiar with thisinformation before using the adaptive cruisecontrol.

The driver always bears responsibility formaintaining the correct distance and speed,even when the adaptive cruise control isbeing used.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance of adaptive cruise controlcomponents must only be performed at aworkshop - an authorised Volvo workshopis recommended.

Automatic gearbox

Cars with automatic gearbox have enhancedfunctionality with the adaptive cruise control'sQueue Assistant, see page 155.

Function

Function overview1.

Warning lamp - braking by driver required

Steering wheel keypad

Radar sensor

Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruisecontrol system and a coordinated spacing sys-tem.

1 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.

04 Driver support


04


WARNING

Adaptive cruise control is not a collisionavoidance system. The driver must inter-vene if the system does not detect a vehiclein front.

The adaptive cruise control does not brakefor humans or animals, and not for smallvehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles.Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi-cles and objects.

Do not use the adaptive cruise control, forexample, in city traffic, in dense traffic, atjunctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot ofwater or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads oron slip roads.

The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainlymeasured by a radar sensor. Cruise controlregulates the speed with acceleration andbraking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a lowsound when they are being used by the Adap-tive cruise control.

WARNING

The brake pedal moves when the cruisecontrol brakes. Do not rest your foot underthe brake pedal as it could become trapped.

The adaptive cruise control aims to follow thevehicle ahead in the same lane at a time intervalset by the driver. If the radar sensor cannot seeany vehicle in front then the car will insteadmaintain the cruise control's set speed. Thisalso happens if the speed of the vehicle in frontexceeds the cruise control's set speed.

The adaptive cruise control aims to control thespeed in a smooth way. In situations thatdemand sudden braking the driver must brakehimself/herself. This applies with large differ-ences in speed, or if the vehicle in front brakesheavily. Due to limitations in the radar sensor,braking may come unexpectedly or not at all,see page 156.

The adaptive cruise control can be activated tofollow another vehicle at speeds from30 km/h2 up to 200 km/h. If the speed fallsbelow 30 km/h or if the engine speed becomestoo low, the cruise control is set in standbymode at which automatic braking ceases - thedriver must then take over himself/herself tomaintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.

Warning lamp - braking by driver

required

Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacitythat is equivalent to more than 40% of the car'sbraking capacity.

If the car needs to be braked more heavily thancruise control capacity and the driver does notbrake, then the cruise control uses the collisionwarning system's warning lamp and warningsound (see page 169) to alert the driver thatimmediate intervention is required.

NOTE

The warning lamp may be difficult to noticein strong sunlight or when sunglasses arebeing worn.

WARNING

Cruise control only warns of vehiclesdetected by the radar sensor. Consequentlythere may be no warning or it may be sub-ject to a delay. Do not wait for a warning butbrake when it is necessary.

Steep roads and/or heavy load

Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control isprimarily intended for use when driving on levelroad surfaces. It may have difficultly in keepingthe correct distance from the vehicle aheadwhen driving on steep roads, with a heavy loador with a trailer - in which case, be extra atten-tive and ready to slow down.

2 Queue Assistant (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range of 0-200 km/h, see page 155.

04 Driver support


04


Operation

Steering wheel keypad and display in cars withSpeed limiter3.

Cruise control - On/Off.

Standby mode ceases and stored speedresumes - each extra press gives +1 km/h.

Standby mode

Time interval - Increase/decrease.

Activate and adjust the speed (each pressgives +/-5 km/h).


Time interval4 - On (during adjustment).

Time interval4 - On (after adjustment).

Steering wheel keypad and display in cars with-out Speed limiter3.

Standby mode ceases and the storedspeed is resumed.

Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.

Time interval - Increase/decrease.

Activate and adjust the speed.




Activating and setting the speed

To set the Cruise control:

• Press the steering wheel button -the symbol illuminates in the display.The display's symbol (---) shows that thecruise control is set in standby mode.

To activate the Cruise control:

• At the desired speed - press the steeringwheel button or .

> The current speed is stored in the memory- the display's symbol (---) changes toshow the selected speed, e.g. 100, withoutbrackets.

When the symbol changesto the radar sensor hasdetected a vehicle.

Only when the symbol (with car) is illuminated, is thedistance to the vehicle in

front regulated by the cruise control.

3 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.4 The display shows either "dash" symbol [7] or [8] - they are never shown simultaneously.5 The display shows either "dash" symbol [6] or [7] - they are never shown simultaneously.

04 Driver support


04


Changing the speed


• Adjust with short presses on or -every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The lastpresses made are stored in the memory.

If speed is increased using the acceleratorpedal prior to pressing the / button,then it is the car's current speed when thebutton is pressed that is stored in thecruise control.

• In active mode the button has the samefunction as but results in a lowerincrease in speed: + 1 km/h.

NOTE

If any of the Cruise Control buttons are helddown for more than approx. 1 minute, it isblocked and disabled. To be able to reacti-vate Cruise Control, the car must be stop-ped and the engine restarted.

In certain situations, cruise control cannotbe activated. Then the display showsCruise control Unavailable, seepage 158.

Set time interval

Different time intervals to thevehicle in front can beselected and shown in thedisplay as 1-5 horizontal lines- the more lines the longer thetime interval. One line corre-sponds to approx. 1 second

to the vehicle in front, 5 linesapprox. 3 seconds.

To set/change the time interval:

• Increase or decrease with the steeringwheel keypad's thumbwheel (or the but-tons / for cars without Speed limiter).

At low speed, when the distances are short, theadaptive cruise control increases the timeinterval slightly.

The adaptive cruise control allows the timeinterval to vary noticeably in certain situationsin order to allow the car to follow the vehicle infront smoothly and comfortably.

Note that small intervals only allow the driver ashort time to react and take action if anyunforeseen traffic problem should arise.

The number of lines for theselected time interval isshown during the setting itselfand for several seconds after-wards. Then a smaller scaleversion of the symbol isshown to the right of the dis-

play. The same symbol is also shown whenDistance Warning is activated, see page 161.

NOTE

Only use the time intervals permitted bylocal traffic regulations.

If Cruise Control does not appear to reactwhen activated, this may be because thetime distance to the car in front is preventingan increase in speed.

The higher the speed the longer the calcu-lated distance in metres for a given timeinterval.


To temporarily disengage Cruise control andset it in standby mode:


> Set speed is shown in brackets in the dis-play, e.g. (100).

04 Driver support


04


Keypad without Speed limiter*

To temporarily disengage Cruise control andset it in standby mode:


Standby mode due to driver intervention

Cruise control is temporarily disengaged andset in standby mode if:

• the foot brake is used

• the clutch pedal is depressed for longerthan 1 minute6

• the gear selector is moved to N position(automatic gearbox)

• the driver maintains a speed higher thanthe set speed for longer than 1 minute.

The driver must then regulate the speed.

A temporary increase in speed with the accel-erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does notaffect the cruise control setting - the car returnsto the last stored speed when the acceleratorpedal is released.

Automatic standby mode

The Adaptive cruise control is dependent onother systems, e.g.. DSTC (see page 142). If

any of these systems stop working then cruisecontrol is automatically deactivated.

In the event of automatic deactivation a signalwill sound and the message Cruise control

Cancelled is shown in the display. The drivermust then intervene and adapt the speed anddistance to the vehicle ahead.

An automatic deactivation can be due to:

• engine speed is too low/high

• speed falls below 30 km/h7

• wheels lose traction

• brake temperature is high

• the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wetsnow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).

Resume set speed

Cruise control in standby mode is re-activatedwith one press on the steering wheel button

- the speed is then set to the last storedspeed.

NOTE

A significant increase in speed may ariseafter the speed has been resumed with .

Overtaking another vehicle

When the car is following another vehicle andthe driver indicates an imminent overtake withthe direction indicator8, the Cruise controlhelps to briefly accelerate the car towards thevehicle in front.

The function is active at speedsabove 70 km/h.

WARNING

Be aware that this function can be activatedin more situations other than during over-taking, e.g. when a direction indicator isused to indicate a change of lane or exit toanother road - the car will then acceleratebriefly.

Deactivate

Keypad with Speed limiter

Adaptive cruise control is deactivated with thesteering wheel button . The set speed iscleared and cannot be resumed with the button.

Keypad without Speed limiter

With a short press on the steering wheel button the cruise control is set in standby mode.

6 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.7 Does not apply to a car with Queue Assistant - it manages right down to stationary.8 On left flash only in left-hand drive car, or right flash in right-hand drive car.

04 Driver support


04


With a further short press the cruise control isdeactivated. The set speed is cleared and can-not be resumed with the button.

Queue Assistant

In cars with automatic gearbox Adaptive cruisecontrol is supplemented with the Queue Assis-tant function (also referred to as "QueueAssist").

Queue Assistant has the following functions:

• Extended speed range - also below 30 km/h and at standstill

• Change of target

• Automatic braking ceases when stationary

• Automatic activation parking brake.

Note that the lowest programmable speed forthe cruise control is 30 km/h - even though thecruise control is capable of following anothervehicle down to a standstill, a lower speedcannot be selected.

Extended speed range

NOTE

In order to activate the cruise control thedriver's door must be closed and the drivermust be wearing the seatbelt.

With automatic gearbox the cruise control canfollow another vehicle within the range of0-200 km/h.

NOTE

Activation of the cruise control below30 km/h requires a vehicle in front within areasonable distance.

For shorter stops in connection with inching inslow traffic or at traffic lights driving is auto-matically resumed if the stops do not exceedabout 3 seconds - if it takes longer before thecar in front starts moving again then the cruisecontrol is set in standby mode with automaticbraking. The driver must then re-activate thecruise control in one of the following ways:


or

• Depress the accelerator pedal.

> The cruise control will then resume follow-ing the vehicle in front.

NOTE

Queue Assist can hold the car stationary fora maximum of 4 minutes - then the parkingbrake is applied and Cruise Control is dis-engaged.

• The driver has to release the parkingbrake before the cruise control can bereactivated.

Change of target

If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns thenthere may be stationary traffic in front.

When the cruise control is following anothervehicle at speeds below 30 km/h and changestarget from a moving to a stationary vehicle, thecruise control will slow down for the stationaryvehicle.

04 Driver support


04


WARNING

When the cruise control is following anothervehicle at speeds in excess of 30 km/h andthe target is changed from a moving vehicleto a stationary vehicle, the cruise control willignore the stationary vehicle and insteadselect the stored speed.

• The driver must intervene him/herselfand brake.

Automatic standby mode with change of

target

Cruise control is disengaged and set instandby mode:

• when the speed is below 5 km/h and cruisecontrol is not sure whether the targetobject is a stationary vehicle or some otherobject, e.g. a speed bump.

• when the speed is below 5 km/h and thevehicle in front turns off so the cruise con-trol no longer has a vehicle to follow.

Termination of automatic braking at a

standstill

In certain situations Queue Assist automati-cally interrupts braking when stationary. Thismeans that the brakes are released and the carmay start to roll - the driver must thereforeintervene and brake the car himself/herself inorder to maintain its position.

Queue Assist releases the foot brake and setscruise control in standby mode in the followingsituations:

• the driver puts his/her foot on the brakepedal

• the parking brake is applied

• the gear selector is moved to P, N or Rposition

• the driver sets the cruise control in standbymode.

Automatic activation parking brake

In some situations Queue Assist applies theparking brake in order to keep the car station-ary.

This takes place if:

• the driver opens the door or takes off his/her seatbelt

• DSTC is changed from Normal to Sport

mode

• Queue Assist has held the car stationaryfor more than 4 minutes

• the engine is switched off

• the brakes have overheated.

The radar sensor and its limitations

The radar sensor is used - apart from by Adap-tive cruise control - by the following functionsas well:

• Collision Warning with Auto Brake, seepage 169

• Distance Warning, see page 161.

The function of the radar sensor is to detectcars or larger vehicles in the same direction, inthe same lane.

Modification of the radar sensor could result init being illegal to use.

04 Driver support


04


WARNING

The driver must always be observant withregard to the traffic conditions and intervenewhen the adaptive cruise control is notmaintaining a suitable speed or suitable dis-tance.

The adaptive cruise control cannot handleall traffic, weather and road conditions.

Read the whole of this section for informa-tion on the limitations of the adaptive cruisecontrol. The driver must be familiar with thisinformation before using the adaptive cruisecontrol.

The driver always bears responsibility formaintaining the correct distance and speed,even when the adaptive cruise control isbeing used.

WARNING

Accessories or other objects such as auxil-iary lamps must not be installed in front ofthe grille.

WARNING

Adaptive cruise control is not a collisionavoidance system. The driver must inter-vene if the system does not detect a vehiclein front.

The adaptive cruise control does not brakefor humans or animals, and not for smallvehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles.Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi-cles and objects.

Do not use the adaptive cruise control, forexample, in city traffic, in dense traffic, atjunctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot ofwater or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads oron slip roads.

The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehi-cles in front is reduced significantly:

• if the radar sensor becomes blocked andcannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavyrain or slush, or if other objects have col-lected in front of the radar sensor.

NOTE

Keep the area in front of the radar sensorclean - see "Maintenance" on page 172.

• if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi-cantly different from your own speed.

Examples where the cruise control does

not work optimally

The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. Insome situations another vehicle is notdetected, or the detection is made later thanexpected.

ACC field of vision.

04 Driver support


04


Sometimes the radar sensor is late atdetecting vehicles at close distances, e.g.a vehicle that drives in between the car andvehicles in front.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, orvehicles not driving in the centre of the lanecan remain undetected.

In bends the radar sensor may detect thewrong vehicle or lose a detected vehiclefrom view.

Fault tracing and action

If the display shows the message Radar

blocked See manual this means that theradar signals from the radar sensor are blockedand that vehicles in front of the car could notbe detected.

This means that in addition to the AdaptiveCruise Control, Distance Warning and Collision

Warning with Auto Brake functions are notoperating either.

The following table presents possible causesfor a message being shown along with theappropriate action.

Cause Action

The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.

Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain orsnowfall.

Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar sig-nals.

No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowyroad surface.

The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is nolonger blocked.



Standby mode or active mode without detected vehicle.

Active mode with detected vehicle to which cruise control adapts the speed.

04 Driver support


04

��



Time interval activated, during adjustment.

Time interval activated, after adjustment.

DSTC Normal to enable

Cruise

Adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until the Stability and Traction Control system (DSTC) hasbeen set in Normal mode - see page 142.

Cruise control Cancelled Adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed.

Cruise control Unavailable Adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.

This could be due to:

• brake temperature is high

• the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.

Radar blocked See manual Adaptive cruise control temporarily disengaged.

• The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event that heavyrain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.

Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 156.

Cruise control Service

required

Adaptive cruise control disengaged.

• Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

04 Driver support


04



Press Brake To hold +acoustic alarm

(Only with Queue Assistant)

The car is stationary and the cruise control will release the foot brake to allow the parking brake totake over and hold the car, but a fault in the parking brake means the car will shortly begin to roll.

• The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driverdepresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.

Below 30 km/h Only fol-

lowing

(Only with Queue Assistant)

Shown with attempts to activate the cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h without a vehicle in frontwithin the activation distance (approx. 30 metres).

04 Driver support

Distance Warning*

04


General

Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a functionthat informs the driver about the time intervalto vehicles in front.

Distance Warning is active at speeds above30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving infront of the car, in the same direction. No dis-tance information is provided for oncoming,slow or stationary vehicles.

Orange warning lamp1.

An orange warning lamp in the windscreen illu-minates with a constant glow if the distance tothe vehicle in front is shorter than the set timeinterval.

NOTE

Distance warning is deactivated during thetime the adaptive cruise control is active.

WARNING

Distance warning only reacts if the distanceto the vehicle ahead is shorter than the pre-set value - the speed of the driver's vehicleis not affected.

Operation

Press the button in the centre console to switchthe function on or off. The function is switchedon if one lamp is illuminated in the button.

Some combinations of the selected equipmentleave no vacant space for a button in the centreconsole - in which case the function is handledby the car's menu system MY CAR underSettings Car settings Warning

distance. For a description of the menu sys-tem - see page 198.

Set time interval

Controls and display for time interval.

Time interval - Increase/decrease. Pressup to increase, down to decrease.



1 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.2 The display shows either "dash" symbol [2] or [3] - they are never shown simultaneously.

04 Driver support

Distance Warning*

04


Different time intervals to thevehicle in front can beselected and shown in thedisplay as 1-5 horizontal lines- the more lines the longer thetime interval. One line corre-sponds to

approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front,5 lines approximately 3 seconds.

The number of lines for theselected time interval isshown during the setting itselfand for several seconds after-wards. Then a smaller scaleversion of the symbol isshown to the right of the dis-

play. The same symbol is also shown whenadaptive cruise control is activated.

NOTE

The higher the speed, the longer the calcu-lated distance in metres for a specific timeinterval.

The set time interval is also used by theadaptive cruise control function, seepage 152.

Only use the time interval that is allowed inaccordance with local traffic regulations.

Limitations

The function uses the same radar sensor asadaptive cruise control and the collision warn-ing system. For more information on the radarsensor and its limitations, see page 156.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia-tions in light intensity, as well as wearingsunglasses, could mean that the warninglight in the windscreen cannot be seen.

Poor weather or winding roads could affectthe radar sensor's capacity to detect vehi-cles in front.

The size of other vehicles could also affectdetection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. Thiscould mean that the warning lamp illumi-nates at a shorter distance than the settingor that the warning is temporarily absent.

Extremely high speeds can also cause thelamp to illuminate at a shorter distance thanthat set due to limitations in sensor range.

04 Driver support

Distance Warning*

04




Set time interval, during adjustment.

Set time interval, after adjustment.

Radar blocked See manual Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event of heavy rain or if slushhas collected in front of the radar sensor.


Collision warn. Service

required

Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

04 Driver support

City Safety™

04


General

City Safety™ is a function for helping the driverto avoid a collision when driving in queues,amongst other things, when changes in thetraffic ahead, combined with a lapse in atten-tion, could lead to an incident.

The function is active at speedsunder50 km/h and it helps the driver by auto-matically braking the car in the event of immi-nent risk of collision with vehicles in front,should the driver not react in time by brakingand/or steering away.

City Safety™ is activated in situations wherethe driver should have started braking earlier,which is why it cannot help the driver in everysituation.

City Safety™ is designed to be activated aslate as possible in order to avoid unnecessaryintervention.

City Safety™ must not be used as an excusefor the driver to change his/her driving style. Ifthe driver solely relies on City Safety™ to dothe braking, there will be a collision sooner orlater.

The driver or passengers normally only noticeCity Safety™ if a situation arises where the caris extremely close to being in a collision.

If the car is also equipped with a CollisionWarning function with Auto Brake*, these twosystems complement each other. For moreinformation on Collision Warning function withAuto Brake, see page 169.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance and replacement of CitySafety™ components must only be per-formed by a workshop - an authorised Volvoworkshop is recommended.

WARNING

City Safety™ does not engage in all drivingsituations or traffic, weather or road condi-tions.

City Safety™ does not react to vehiclesdriving in a different direction from the car,to small vehicles, motorcycles and bicyclesor to humans and animals.

City Safety™ can prevent collision at aspeed difference of less than 15 km/h - at ahigher speed difference, it is only possibleto reduce collision speed. In order to obtainfull brake function, the driver must depressthe brake pedal.

Never wait for City Safety™ to engage. Thedriver always bears responsibility for main-taining the proper distance and speed.

Function

Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window1.

City Safety™ detects the traffic in front of thecar with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge ofthe windscreen. If there is an imminent risk ofcollision, City Safety™ will automatically brakethe car, which may be experienced as suddenbraking.

If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h in relationto the vehicle in front then City Safety™ cancompletely prevent a collision.

City Safety™ activates a short, sharp brakingand stops the car in normal circumstances, justbehind the vehicle in front. For most drivers thisis well outside normal driving style and may beexperienced as being uncomfortable.

1 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

04 Driver support

City Safety™

04

165

If the difference in speed between the vehiclesis greater than 15 km/h then City Safety™ maynot prevent the collision on its own. To obtainfull brake force, the driver must depress thebrake pedal. This could then make it possibleto prevent a collision, even at speed differen-ces above 15 km/h.

When the function is activated and brakes, theinstrument panel display shows a message tothe effect that the function is/has been active.

NOTE

The brake lights come on when CitySafety™ brakes the car.

Operation

NOTE

The City Safety™ function is always ena-bled after the engine has been started viakey position I and II (see page 76 on keypositions).

On and Off

In certain situations, it may advisable to disableCity Safety™, e.g. where leafy branches couldsweep over the bonnet and/or windscreen.

After starting the engine City Safety™ can bedeactivated as follows:

• Using MY CAR on the centre console dis-play screen with its menu system, searchand locate Settings Car settings

Driver support systems City Safety.Select the Off option. For more informationon the menu system MY CAR, seepage 198.

However, the function will be enabled thenext time the engine is started, regardlessof whether the system was enabled or dis-abled when the engine was switched off.

WARNING

The laser sensor also transmits laser lightwhen City Safety™ is disabled manually.

To enable City Safety™ again:

• Follow the same procedure as for disa-bling, but select the On option.

Limitations

The sensor in City Safety™ is designed todetect cars and other large vehicles in front ofthe car irrespective of whether it is day or night.

However, the sensor has limitations and haspoorer functionality - or none at all - in e.g.heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, dust stormsor snow flurries. Mist, dirt, ice or snow on thewindscreen may disrupt the function.

Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant forprojecting load, or accessories such as auxili-ary lamps and bull bars that are higher than thebonnet limit the function.

The laser light from the sensor in CitySafety™ measures how the light is reflected.The sensor cannot detect objects with lowreflection capacity. The rear sections of thevehicle generally reflect the light sufficientlythanks to the number plate and rear light reflec-tors.

On slippery road surfaces the braking distanceis extended, which may reduce the capacity ofCity Safety™ to avoid a collision. In such sit-uations the ABS and DSTC systems will pro-vide best possible braking force with main-tained stability.

When your own car is reversing, City Safety™is temporarily deactivated.

City Safety™ is not activated at low speeds -under 4 km/h, which is why the system doesnot intervene in situations where a vehicle infront is being approached very slowly, e.g.when parking.

Driver commands are always prioritised, whichis why City Safety™ does not intervene in sit-uations where the driver is steering or acceler-ating in a clear manner, even if a collision isunavoidable.

04 Driver support

City Safety™

04

166

When City Safety™ has prevented a collisionwith a stationary object the car remains sta-tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the caris braked for a vehicle in front that is moving,then speed is reduced to the same speed asthat maintained by the vehicle in front.

On a car with manual gearbox the engine stopswhen City Safety™ has stopped the car, unlessthe driver manages to depress the clutch pedalbeforehand.

NOTE

• Keep the windscreen surface in front ofthe laser sensor free from ice, snow anddirt (see the illustration for sensor loca-tion, page 164).

• Do not affix or mount anything on thewindscreen in front of the laser sensor

• Remove ice and snow from the bonnet- snow and ice must not exceed a heightof 5 cm.


If the message Windscreen Sensors

blocked is shown on the instrument panel dis-play, it indicates that the laser sensor isblocked and cannot detect vehicles in front ofthe car. This means that City Safety™ is notoperational.

The Windscreen Sensors blocked messageis not shown for all situations in which the lasersensor is blocked. The driver must therefore bediligent about keeping the windscreen andarea in front of the laser sensor clean.

The following table presents possible causesfor the message being shown, along with sug-gestions for appropriate action.

Cause Action

The windscreen sur-face in front of thelaser sensor is dirtyor covered with iceor snow.

Clean the wind-screen surface infront of the sensorfrom dirt, ice andsnow.

The laser sensorfield of vision isblocked.

Remove the block-ing object.

IMPORTANT

If there are cracks, scratches or stone chipsin the windscreen in front of either of thelaser sensor's "windows" and they cover asurface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm (or larger),then a workshop must be contacted forrepair or replacement of the windscreen(see the illustration for sensor location, page164) - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-ommended.

Failure to take action may result in reducedperformance for City Safety™.

To avoid the risk of reducing City Safety™performance the following also applies:

• Before replacing a windscreen, contactan authorised Volvo workshop to verifythat the correct windscreen is orderedand fitted. Using the wrong windscreenmay result in the City Safety functionfailing to operate or operating incor-rectly.

• The same type or Volvo-approvedwindscreen wipers must be fitted duringreplacement.

04 Driver support

City Safety™

04

167

Laser sensor

The City Safety™ function includes a sensorwhich transmits laser light. Contact a qualifiedworkshop in the event of a fault or if the lasersensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvoworkshop is recommended.

WARNING

Never look into the laser sensor (whichemits spreading invisible laser radiation) ata distance of 100 mm or closer with magni-fying optics such as a magnifying glass,microscope, lens or similar optical instru-ments - this would involve a risk of eye injury(the illustration on page 164 shows sensorlocation).

For more information on the laser sensor, seepage 9.


In conjunction with automatic braking by theCity Safety™ system, one or more symbolsmay illuminate on the instrument panel and amessage may appear on its display.

A text message can be acknowledged bybriefly pressing the OK button on the directionindicator stalk.

04 Driver support

City Safety™

04

168


Auto braking by City Safety City Safety™ is braking or has automatically braked.

Windscreen Sensors

blocked

The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.

• Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.

Read about the limitations of the laser sensor, see page 165.

City Safety Service

required

City Safety™ is not operational.


04 Driver support

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*

04


General

"Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes-trian Detection" is an aid to assist the driverwhen there is a risk of colliding with a pedes-trian or vehicle in front that is stationary ormoving in the same direction.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & PedestrianDetection is activated in situations where thedriver should have started braking earlier,which is why it cannot help the driver in everysituation.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & PedestrianDetection is designed to be activated as late aspossible in order to avoid unnecessary inter-vention.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & PedestrianDetection may prevent a collision or reduce thecollision speed.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & PedestrianDetection must not be used as an excuse forthe driver to change his/her driving style. If thedriver solely relies on Collision Warning withAuto Brake to do the braking, there will be acollision sooner or later.

Two system levels

Depending on how the car equipped, the Col-lision Warning with Auto Brake & PedestrianDetection function may appear in two variants:Level 1 and Level 2.

Level 1

The driver is merely warned of occurring obsta-cles by means of visual and acoustic signals -no automatic braking intervenes, the drivermust himself brake.

Level 2

The driver is warned of occurring obstacles bymeans of visual and acoustic signals - the caris braked automatically if the driver himselfdoes not act within a reasonable time.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance of components included inCollision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes-trian Detection must only be carried out in aworkshop - an authorised Volvo workshopis recommended.

Function

Function overview1.

Audio-visual warning signal in the event ofa collision risk.

Radar sensor2

Camera sensor

Collision Warning with Auto Brake executesthree steps in the following order:

1. Collision warning

2. Brake support2

3. Auto Brake2

1 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.2 With system Level 2 only.

04 Driver support


04


The collision warning system and CitySafety™ complement each other. For moreinformation on City Safety™, see page 164.

1 - Collision warning

The driver is first warned of a potentially immi-nent collision.

The collision warning system detects pedes-trians, stationary vehicles as well as vehiclesdriving in the same direction in front of the car.

If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian ora vehicle, the driver's attention is attracted witha flashing red warning signal (no. [1] in the illus-tration on page 169) and an acoustic signal.

2 - Brake support2

If the risk of collision has increased further afterthe collision warning then the brake support isactivated.

This means that the brake system is preparedfor rapid braking by applying the brakes lightly,which may feel like a slight jolt.

If the brake pedal is depressed sufficientlyquickly then full brake function is implemented.

Brake support also reinforces the driver's brak-ing if the system considers that the braking isnot sufficient to avoid a collision.

3 - Auto Brake2

The automatic brake function is activated last.

If in this situation the driver has not yet startedto take evasive action and the risk of collisionis imminent then the automatic braking func-tion is deployed - this takes place irrespectiveof whether or not the driver brakes. Brakingthen takes place with full brake force in orderto reduce collision speed, or with limited brakeforce if it is sufficient to avoid a collision.

WARNING

The collision warning system does notengage in all driving situations or traffic,weather or road conditions. The collisionwarning system does not react to vehiclesdriving in another direction to the car or toanimals.

Warning only activated in the event of a highrisk for collision. This section "Function"and the section "Limitations" inform aboutlimitations that the driver must be aware ofbefore using the Collision Warning systemwith Auto Brake.

Warnings and brake interventions forpedestrians are switched off at vehiclespeeds exceeding 80 km/h.

Warnings and brake interventions forpedestrians do not work in darkness andtunnels - not even when streetlights are lit.

The auto-brake function can prevent a col-lision or reduce collision speed. To ensurefull brake performance, the driver shouldalways depress the brake pedal - even whenthe car auto-brakes.

Never wait for a collision warning. The driveris always responsible that the correct dis-tance and speed are maintained - evenwhen the collision warning system withauto-brake is used.

2 With system Level 2 only.

04 Driver support


04


Detection of pedestrians

Optimal examples of what the system regards aspedestrians with clear body contours.

Optimal performance of the system requiresthat the system function that detects pedes-trians receives as unambiguous information aspossible about the contours of the body - thisimplies the opportunity to identify the head,arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower bodycombined with a normal human pattern ofmovement.

If large parts of the body are not visible to thecamera then the system cannot detect apedestrian.

• In order for a pedestrian to be detected he/she must appear full-length and have aheight of at least 80 cm.

• The system cannot detect a pedestriancarrying larger items.

• The camera sensor's ability to see pedes-trians at dusk and dawn is limited - just likethe human eye.

• The camera sensor's capacity to detectpedestrians is deactivated when driving indarkness and tunnels - even when street-lights are lit.

WARNING

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes-trian Detection is an assistance tool.

This function cannot detect all pedestriansin all situations and it cannot see e.g. parti-ally obscured pedestrians, people in cloth-ing that hides the contours of the body orpedestrians shorter than 80 cm.

• The driver is always responsible that thevehicle is driven properly and with asafety distance adapted to the speed.

Operation

Settings are made from MY CAR via the centreconsole display screen and menu system. Forinformation on how the menu system is used,see page 198.

NOTE

The Brake Support and Auto Brake func-tions are always enabled - they cannot bedeactivated.

On and Off

To select whether the collision warning systemshould be switched on or off:

• Use the menu system MY CAR via thecentre console display to search forSettings Car settings Driver

support systems Collision Warning -there, select On or Off.

An activated function is tested every time theengine is started by briefly illuminating the sep-arate lights for the warning lamp (no. [1] in theillustration on page 169).

When starting the engine, the setting that wasselected when the engine was switched off isobtained automatically.

04 Driver support


04


Activating/deactivating warning signals

The warning lamp (no. [1] in the illustration onpage 169) is activated automatically when theengine is started if Collision Warning is ena-bled.

The warning sound can be activated/deacti-vated separately:

• Select On or Off in the menu system MY

CAR under Settings Car settings

Driver support systems Collision

Warning Warning sound.

Set warning distance

The warning distance regulates the distance atwhich the visual and acoustic warnings aredeployed.

• Select one of the options from Long,Normal or Short in the menu system MY

CAR under Settings Car settings

Driver support systems Collision

Warning Warning distance.

The warning distance determines the system'ssensitivity. Warning distance Long provides anearlier warning. First test with Long and if thissetting produces too many warnings, whichcould be perceived as irritating in certain sit-

uations, then change to warning distanceNormal.

Only use warning distance Short in excep-tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.

NOTE

When the adaptive cruise control is in usethe warning lamp and warning sound will beused by the cruise control even if the colli-sion warning system is switched off.

The collision warning system warns thedriver in the event of a risk of a collision, butthe function cannot shorten driver reactiontime.

In order for the collision warning system tobe effective, always drive with the DistanceAlert set at time interval 4 – 5. seepage 161.

NOTE

Even if the warning distance has been set toLong warnings could be perceived as beinglate in certain situations, e.g. when there arelarge differences in speed or if vehicles infront brake heavily.

WARNING

No automatic system can guarantee100 % correct function in all situations.Therefore, never test the Auto Brake systemby driving at people or vehicles - this maycause severe damage and injury and risklives.

Checking settings

The settings required can be controlled on thecentre console display screen. Search with themenu system MY CAR under Settings Car

settings Driver support systems

Collision Warning, see page 198.

Maintenance

Camera and radar sensor3.


04 Driver support


04


For the sensors to work correctly, they must bekept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleanedregularly with water and car shampoo.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors willreduce their function and may preventmeasurement.

Limitations

Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Pedes-trian Detection is active from approx. 4 km/h.

The visual warning signal (no. [1] in the illustra-tion on page 169) may be difficult to notice inthe event of strong sunlight, reflections, whensunglasses are being worn or if the driver is notlooking straight ahead. The warning soundshould therefore always be activated.

On slippery road surfaces the braking distanceis extended, which may reduce the capacity toavoid a collision. In such situations the ABSand DSTC systems will provide best possiblebraking force with maintained stability.

NOTE

The visual warning signal can be temporarilydisengaged in the event of high passengercompartment temperature caused bystrong sunlight for example. If this occursthen the warning sound is activated even ifit is deactivated in the menu system.

• Warnings may not appear if the dis-tance to the vehicle in front is small or ifsteering wheel and pedal movementsare large, e.g. a very active driving style.

WARNING

Warnings and brake interventions could beimplemented late or not at all if the trafficsituation or external influences mean thatthe radar or camera sensor cannot detect apedestrian or a vehicle in front correctly.

The sensor system has a limited range forpedestrians and the system therefore pro-vides effective warnings and brake inter-ventions at vehicle speeds up to 50 km/h.For stationary or slow-moving vehicles,warnings and brake interventions are effec-tive at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h.

Warnings for stationary or slow-movingvehicles could be disengaged due to dark-ness or poor visibility.

Warnings and brake interventions forpedestrians are switched off at vehiclespeeds exceeding 80 km/h.

The collision warning system uses the sameradar sensors as adaptive cruise control. Formore information on the radar sensor and itslimitations, see page 174.

If warnings are perceived as being too frequentor disturbing then the warning distance can bereduced. This then leads to the system provid-ing a warning at a later stage, which reducesthe total number of warnings; see the section"Set warning distance" on page 172.

04 Driver support


04


Collision Warning with Auto Brake is tempo-rarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti-vated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which iswhy the system does not intervene in situationswhere the car is approaching a vehicle in frontvery slowly, e.g. when parking.

In situations where the driver demonstratesactive, aware driving behaviour, a collisionwarning may be postponed slightly in order tokeep unnecessary warnings to a minimum.

When Auto Brake has prevented a collisionwith a stationary object the car remains sta-tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the caris braked for a vehicle in front that is moving,then speed is reduced to the same speed asthat maintained by the vehicle in front.

On a car with manual gearbox the engine stopswhen Auto Brake has stopped the car, unlessthe driver manages to depress the clutch pedalbeforehand.

Camera sensor limitations

The car’s camera sensor is also used - as wellas by Collision Warning with Auto Brake - bythe functions:

• Automatic main/dipped beam dimming -see page 85

• Road sign information - see page 144

• Driver Alert Control – see page 178

• Lane Departure Warning – see page 181.

NOTE

Keep the windscreen surface in front of thecamera sensor clean from ice, snow, mistand dirt.

Do not attach or fit anything to the wind-screen in front of the camera sensor, as thiscould reduce or prevent the function of oneor more camera-dependent systems.

The camera sensors have limitations similar tothe human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in dark-ness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog forexample. Under such conditions the functionsof camera-dependent systems could be sig-nificantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.

Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car-riageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirtyroad surfaces or unclear lane markings couldalso significantly reduce camera sensor func-tion when it is used to scan the carriagewayand detect pedestrians and other vehicles.

The field of vision of the camera sensor is lim-ited, which is why pedestrians and vehiclescannot be detected in some situations, or theyare detected later than anticipated.

During very high temperatures the camera istemporarily switched off for about 15 minutes

after the engine is started in order to protectcamera functionality.


If the display shows the message Windscreen

Sensors blocked then this means that thecamera sensor is blocked and cannot detectpedestrians, vehicles or road markings in frontof the car.

At the same time, this means that - besidesCollision Warning with Auto Brake - the Auto-matic main/dipped beam dimming, Road signinformation, Driver Alert Control and LaneDeparture Warning functions will not have fullfunctionality either.

The following table presents possible causesfor a message being shown along with theappropriate action.

04 Driver support


04

��


Cause Action

The windscreen sur-face in front of thecamera is dirty orcovered with ice orsnow.

Clean the wind-screen surface infront of the camerafrom dirt, ice andsnow.

Thick fog, heavy rainor snow means thatthe camera does notwork sufficientlywell.

No action. At timesthe camera does notwork during heavyrain or snowfall.

Cause Action

The windscreen sur-face in front of thecamera has beencleaned but themessage remains.

Wait. It may takeseveral minutes forthe camera to meas-ure the visibility.

Cause Action

Dirt has appearedbetween the insideof the windscreenand the camera.

Visit a workshop tohave the windscreeninside the cameracover cleaned - anauthorised Volvoworkshop is recom-mended.



Collis'n

warning

OFF

Collision warning system switched off.

Shown when the engine is started.

The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.

Collision

warn.

Unavaila-

ble

The collision warning system cannot be activated.

Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.

The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.

Auto brak-

ing was

activated

Auto Brake has been active.

The message clears after one press of the OK button.

04 Driver support


04



Wind-

screen

Sensors

blocked

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

• Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 174.

Radar

blocked

See man-

ual

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush hascollected in front of the radar sensor.


Collision

warn.

Service

required

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.


04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

04


General information on Driver AlertSystem

The Driver Alert System is intended to assistdrivers whose driving ability is deteriorating orwho are inadvertently leaving the lane they aredriving on.

The Driver Alert System consists of differentfunctions which can either be switched on atthe same time or individually:

• Driver Alert Control – DAC, see page 178.

• Lane Departure Warning – LDW, seepage 181.

A switched-on function is set in standby modeand is not activated automatically until speedexceeds 65 km/h.

The function is deactivated again when speeddecreases to below 60 km/h.

Both functions use a camera which is depend-ent on the lane having side markings paintedon each side.

WARNING

The Driver Alert System does not work in allsituations but is instead only intended to beof supplementary assistance.

The driver always has ultimate responsibilitythat the car is driven safely.

04 Driver support

Driver Alert System - DAC*

04


General information on DAC

The DAC (Driver Alert Control) function isintended to attract the driver's attention whenhe/she starts to drive less consistently, e.g. ifhe/she becomes distracted or starts to fallasleep.

A camera detects the side markings painted onthe carriageway and compares the section ofthe road with the driver's steering wheel move-ments. The driver is alerted if the vehicle doesnot follow the carriageway evenly.

NOTE

The camera sensor has certain limitations,see page 174.

The objective for DAC is to detect slowly dete-riorating driving ability and it is primarilyintended for major roads. The function is notintended for city traffic.

In some cases driving ability is not affecteddespite driver fatigue. In which case there maynot be any warning issued for the driver. Forthis reason it is always important to stop andtake a break in the event of any signs of driverfatigue, irrespective of whether or not DACissues a warning.

NOTE

The function must not be used to extend adriving stint. Always plan breaks at regularintervals and ensure that you are fullyrested.

Limitation

In some cases the system may issue a warningdespite driving ability not deteriorating, forexample:

• if the driver tests the LDW function.

• in strong side winds.

• on rutted road surfaces.

Operation

Some settings are made from the centre con-sole display screen and its menu system. Forinformation on how the menu system is used,see page 198.

The current status of Driver Alert can bechecked on the trip computer display with thethumbwheel on the left-hand stalk switch.

Thumbwheel. Turn until the display showsDriver

Alert . On the second row the optionsDriver Alert Standby <65 km/h, Driver

Alert

Unavailable or level mark can beshown.

OK confirms or clears a warning in thememory.

04 Driver support


04


On/Off

To set Driver Alert in standby mode:

• Search on the centre console's displayscreen with its MY CAR menu system andlocate Car settings Driver support

systems Driver Alert and tick the box.

• No tick in the box: Function disengaged.

Function

Driver Alert is activated when speedexceeds 65 km/h and remains activeas long as the speed is over60 km/h.

The display shows a level mark with 1-5 bars,where a low number of bars indicates incon-sistent driving style. Many bars indicates stabledriving.

If the vehicle is driven inconsistently then thedriver is alerted by an acoustic signal as well asthe text message Driver Alert Time for a

break. The warning is repeated after a time ifdriving ability does not improve.

WARNING

An alarm should be taken very seriously, asa sleepy driver is often not aware of his/herown condition.

In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tired-ness; stop the car in a safe manner as soonas possible and rest.

Studies have shown that it is equally as dan-gerous to drive while tired as it is under theinfluence of alcohol.



Driver Alert OFF The function is disengaged.

Driver Alert Standby <65

km/h

The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.

Driver Alert Unavailable The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 174.

Driver Alert The function analyses the driver's driving style.

The number of bars can vary in the range 1-5, where a low number of bars indicates inconsistentdriving ability. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.

04 Driver support


04



Driver Alert Time for a

break

The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.

Windscreen Sensors

blocked





Driver Alert Sys Service

required

The system is disengaged.


04 Driver support

Driver Alert System - LDW*

04

��


General information on - LDW

The LDW (Lane Departure Warning) function isintended to reduce the risk of so-called single-vehicle accidents – accidents where, in certainsituations, the vehicle leaves the carriagewayand is in danger of driving either into a ditch orinto oncoming traffic.

LDW consists of a camera that detects the sidemarkings painted on the carriageway. Thedriver is alerted by an acoustic signal if thevehicle crosses a side marking.

Operation and function

The function is switched on or off by means ofa switch on the centre console. An indicatorlamp in the button illuminates when the func-tion is switched on.

The trip computer display shows Lane Depart

Warn Standby <65 km/h when the function isin standby mode due to speed being below 65km/h.

The LDW function is activated automaticallyfrom standby mode after the camera has scan-ned in the carriageway's side markings andspeed exceeds 65 km/h. The trip computerdisplay then shows Lane Depart Warn

Available.

If the camera can no longer detect the carria-geway's side markings the display showsLane Depart Warn Unavailable.

If speed decreases to below 60 km/h then thefunction resumes standby mode and the dis-play shows Lane Depart Warn Standby <65

km/h.

If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand sidemarking of the carriageway without due causethen the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal.

No warning is given in the following situations:

• Direction indicators activated

• The driver has his/her foot on the brakepedal1

• In the event of the accelerator pedal beingdepressed rapidly1

• In the event of rapid steering wheel move-ments1

• In the event of a sudden turn so that the carrolls.

The camera sensor also has certain limitations.For more information, see page 174.

1 A warning is still given when Increased sensitivity is selected, see page 183.

04 Driver support


04


NOTE

The driver is only warned once each time thewheels cross a line. So there is no acousticalarm when there is a line between the car'swheels.



Lane departure warning

ON/Lane departure warn-

ing OFF

The function is switched on/off.

Shown at switch-on/off.

The text disappears after 5 seconds.

Lane Depart Warn Standby

<65 km/h

The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.

Lane Depart Warn Unavail-

able

The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 174.

Lane Depart Warn Availa-

ble

The function scans the carriageway's side markings.

04 Driver support


04



Windscreen Sensors

blocked





Driver Alert Sys Service

required

The system is disengaged.


Personal preferences

Settings are made from the centre console'sdisplay screen via the menu system in MY

CAR. From there, search and locate Settings

Car settings Driver support systems

Lane Departure Warning. For informationon how the menu system is used - seepage 198.

Select from the options:

• On at start-up - The function entersstandby mode every time the engine is

started. Otherwise the same value as whenthe engine was switched off is obtained.

• Increased sensitivity - The sensitivityincreases, an alarm is triggered earlier andfewer limitations apply.

04 Driver support

Park assist syst*

04


General

Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.An acoustic signal as well as symbols on thecentre console's display screen indicate thedistance to the detected obstacle.

Parking assistance sound level can beadjusted during the ongoing acoustic signalusing the centre console's VOL knob or in thecar's menu system MY CAR - see page 198.

Parking assistance is available in two variants:

• Rear only

• Both front and rear.

NOTE

When a towbar is configured with the car'selectrical system, the protrusion of the tow-bar is included when the function measuresthe parking space.

WARNING

• Parking assistance does not relinquishthe driver's own responsibility duringparking.

• The sensors have blind spots whereobstacles cannot be detected.

• Be aware of e.g. people or animals nearthe car.

Function

The system is automatically activated when theengine is started - the switch's On/Off lamp isilluminated. If parking assistance is switchedoff with the button, the lamp goes out.

Display screen view - showing an obstacle leftfront and right rear.

The centre console's display screen shows anoverview of the relationship between the carand detected obstacle.

Marked sectors show which of the four sen-sor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to thecar symbol a selected sector box is, the shorterthe distance between the car and a detectedobstacle.

The frequency of the signal increases theshorter the distance to an obstacle, in front ofor behind the car. Other sound from the audiosystem is muted automatically.

When the distance is within 30 cm the tone isconstant and the active sensor's field nearestthe car is filled in. If the detected obstacle iswithin the distance for the constant tone both

04 Driver support

Park assist syst*

04


behind and in front of the car, then the tonesounds alternately from the loudspeakers.

IMPORTANT

Certain objects e.g. chains, thin glossypoles or low barriers may be in the "signalshadow" and are then temporarily notdetected by the sensors - the pulsating tonemay then unexpectedly stop instead ofchanging over to the expected constanttone.

• In which case, pay extra attention andmanoeuvre/reposition the car particu-larly slowly or stop the current parkingmanoeuvre - there may be a high risk ofdamage to vehicles or other objectssince the sensors are unable to functionoptimally.

Rear parking assistance

The distance covered to the rear of the car isabout 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal forobstacles behind comes from one of the rearloudspeakers.

Rear parking assistance is activated whenreverse gear is engaged.

The system must be deactivated when revers-ing with a trailer or bike carrier on the towbaror similar - otherwise they would trigger thesensors.

NOTE

Rear parking assistance is deactivatedautomatically when towing a trailer if Volvogenuine trailer wiring is used.

Front parking assistance

The distance covered in front of the car is about0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles infront comes from one of the front loudspeak-ers.

Front parking assistance is active up to15 km/h. The lamp in the button is illuminatedin order to indicate that the system is activated.When the speed is below 10 km/h the systemis reactivated.

NOTE

Front parking assistance is deactivatedwhen the parking brake is applied or P modeis selected in a car with an automatic gear-box.

04 Driver support

Park assist syst*

04


IMPORTANT

When fitting auxiliary lamps: Remember thatthey must not obscure the sensors – theauxiliary lamps could then be detected asobstacles.

Fault indicator

If the information symbol illuminateswith constant glow and the informa-

tion display shows Park assist syst Service

required then parking assistance is disen-gaged.

IMPORTANT

In certain conditions the parking assistancesystem may produce incorrect warning sig-nals that are caused by external audiosources that emit the same ultrasonic fre-quencies that the system works with.

Examples of such sources include horns,wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes andexhaust noises from motorcycles etc.

Cleaning the sensors

Sensor location, front.

Sensor location, rear.

The sensors must be cleaned regularly toensure that they work properly. Clean themwith water and car shampoo.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors maycause incorrect warning signals.

04 Driver support

Park assist camera*

04


General

The parking camera is an assist system and isactivated when reverse gear is engaged (canbe changed in the settings menu, seepage 198).

The camera image is shown on the centre con-sole's screen.

NOTE

When a towbar is configured with the car'selectrical system, the protrusion of the tow-bar is included when the function measuresthe parking space.

WARNING

• The parking camera serves as an aid. Itdoes not relieve the driver of responsi-bility when reversing.

• The camera has blind spots, whereobstacles cannot be detected.

• Be aware of people and animals in thevicinity of the car.

Function and operation

CAM button location.

The camera shows what is behind the car andif something appears from the sides.

The camera shows a wide area behind the carand part of the bumper and any towbar.

Objects on the screen may appear to tilt slightly- this is normal.

NOTE

Objects on the display screen may be closerto the car than they appear to be on thescreen.

If another view is active the parking camerasystem takes over automatically and the cam-era image is displayed on the screen.

When reverse gear is engaged two unbrokenlines are shown graphically which illustratewhere the car's rear wheels will roll with thecurrent steering wheel angle, this facilitatestight parking, reversing into tight spaces andfor hitching a trailer. The car’s approximateexternal dimensions are illustrated by means oftwo dashed lines. These help lines can beswitched off in the settings menu.

If the car is also equipped with parking assis-tance sensors* then their information is dis-played graphically as coloured fields in order toillustrate the distance to detected obstacles,see page 184.

The camera is active approx. 5 seconds afterreverse gear has been disengaged or until thecar's speed exceeds 10 km/h.

Camera location next to the opening handle.

04 Driver support

Park assist camera*

04


Light conditions

The camera image is adjusted automaticallyaccording to prevailing light conditions.Because of this, the image may vary slightly inbrightness and quality. Poor light conditionscan result in a slightly reduced image quality.

NOTE

Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow andice to ensure optimum function. This is par-ticularly important in poor light.

Park assist lines

Examples of how the park assist lines can be dis-played for the driver.

The lines on the screen are projected as if theywere at ground level behind the car and aredirectly related to steering wheel movement,

which shows the driver the path the car willtake, even when turning.

NOTE

• When reversing with a trailer which isnot connected electrically to the car, thelines on the display show the route thecar will take - not the trailer.

• The screen shows no lines when a traileris connected electrically to the car'selectrical system.

• The parking camera is deactivatedautomatically when towing a trailer if aVolvo genuine trailer cable is used.

IMPORTANT

Bear in mind that the screen only shows thearea behind the car - pay attention to thesides and front of the car when manoeuvringduring reversing.

Boundary lines

The system's lines.

Boundary line, 30 cm zone backwardsfrom the car

Boundary line, free reversing zone

"Wheel tracks"

The unbroken line (1) frames in a zone that iswithin about 30 cm from the bumper.

The dashed line (2) frames in a zone up toabout 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is alsothe limit of the car's most protruding parts,such as door mirrors and corners - also duringturning.

The wide "wheel tracks" (3) between the sidelines indicate where the wheels will roll and canextend about 3.2 m back from the bumper if noobstacle is in the way.

04 Driver support

Park assist camera*

04


Cars with reversing sensors*

Coloured areas (x 4, one per sensor) show dis-tance.

If the car is also equipped with parking assis-tance sensors (see page 184) the distance indi-cation will be more precise and the colouredareas show which of the 4 sensors is/are reg-istering an obstacle.

The colour of the areas changes with decreas-ing distance to the obstacle - from yellow toorange to red.

Colour / paint Distance(metres)

Yellow 1.5–

Orange 0.3–1.5

Red 0–0.3

Settings

Press OK/MENU when a camera view isshown. Make the settings as desired.

Miscellaneous

• The default setting is that the camera isactivated when reverse gear is engaged.

• One press on CAM activates the cameraeven if reverse gear is not engaged.

• Change between normal and zoomedimage by turning TUNE or by pressingCAM.

• If the car has more cameras* installed thenthe camera in use is changed by turningTUNE.

Limitations

NOTE

A bike carrier or other accessory mountedon the rear of the car could obscure thecamera's view.

Pay attention to the possibility that, even if itonly looks like a relatively small part of theimage is obscured, it could be a relatively largesector that is hidden from view. Obstaclescould thereby go undetected until they are veryclose to the car.

To bear in mind

• Keep the camera lens free from dirt, iceand snow.

• Clean the camera lens regularly with luke-warm water and car shampoo - take carenot to scratch the lens.

04 Driver support

BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System

04


General information on BLIS

G02

1426

Rearview mirror with BLIS function1.

BLIS camera

Indicator lamp

BLIS symbol

BLIS is an information system based on cam-era technology that under certain conditionscan help the driver to notice vehicles moving inthe same direction as the host vehicle in the so-called "blind spot".

WARNING

The system is a supplement to, not areplacement for, a safe driving style and useof the rearview mirrors. It can never replacethe driver's attention and responsibility. Theresponsibility for changing lanes safelyalways rests with the driver.

The system is designed to work most effec-tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lanehighways.

When a camera (1) has detected a vehicleinside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2)illuminates with a constant glow.

NOTE

The lamp illuminates on the side of the carwhere the system has detected the vehicle.If the car is overtaken on both sides at thesame time then both lamps illuminate.

BLIS advises the driver with a message if a faultarises in the system. If for example the sys-tem's cameras are obscured then the BLISindicator lamp flashes and a message is shownon the information display. In such cases,check and clean the lenses.

If necessary, the system can be switched offtemporarily, see the section "Activate/deacti-vate".

Blind spots

A = approx. 9.5 m and B = approx. 3.0 m.


04 Driver support


04


Activate/deactivate

Button for activating/deactivating.

BLIS is activated when the engine is started.The indicator lamps in the door panels flashthree times when BLIS is activated.

The system can be deactivated/activated afterstarting the engine with one press on theBLIS button.

Some combinations of the selected equipmentleave no vacant space for a button in the centreconsole - in which case the function is handledby the car's menu system MY CAR underSettings Car settings BLIS. (For adescription of the menu system - seepage 198).

When BLIS is deactivated, the lamp in the but-ton goes out and a message is shown in theinstrument panel display.

When BLIS is activated the light in the buttonilluminates, a new text message is shown onthe display and the indicator lamps in the doorpanels flash 3 times. Press the OK button todelete the text message. (For a description ofmessages - see page 196).

When BLIS operates

The system operates when the car is driven ata speed above 10 km/h.

Overtaking

The system is designed to react if:

• you overtake another vehicle at a speed ofup to 10 km/h faster than the other vehicle

• you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling upto 70 km/h faster than you are travelling.

WARNING

BLIS does not work in sharp bends.

BLIS does not work when the car is revers-ing.

A wide trailer coupled to the car can concealother vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre-vent the vehicle in the screened area frombeing detected by BLIS.

Daylight and darkness

In daylight the system reacts to the shape ofthe surrounding vehicles. The system isdesigned to detect motor vehicles such ascars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.

In darkness the system reacts to the head-lamps of surrounding vehicles. If the head-lamps of surrounding vehicles are not switchedon then the system does not detect the vehi-cles. This means for example that the systemdoes not react to a trailer without headlampswhich is towed behind a car or truck.

WARNING

The system does not react to cyclists ormoped riders.

The BLIS cameras have limitations similar tothose of the human eye, i.e. they do not"see" as well e.g. in heavy snowfall, againststrong light or in thick fog.

04 Driver support


04


Cleaning

In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam-era lenses must be clean. The lenses can becleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.Clean the lenses carefully so that they are notscratched.

IMPORTANT

The lenses are electrically heated to melt iceor snow. If necessary, brush snow awayfrom the lenses.

Messages on the display


Blind-spot info

system ON

The BLIS system isactivated.

Blind spot syst.

Service required

Blind spot syst. dis-engaged - contact aworkshop.

Blind spot syst.

Camera blocked

The BLIS camera isblocked by dirt,snow or ice - cleanthe lenses.


Blind spot syst.

Reduced function

Reduced function inthe data transmis-sion between theBLIS system's cam-era and the car'selectrical system.

The camera resetsitself when the datatransmissionbetween the BLISsystem's cameraand the car's electri-cal system returns tonormal.

Blind-spot info

system OFF

The BLIS system isdeactivated.

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS system componentsmust only be performed by a workshop - anauthorised Volvo workshop is recom-mended.

Limitations

In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp mayilluminate despite there being no other vehiclewithin the blind spot.

NOTE

If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso-lated occasions despite there being noother vehicle within the blind spot then thisdoes not mean that a fault has arisen in thesystem.

In the event of a fault in the BLIS system thedisplay shows the text Blind spot syst.Service required.

The following illustrations show examples ofsituations where the BLIS indicator lamp mayilluminate even if there is no other vehicle withinthe blind spot.

Reflection from shiny wet road surface.

04 Driver support


04


Own shadow on large light smooth surface, e.g.noise barrier or concrete road surface.

Low stationary sunlight shining into the camera.


Menus and messages........................................................................... 196Menu source MY CAR.......................................................................... 198Climate control...................................................................................... 206Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* 216Additional heater*.................................................................................. 219Trip computer........................................................................................ 220Adapting driving characteristics........................................................... 222Comfort inside the passenger compartment........................................ 223

COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE


Menus and messages

05


Combined instrument panel

Information display and controls for menus.

OK – access to message list and messageconfirmation.

Thumbwheel – browse between menuoptions.

RESET – reset the active function. Used incertain cases to select/activate a function,see the explanation under each respectivefunction.

The menus shown on the information displaysin the combined instrument panel are con-trolled with the left-hand stalk switch. Themenus shown depend on key position, seepage 76. If a message appears then this must

be acknowledged with OK for the menus to beshown.

Menu overview

Some of the following menu options require thefunction and hardware to be installed in the car.

---- km to empty tank

--.- l/100km average

--.- l/100km instantaneous

--- km/h average speed

--- km/h current speed1

Engine oil level Wait...*

Tyre pressure Calibration*

Park heat timer --:-- ---*2

Direct start Park heat ON*3

Additional heat auto ON*

Lane Depart Warn *

Driver Alert *

Message

Text message in the information display.

When a warning, information or indicator sym-bol illuminates, a corresponding messageappears on the information display. An errormessage is stored in a memory list until thefault has been rectified.

Press OK to acknowledge and browsebetween the messages.

1 Only certain markets.2 Programming is only possible when the engine is switched off.3 Cannot be selected when the additional heater is operating.


Menus and messages

05

197

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you areusing the trip computer, the message mustbe read (press OK) before the previousactivity can be resumed.


Stop safelyA Stop and switch off theengine. Serious risk ofdamage - consult aworkshopB.

Stop engineA Stop and switch off theengine. Serious risk ofdamage - consult aworkshopB.

Service urgentA Contact a workshopB tocheck the car immedi-ately.

Service

requiredAContact a workshopB tocheck the car as soonas possible.

See manualA Read the owner's man-ual.

Book time for

maintenance

Time to book regularservice - contact aworkshopB.


Time for regular

maintenance

Time for regular service- contact a workshopB.The timing is deter-mined by the number ofkilometres driven, num-ber of months since thelast service, engine run-ning time and oil grade.

Maintenance

overdue

If the service intervalsare not followed thenthe warranty does notcover any damagedparts - contact a work-shopB.

Transmission

oil Change nee-

ded

Contact a workshopB tocheck the car as soonas possible.

Transmission

performance

low

The gearbox cannothandle full capacity.Drive carefully until themessage clearsC.

If shown repeatedly -contact a workshopB.


Transmission

hot Reduce

speed

Drive more smoothly orstop the car in a safemanner. Disengage thegear and run the engineat idling speed until themessage clearsC.

Transmission

hot Stop safely

Critical fault. Stop thecar immediately in asafe manner and con-tact a workshopB.

Temporarily

OFFAA function has beentemporarily switchedoff and is reset auto-matically while drivingor after starting again.

Low battery

Power save

mode

The audio system isswitched off to saveenergy. Charge the bat-tery.

A Part of message, shown together with information on wherethe problem has arisen.

B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.C For more messages concerning automatic transmission, see

page 121.


Menu source MY CAR

05

198

General information on MY CAR

Many of the car's functions are handledin this menu source, such as setting theclock, door mirrors and locks.

Navigation in the menus is carried out usingbuttons on the centre console or with the steer-ing wheel's right-hand keypad.

Certain functions are standard, others areoptional - the range also varies depending onthe market.

Operation

Centre console controls

Centre console controls for menu navigation.

Press MY CAR to open the menus underMY CAR.

Press OK MENU to select/tick in the high-lighted menu option or to store theselected function in the memory.

Turn the TUNE knob to scroll up/downamong the menu options.

EXIT

EXIT functions

Depending on the function the cursor is onwhen EXIT is pressed, and on the menu level,one of the following occurs:

• phone call is rejected

• current function is interrupted

• input characters are deleted

• most recent selections are undone

• leads up in the menu system

Short and long presses can also produce vary-ing results.

A long press leads to the highest menu level(Main source view), from where all of the car'sfunctions/menu sources can be accessed -see also page 232.


Menu source MY CAR

05

��


Steering wheel keypad*

The keypad may vary depending on market.

Turn the thumbwheel knob to scroll up/down among the menu options.

Press the thumbwheel to select/tick in thehighlighted menu option or to store theselected function in the memory.

EXIT (see heading "EXIT functions" page198).

Search paths

Current menu level is shown at the top right ofthe centre console display screen. Searchpaths to the menu system functions are descri-bed in this manual in the following form:

Settings Car settings Lock settings

Doors unlock Driver door, then all.

The following is an example of how a functioncan be accessed and adjusted using the steer-ing wheel keypad:

1. Press the centre console button MY CAR.

2. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Settings,with the thumbwheel (1) and then press thethumbwheel - a submenu opens.

3. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Car

settings and press the thumbwheel - asubmenu opens.

4. Scroll to Lock settings and press thethumbwheel - a new submenu opens.

5. Scroll to Doors unlock and press thethumbwheel - a submenu of selectablefunctions opens.

6. Choose between the options All doors

and Driver door, then all and press thethumbwheel - a cross is marked in theoption's empty box.

7. Exit the programming by backing out of themenus incrementally with short presses onEXIT (2) or with one long press.

The procedure is the same as with the centreconsole's buttons - see page 198: OK MENU

(2), EXIT (4) and the TUNE knob (3).

MY CAR

The following options are available in menusource MY CAR:

• My S60

• DRIVe*

• Support systems

• Settings


Menu source MY CAR

05


My S60

MY CAR My S60

The display screen shows a grouping of all ofthe car's driver support systems - these can beactivated or deactivated here.

My DRIVe*

Parts of Volvo's DRIVe concept are describedhere, amongst other things.

• Start/Stop

• Eco driving guide

For more information - see page 123.

Driver support system

MY CAR Support systems

The display screen shows a summary of thecurrent status of the car's driver support sys-tems.

Setup - menus

The menus are structured as follows:

Menu level 1

Menu level 2

Menu level 3

Menu level 4

p. x

Shown here are the 4 first menu levels underMY CAR Settings. Some menus have fur-ther submenus - these are then described indetail in their respective sections.

When selecting whether a function should beactivated/On or deactivated/Off a square isdisplayed:

On: Selected square.

Off: Empty square.

• Select On/Off with OK - then back out ofthe menu with EXIT.

Car settings

Car key memory

On

Off

p. 79and100


Menu source MY CAR

05

��

201

Lock settings

Automatic door locking

On

Off

Doors unlock

All doors

Driver door, thenall

Keyless entry

All doors

Any door

Doors on sameside

Both front doors

p. 44,53 and57

Reduced Guard

Activate once

Ask when exiting

p. 59and 63

Side mirror settings

Fold mirrors

Tilt left mirror

Tilt right mirror

p. 100

Light settings

Door lock confirmationlight

On

Off

Unlock confirmation light

On

Off

p. 42


Off

30 sec

60 sec

90 sec

p. 44and 91

Home safe light duration

30 sec

60 sec

90 sec

p. 90

Triple indicator

On

Off

p. 89

Temporary LH traffic

On

Off

or

Temporary RH traffic

On

Off

p. 91

Active bending lights

On

Off

p. 87

Auxiliary lights

On

Off

p. 88


Menu source MY CAR

05


Tyre pressure system*

Warns if tyre pressure istoo low

Calibrate tyre pressure

p. 313

Steering wheel force

Low

Medium

High

p. 222

Reset car settings

All menus in Car settings aregiven original factory settings.

Driver support systems

Collision Warning

On

Off

Warning distance

Long

Normal

Short

Warning sound

On

Off

p. 169

Lane Departure Warning

On

Off

On at start-up

On

Off

Increased sensitivity

On

Off

p. 181

DSTC

On

Off

p. 142

City Safety

On

Off

p. 9and164

BLIS

On

Off

p. 190

Distance Alert

On

Off

p. 161

Driver Alert

On

Off

p. 178

System options

Time

The instrument panel clock is sethere.

p. 73


Menu source MY CAR

05

��

203

Time format

12 h

24 h

p. 73

Screen saver

On

Off

The TV screen's current contentfades out after a period of inac-tivity and is replaced by a blankscreen if this option is selected.

The current screen contentreturns if any of the TV screen'sbuttons or controls are actuated.

p. 198

Language

Selects language for menu texts.

Show help text

On

Off

Explanatory text for the displayscreen's current content is shownwith this option selected.

Distance and fuel units

MPG (UK)

MPG (US)

km/l

l/100km

p. 220

Temperature unit

Celsius

Fahrenheit

Selects the unit for the display ofoutside temperature and settingof the climate control system.

Volume levels

Voice output volume

Front park assist volume

Rear park assist volume

Phone ringing volume

Reset system options

All menus in System options aregiven original factory settings.

Voice settings

Voice tutorial

This menu option + OK providesspoken information about howthe system works.


Menu source MY CAR

05


Voice command list

Phone commands

Phone

Phone call con-tact

Phone dial num-ber

Navigation commands

Navigation

Navigationrepeat instruc-tion

Navigation go toaddress

General commands

Help

Cancel

Voice tutorial

The menu options under Phone

commands show several exam-ples of available voice commands- only with a Bluetooth -enabledmobile phone installed. For more

and detailed information - seepage 258.

The menu options under Naviga-

tion commands show severalexamples of available voice com-mands - only with Volvo's navi-gation system RTI* installed.

Voice user setting

Default setting

User 1

User 2

Here there is the option to createa second user profile - an advant-age if more than one person shalluse the car/system regularly.Default setting gives factory set-tings.

Voice training

User 1

User 2

With Voice training the voicerecognition system is taught torecognise the driver's voice andpronunciation. A number of phra-ses are presented on the screenfor the driver to read aloud. Whenthe system has learnt how thedriver talks, the presentation ofthe phrases stops. Followingwhich e.g. User 1 can beselected in Voice user setting inorder that the system shall listento the right user.

Voice output volume

A volume control appears on thescreen - at which point, proceedas follows:

1. Adjust the volume with thethumbwheel.

2. Test-listen using OK.3. Use EXIT to store the setting

and the menu is switched off.


Menu source MY CAR

05


Voice POI list

Edit list

The number of facilities is exten-sive and varies depending onmarket. Maximum 30 favouritefacilities can be stored in this list.

Menu option Voice POI list isonly shown if Volvo's navigationsystem RTI* is installed. For moreinformation on Facilities andVoice recognition - see the Navi-gation system's owner's manual.

Audio settings p. 231

Climate settings

Automatic blower adjustment

Normal

High

Low

Recirculation timer

On

Off

Automatic rear defroster

On

Off

Interior air quality system

On

Off

Reset climate settings

All menus in Climate settings

are given original factory settings.

p. 206

Favourites (FAV) p. 235

Volvo On Call

Described in a separate manual.

Information

Number of keys p. 42

VIN number p. 362

DivX® VOD code p. 251

Bluetooth software version in

car

p. 257

Map and software version*

Only in cars with Volvo GPS nav-igator - see separate manual.


Climate control

05


General

Climate control

The car is equipped with electronic climatecontrol. The climate control system cools orheats as well as dehumidifies the air in the pas-senger compartment.

NOTE

The air conditioning system (AC) can beswitched off, but to ensure the best possibleclimate comfort in the passenger compart-ment and to prevent the windows from mist-ing, it should always be on.

Actual temperature

The temperature you select corresponds to thephysical experience with reference to factorssuch as air speed, humidity and solar radiationetc. in and around the car.

The system includes a sun sensor whichdetects on which side the sun is shining intothe passenger compartment. This means1 thatthe temperature can differ between the rightand left-hand air vents despite the controlsbeing set for the same temperature on bothsides.

Sensor location

• The sun sensor is located on the top sideof the dashboard.

• The temperature sensor for the passengercompartment is located below the climatecontrol panel.

• The outside temperature sensor is locatedon the door mirror.

• The humidity sensor* is located by the inte-rior rearview mirror.

NOTE

Do not cover or block the sensors withclothing or other objects.

Side windows and sunroof*

To ensure that the air conditioning works opti-mally, the side windows, and sunroof* if speci-fied, should be closed.

Misting windows

Remove misting on the insides of the windowsby primarily using the defroster function.

To reduce the risk of misting, keep the win-dows clean and use window cleaner.

Vents in the parcel shelf

NOTE

To avoid misting on the rear window, do notblock the ventilation holes at the back of theparcel shelf with articles of clothing or otherobjects.

Temporary shut-off of the air

conditioning

When the engine requires full power, e.g. for fullacceleration or driving uphill with a trailer, theair conditioning can be temporarily switchedoff. There may then be a temporary increase intemperature in the passenger compartment.

Condensation

In warm weather, condensation from the airconditioning may drip under the car. This isnormal.

Ice and snow

Remove ice and snow from the climate controlsystem air intake (the grille between the bonnetand the windscreen).

Total airing function

The function opens/closes all side windowssimultaneously and can be used for example to

1 Only applies to ECC.


Climate control

05


quickly air the car during hot weather, seepage 56.

Passenger compartment filter

All air entering the car's passenger compart-ment is cleaned with a filter. This must bereplaced at regular intervals. Follow the VolvoService Programme for the recommendedreplacement intervals. If the car is used in aseverely contaminated environment, it may benecessary to replace the filter more often.

NOTE

There are different types of passenger com-partment filter. Make sure that the correctfilter is fitted.

Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*

This option keeps the passenger compartmentclear of allergy and asthma inducing sub-stances. For more information on CZIP, see thebrochure included with the purchase of the car.

The following is included:

• An enhanced fan function that means thatthe fan starts when the car is opened withthe remote control key. The fan fills thepassenger compartment with fresh air. Thefunction starts when required and is dis-engaged automatically after a time or whenone of the passenger compartment doorsis opened. The amount of time the fan runs

is reduced gradually due to reduced needup until the car is 4 years old.

• The air quality system IAQS is a fully auto-matic system that cleans the air in the pas-senger compartment from contaminantssuch as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrousoxides and ground-level ozone.

NOTE

To keep the CZIP standard in cars with CZIPthe IAQS filter must be changed after15 000 km or once per year depending onwhichever occurs first. However, up to75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without CZIPand where the customer does not want tokeep the CZIP standard the IAQS filter mustbe changed at a regular service.

Use of tested materials in the interior

equipment.

The materials have been developed in order tominimise the quantity of dust in the passengercompartment and they contribute to makingthe passenger compartment easier to keepclean. The carpets in both the passenger com-partment and the cargo area are removableand easy to remove and clean. Use cleaningagents and car care products recommendedby Volvo, see page 356.

Menu settings

It is possible to activate/deactivate or changethe default settings for four of the climate con-trol system's functions via the centre console.For general information about menu naviga-tion, see page 199:

• Fan speed in automatic mode*, seepage 212.

• Recirculation timer for passenger com-partment air, see page 213.

• Automatic rear window defrosting, seepage 101.

• Air quality system IAQS*, see page 213

The climate control system's functions can bereset to the default settings via the menu sys-tem in MY CAR and this is carried out under:Settings Climate settings Reset

climate settings.


Climate control

05


Air distribution

The incoming air is divided between a numberof different vents in the passenger compart-ment.

Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO

mode*.

If necessary it can be controlled manually, seepage 214.

Air vents in the dashboard

Open

Closed

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the outer vents at the side windows toremove misting.

Air vents in the door pillars

Closed

Open

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the vents at the windows to remove mist-ing in cold weather.

Aim the vents into the passenger compartmentto maintain a comfortable climate in the rearseat in hot weather.

NOTE

Remember that small children may be sen-sitive to air flows and draughts.


Climate control

05

��


Electronic climate control, ECC*

Temperature control, left-hand side

Electrically heated front seat, left-handside

Max. defroster

Fan

Air distribution - ventilation floor

Air distribution - air vent instrument panel

Air distribution - defroster windscreen

Rear window and door mirror defrosters,see page 101

Electrically heated front seat, right-handside

Temperature control, right-hand side

Recirculation

AUTO

AC – – Air conditioning on/off


Climate control

05

210

Electronic Temperature Control, ETC

Fan

Electrically heated front seat, left-handside

AC – – Air conditioning on/off

Max. defroster




Rear window and door mirror defrosters,see page 101

Recirculation

Electrically heated front seat, right-handside

Temperature control


Climate control

05


Operating the controls

Heated seats*

Front seats

Current heat level is shown in the centre consoleTV screen.

One press on the button givesthe highest heat level - threeorange lamps illuminate in thecentre console TV screen (seefigure above).

Press the button twice for alower heat level – two orange lamps illuminatein the TV screen.

Press the button three times for the lowest heatlevel – one orange lamp illuminates in the TVscreen.

Press the button four times to switch off theheat – no lamps illuminate.

WARNING

The heated seat should not be used by peo-ple who find it difficult to perceive tempera-ture increase because of sensory loss or forany reason have difficulty in managing touse the control of the heated seat. Other-wise, burn injuries may arise.

Rear seat

Press the button once for the highest heat level– three lamps illuminate.

Press the button twice for a lower heat level –two lamps illuminate.

Press the button three times for the lowest heatlevel – one lamp illuminates.

Press the button four times to switch off theheat – no lamps illuminate.

Fan

NOTE

If the fan is fully switched off then the airconditioning is not engaged - which cancause a risk of misting on the windows.

Fan knob for ECC*

Turn the knob to increase ordecrease fan speed. If AUTO

is selected then fan speed isregulated automatically. Thepreviously set fan speed isdisengaged.

Fan knob for ETC

Turn the knob to increase ordecrease fan speed.


Climate control

05


Air distribution




The figure consists of three buttons. Whenpressing the buttons the corresponding figureis illuminated in the TV screen (see figurebelow) and an arrow in front of each part of thefigure shows the air distribution that isselected. For more information on air distribu-tion, see page 214.

The selected air distribution is shown in the centreconsole TV screen.

AUTO1

The Auto function automati-cally regulates temperature,air conditioning, fan speed,recirculation, and air distribu-tion.

If you select one or more manual functions, theother functions continue to be controlled auto-matically. All manual settings are disengagedwhen AUTO is pressed. The TV screen showsAUTO CLIMATE.

Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in themenu system MY CAR under: Settings

Climate settings Automatic blower

adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal

or High:

• Low - Automatic fan control. Low airflowis prioritised.

• Normal - Automatic fan control.

• High - Automatic fan control. A moreintense airflow is prioritised.


Temperature control

The temperature can beadjusted with the knob. ForECC* the temperature for thedriver's side and the passen-ger side can be set sepa-rately.

When the car is started, the most recent settingis resumed.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be hastened byselecting a higher/lower temperature thanthe actual temperature required.

1 Only applies to ECC.


Climate control

05


AC – Air conditioning on/off

When the lamp in the AC but-ton illuminates, the air condi-tioning is controlled by thesystem's automatic function.This way, incoming air iscooled and dehumidified.

When the lamp in the AC button is switched offthe air conditioning is disconnected. Otherfunctions are still controlled automatically.When the max. defroster function is activatedthe air conditioning is switched on automati-cally, so that the air is dehumidified at the maxi-mum setting.

Max. defroster

Used to quickly remove mist-ing and ice from the wind-screen and side windows. Airflowing to the windows. Thelight in the defroster buttonilluminates when the functionis active.

The following also takes place in order to pro-vide maximum dehumidification in the passen-ger compartment:

• the air conditioning is automaticallyengaged

• recirculation and the air quality system areautomatically disengaged.

NOTE

The noise level increases as the fan is oper-ating at max.

When the defroster is switched off the climatecontrol returns to the previous settings.

Recirculation

Recirculation

When recirculation isengaged the orange lamp inthe button illuminates. Thefunction is selected to shutout bad air, exhaust gasesetc. from the passenger com-partment. The air in the pas-

senger compartment is recirculated, i.e. nooutside air is taken into the car when this func-tion is activated.

IMPORTANT

If the air in the car recirculates for too long,there is a risk of misting on the insides of thewindows.

Timer

With the timer function activated the systemwill exit manually activated recirculation modeaccording to a time that depends on the out-

side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice,misting and bad air. Activate/deactivate thefunction in the menu system MY CAR underSettings Climate settings

Recirculation timer. For a description of themenu system, see page 199.

NOTE

When max. defroster is selected, recircula-tion is always deactivated.

Air quality system IAQS*

The air quality system separates gases andparticles to reduce the levels of odours andpollution in the passenger compartment. If theoutside air is contaminated then the air intakeis closed and the air is recirculated.

Activate/deactivate the function in the menusystem MY CAR under Settings Climate

settings Interior air quality system. For adescription of the menu system, seepage 199.


Climate control

05


NOTE

The air quality sensor should always beengaged in order to obtain the best air in thepassenger compartment.

Recirculation is limited in cold weather toavoid misting.

If the insides of the windows start mistingup, disengage the air quality sensor, and thedefroster functions for the windscreen, theside and the rear windows should also beused to demist the windows.

Cars with Eco Start/Stop DRIVe*

With an auto-stopped engine certain equip-ment has its function temporarily reduced, e.g.climate control fan speed. For more informa-tion, see page 123.

Air distribution table

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use

Air to windows. Some airflows from the air vents.The air is not recirculated.Air conditioning is alwaysengaged.

to remove ice and mistingquickly.

Air to the floor and win-dows. Some air flowsfrom the dashboard airvents.

to ensure comfortableconditions and gooddemisting in cold orhumid weather.

Air to windscreen, viadefroster vent, and sidewindows. Some air flowsfrom the air vents.

to prevent misting andicing in a cold and humidclimate, (not at too lowfan speed to enable this).

Air to floor and fromdashboard air vents.

in sunny weather withcool outside tempera-tures.


Climate control

05

215

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use

Airflow to windows andfrom dashboard air vents.

to ensure good comfort inwarm, dry weather.

Air to floor. Some airflows to the dashboardair vents and windows.

to direct heat or cold tothe floor.

Airflow to the head andchest from the dashboardair vents.

to ensure efficient coolingin warm weather.

Airflow to windows,from dashboard airvents and to the floor.

to provide cooler airalong the floor or warmerair higher up in coldweather or hot, dryweather.


Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

05


Fuel-driven heater

General information about the parking

heater

The parking heater heats the engine and pas-senger compartment and can be starteddirectly or with the timer.

Two different times can be selected using thetimer. Here, time refers to the time when the caris heated and ready. The car's electronic sys-tem calculates when heating should be startedbased on the outside temperature.

The heater cannot start if the outside tempera-ture exceeds 15 °C. At –5 °C or lower themaximum running time of the parking heater is50 minutes.

WARNING

The car must be outdoors when the parkingheater is used.

NOTE

When the parking heater is active there maybe smoke from the right-hand wheel hous-ing, which is perfectly normal.

Refuelling

Warning label on fuel filler flap.

WARNING

Fuel which spills out can be ignited. Switchoff the fuel-driven heater before starting torefuel.

Check the information display to see thatthe parking heater is switched off. When itis running, the information display showsPark heat ON.

Parking on a hill

If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front ofthe car should point downhill to ensure thatthere is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.

Battery and fuel

If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuellevel is too low, the parking heater will beswitched off automatically and a messageappears on the information display. Acknowl-edge the message by pressing the indicatorstalk OK button once, see page 217.

IMPORTANT

Repeated use of the parking heater com-bined with short journeys may discharge thebattery and impair starting.

The car should be driven for the same timeas the heater is used to ensure that the car'sbattery is recharged adequately to replacethe energy consumed by the heater when itis used on a regular basis.



05


Operation

OK button

Thumbwheel

RESET - resets/selects

For more information on the information dis-play and OK, see page 196.

Symbols and display messages

When one of the timer's settings orDirect start is activated, the infor-

mation symbol in the combined instrumentpanel illuminates while the information displayshows an explanatory text and a further illumi-nated symbol. The table shows symbols anddisplay texts that appear.

NOTE

G025102 - Figure 2 in the symbol means the

second climate control system in the car,where the normal climate control system isthe first. The figure 2 has nothing to do withTIMER 1 or TIMER 2.

Sym-bol

Display Specification

G025102

Fuel

heater

ON

The heater isswitched on andrunning.

G025102

Timer is

set for

Fuel

heater

The heater's timeris activated afterthe remote controlkey has beenremoved from theignition switch andleaving the car -the engine andpassenger com-partment areheated at the settime.

Sym-bol

Display Specification

G025102

Heater

stopped

Batt. save

mode

The heater hasbeen stopped bythe car's electron-ics in order to facil-itate starting theengine.

G025102

Heater

unavail.

Low fuel

level

Setting the heateris not possible dueto fuel level beingtoo low(approx. 7 litres) -this is in order tofacilitate startingthe engine as wellas approx. 50 kmdriving.

G025102

Park

heater

Service

required

Heater not work-ing. Contact aworkshop forrepair. Volvo rec-ommends that youcontact an author-ised Volvo work-shop.



05


A display text clears automatically after a timeor after one press on the indicator stalk OK

button.

Direct start and immediate stop

1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Direct start

Park heat.

2. Press RESET to select between ON andOFF.

ON: Parking heater switched on manually orwith programmed timer.

OFF: Parking heater switched off.

Following the direct start of the heater it will beactivated for 50 minutes.

Heating of the passenger compartment willbegin as soon as the engine coolant hasreached the correct temperature.

NOTE

The car can be started and driven while theparking heater is running.

Setting the timer

The time when the car shall be used and heatedis specified with the timer.

Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2.

NOTE

The timer can only be programmed whenthe remote control key is in key position I,see page 76 - programming must thereforebe carried out before starting the engine.

1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Park heat

timer 1.

2. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-ing hours setting.

3. Select the required hour using the thumb-wheel.

4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-ing minutes setting.

5. Select the required minute using thethumbwheel.

6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.

7. Press RESET to activate the timer.

After setting Park heat timer 1 a second starttime can be programmed with Park heat timer

2 by scrolling to it with the thumbwheel.

Set the alternative time in the same way asPark heat timer 1.

Deactivating a timer-started heater

A timer-started heater can be switched offmanually before the set time has elapsed. Pro-ceed as follows:

1. Press OK.

2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the textPark heat timer 1 or 2.> The text ON flashes on the display.

3. Press RESET.> The text OFF is shown with a constant

glow and the heater is switched OFF.

A timer-started heater can be switched off inaccordance with the instructions in the section"Direct start and immediate stop", seepage 218.

Clock/timer

The heater's time is connected to the car'sclock.

NOTE

All timer programming will be cleared if thecar's clock is reset.


Additional heater*

05


General information about theadditional heater

In cold climate zones1 an additional heater maybe required to obtain the correct operatingtemperature in the engine and to obtain suffi-cient heating in the passenger compartment.

Fuel-driven additional heater

A fuel-driven additional heater is fitted in carswith diesel engines.

The heater starts automatically when extraheat is required when the engine is running.

The heater is switched off automatically whenthe correct temperature is reached or when theengine is switched off.

NOTE

When the additional heater is active theremay be smoke from the right-hand wheelhousing which is perfectly normal.

Auto mode or shutdown

The additional heater's automatic startsequence can be switched off if required.

OK button

Thumbwheel

RESET button

1. Before starting the engine: Select key posi-tion I, see page 76.

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional

heat auto.

3. Press RESET to select between ON andOFF.

NOTE

The menu options are only visible in keyposition I - any adjustments must thereforebe made before starting the engine.

Passenger compartment heater*

If the additional heater is supplemented withtimer function then it can be used as a fuel-driven passenger compartment heater, seepage 216.

Electric additional heater

Cars with certain petrol engines2 have an elec-tric additional heater integrated into the car'sclimate control system.

In a semi-cold1 climate zone diesel-driven carshave an electric additional heater instead of afuel-driven version.

The heater cannot be controlled manually butis instead activated automatically after theengine has been started in outside tempera-tures below 14 °C and is switched off after theset passenger compartment temperature hasbeen reached.

1 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned.2 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the engines concerned.


Trip computer

05


General

Information display and controls.

OK - confirms.

Thumbwheel – browse between menusand options in the trip computer list.

RESET – resets.

The trip computer's menu is in a variable loop.One of the menu options is a blank display - italso marks the beginning/end of the loop.

Functions

NOTE

If a warning message appears when the tripcomputer is used then the message mustfirst be acknowledged before the trip com-puter can be reactivated. Acknowledge thewarning message by pressing OK.

To change unit for distance and speed - go toMY CAR Settings System options

Distance and fuel units, see page 198.

Average speed

Average speed is calculated from the lastresetting. Reset using RESET.

Instantaneous

Current fuel consumption is calculated everysecond. The information on the display isupdated every couple of seconds. When thecar is stationary, "----" appears on the display.

Average

Average fuel consumption is calculated fromthe last resetting. Reset using RESET.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading ifa fuel-driven supplementary and/or parkingheater* has been used.

Km to empty tank

The calculation is based on the average fuelconsumption over the last 30 km and theremaining driveable fuel quantity. The displayshows the approximate distance that can bedriven with the fuel quantity remaining in thetank.

An economic driving style generally results in alonger driving distance. For more informationon how fuel consumption can be influenced,see page 11.

No guaranteed range remains when the displayshows "---- km to empty tank". Refuel assoon as possible.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading ifthe driving style has been changed.

Resetting

1. Select --- km/h average speed or --.- l/100km average.


Trip computer

05


2. Press and hold RESET forapprox. 1 second to reset the selectedfunction. If RESET is kept depressed for atleast 3 three seconds then Average speedand Average are reset simultaneously.

Current speed*1

The instrument panel display changes to showcurrent speed in mph (miles per hour) if thespeedometer is graduated in km/h. If thespeedometer is graduated in mph then the dis-play changes to km/h.

1 Only certain markets.


Adapting driving characteristics

05


Active chassis - Four-C*

Active chassis, Four-C (Continously ControlledChassis Concept), regulates the characteris-tics of the shock absorbers so that the car'sdriving characteristics can be adjusted. Thereare three settings: Comfort, Sport andAdvanced.

Comfort

This setting means that the car is perceived asbeing more comfortable on rough and unevenroad surfaces. Shock absorption is soft and themovement of the body is smooth and gentle.

Sport

This setting means that the car is perceived asbeing more sporty and is recommended formore active driving. Steering response is fasterthan in the Comfort mode. Shock absorption isharder and the body follows the road in orderto reduce rolling during cornering.

Advanced

This setting is only recommended on very evenand smooth road surfaces.

The shock absorbers are optimised for maxi-mum roadholding and rolling in bends is furtherminimised.

Operation

Chassis settings.

Use the buttons in the centre console tochange setting. The setting in use when theengine is switched off is activated next time theengine is started.

Speed related power steering*

Steering force increases with the speed of thecar to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. Thesteering is firmer and more immediate onmotorways. Steering is light and requires noextra effort when parking and at low speed.

The driver can choose between three differentlevels of steering force for road responsivenessor steering sensitivity. Go to the menu systemMY CAR and locate Settings Car settings

Steering wheel force and select Low,Medium or High.

For a description of the menu system, seepage 198. This menu cannot be accessedwhile the car is in motion.


Comfort inside the passenger compartment

05

��

223

Storage spaces



05


Storage compartment in door panel

Storage pocket* on front edge of front seatcushions

Ticket clip

Glovebox

Storage compartment

Jacket holder

Storage compartment, cup holder

Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat

Storage pocket

Jacket holder

The jacket holder is only designed for lightclothing.

WARNING

Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,cameras, remote controls for accessories,etc. in the glove compartment or other com-partments. Otherwise they may injure peo-ple in the car in the event of sudden brakingor a collision.

Tunnel console

Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) andUSB*/AUX input under the armrest.

Includes cup holder for driver and passen-ger. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter arespecified then there is a cigarette lighter inthe 12 V socket for the front seat, seepage 225, and a detachable ashtray in thecup holder.)

Cigarette lighter and ashtray*

The ashtray in the tunnel console is detachedby lifting the tray straight up.

Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pullout the lighter and light a cigarette on theheated coils.

Glovebox

The owner's manual and maps can be kepthere for example. There are also holders forpens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox canbe locked using the key blade, see pages 46and 57.

Inlay mats*

Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlaymats.

WARNING

Before setting off check that the inlaid matin the driver area is firmly affixed andsecured in the pins in order to avoid gettingcaught adjacent to and under the pedals.



05

225

Vanity mirror

Vanity mirror with lighting.

The light illuminates automatically when thecover is lifted.

12 V socket

12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.

12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.

The electrical socket can be used for variousaccessories designed for 12 V, e.g. TV screens,music players and mobile phones. For the

socket to supply current, the remote controlkey must be in at least key position I, seepage 76.

WARNING

Always leave the plug in the socket whenthe socket is not in use.

NOTE

Optional equipment and accessories - e.g.TV screens, music players and mobilephones - which are connected to one of thepassenger compartment's 12V electricalsockets, could be activated by the climatecontrol system, even when the remote con-trol key has been removed or when the caris locked, for example, when the parkingheater is activated at a preset time.

For this reason remove the plugs from theelectrical sockets for optional equipment oraccessories when not in use because thebattery could be drained in the event of suchan occurrence!



05


IMPORTANT

Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket isused at a time. If both sockets in the tunnelconsole are used simultaneously, 7.5 A (90W) per socket is applicable.

If the compressor for emergency puncturerepair is connected to one of the two sock-ets, no other current consumer must beconnected to the other one.

NOTE

The compressor for temporary emergencypuncture repair has been tested andapproved by Volvo. For information on theuse of Volvo's recommended temporaryemergency puncture repair (TMK), seepage 315.

Electrical socket in cargo area*

For more information, see page 290.


05

227


General information on infotainment..................................................... 230Radio..................................................................................................... 241Media player......................................................................................... 248External audio source via AUX/USB* input........................................... 252

Media Bluetooth * ................................................................................ 255

Bluetooth handsfree*.......................................................................... 258Voice recognition* mobile phone.......................................................... 267TV*......................................................................................................... 271Remote control* ................................................................................... 275

INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM


General information on infotainment

06


General

The infotainment system consists of radio,media player, TV* and the facility to communi-cate with mobile phone*. Information is pre-sented on a 5 or 7-inch* colour screen in theupper section of the centre console. Functionscan be controlled via buttons in the steeringwheel, in the centre console under the colourscreen or via a remote control*. A mobile phonecan also be controlled with voice recognition incertain cases.

If the Infotainment System is active when theengine is switched off then it is automaticallyactivated the next time the key is inserted intokey position I or higher, and it continues withthe same source (e.g. radio) as before theengine was switched off (the driver's door mustbe closed on cars with Keyless systems*).

The infotainment system can be used for 15minutes at a time without the remote controlkey being in the ignition switch by pressing theOn/Off button.

When the car is being started the infotainmentsystem is switched off temporarily and contin-ues when the engine has started.

NOTE

Remove the remote control key from theignition switch if the infotainment system isused when the engine is switched off. Thisis to avoid discharging the battery unnec-essarily.

Dolby, Pro Logic

Made under license from Dolby Laboratories.Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol aretrademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Audyssey MultEQ1

The Audyssey MultEQ system has been usedin the development and tuning of the sound toensure a world-class sound experience.

1 Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.



06

��


Overview

AUX2 and USB3 inputs for external audiosources (e.g. iPod )

Steering wheel keypad (with*/withoutthumbwheel).

TV screen. The TV screen is available intwo sizes: 5 and 7-inch. The manual showsa 7-inch TV screen.

Centre console control panel

Operating the system

Steering wheel keypad as alternative to controls inthe centre console.

SOUND - press for access to audio settings(bass, treble, etc.). For more information, seepage 236.

VOL – turn to raise or lower the volume.

ON/OFF/MUTE - short press starts thesystem and long press (until the screen is off)switches off. Note that the whole of the Sensussystem (including navigation * and phone func-tions*) starts/switches off at the same time.Briefly press to mute the sound (MUTE) orrestore the sound if it had been switched off.

Main sources - press to select the mainsource (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA). Last activesource is shown (e.g. FM1). If you are inMEDIA or TEL and press the main source but-ton then a shortcut menu is shown with com-monly used menu options.

OK/MENU - Press to accept options inmenus. Leads to menu view in selected source(e.g. RADIO or MEDIA). Arrow to the right ofthe screen is shown when there are underlyingmenus.

TUNE - turn to scroll among disc tracks/folders, radio and TV* stations, phone con-tacts* or navigate through options on the TVscreen.

2 Only applies to Performance3 Does not apply to Performance



06


EXIT - short press leads upwards in themenu system, interrupts current function, inter-rupts/rejects phone calls or erases enteredcharacters. Long press leads to normal view,or if you are in normal view to the highest menulevel, see Main source view page 232.

INFO - If more information than can beshown on the screen is available, press theINFO button to see the remaining information.

Preset buttons, input of numbers and let-ters.

FAV – shortcut to a favourite setting. Thebutton can be programmed for a commonlyused function in AM, FM, etc. For more infor-mation, see page 235.


The steering wheel keypad can be used as analternative to the buttons in the centre console.

The keypad is available in three different ver-sions depending on the options and the equip-ment level of the car.

Keypad with thumbwheel*

Short presses scroll between disc tracksor preset radio stations4. A long press

fast-winds disc tracks or searches for thenext available radio station.

Volume - press to raise or lower the audiovolume.

EXIT - short press leads upwards in themenu system, interrupts current function,interrupts/rejects phone calls or erasesentered characters. Long press leads tonormal view, or if you are in normal view tothe highest menu level, see Main sourceview page 232.

OK/MENU/TUNE - Press to acceptoptions in menus. Leads to the menu viewin the selected source (e.g. RADIO orMEDIA). Arrow to the right of the screen isshown when there are underlying menus.Turn to scroll among disc tracks/folders,radio and TV* stations, phone contacts* ornavigate through options on the TV screen.

Without voice recognition5 - press toswitch off the radio/media audio (MUTE) orrestore the audio if it has been switched off.With voice recognition6 - Voice recogni-tion (for Bluetooth -connected mobilephone and navigation system*).

Main source view

A long press on EXIT on the steering wheelkeypad* leads to normal view. If you are in nor-mal view and give a long press on EXIT then itis possible to access the same main sourcebuttons that are in the centre console:

NAV - Volvo's navigation system(RTI)*, is described in a separateowner's manual.

RADIO - AM, FM, DAB*

4 Does not apply to DAB.5 Applies to cars without navigation.6 Only cars with navigation.



06

��


MEDIA - CD, DVD, AUX, USB*,Bluetooth *, TV*.

TEL – Bluetooth handsfree*

MY CAR - Car settings, seepage 198.

CAM - Park Assist Camera*, seepage 187

Keypad without thumbwheel

Short presses scroll between disc tracksor preset radio stations7. A long press

fast-winds disc tracks or searches for thenext available radio station.

Volume - press to raise or lower the audiovolume.

7 Does not apply to DAB.



06

234

Menus

The example shows navigation to different functions when a disc is played back. (1) Main source button, (2) Normal view, (3) Shortcut view, (4) Quick view, (5)Menu view



06


Select main source by pressing a main sourcebutton (1) (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL). To navigatein the source's menus, use the controls forTUNE, OK/MENU or EXIT.

Use TUNE to scroll in the menu, select thehighlighted menu bar with OK/MENU or goback with EXIT. In some cases it is possible toaccess a shortcut menu by pressing the activesource's main source button (1).

For Menu overview, see page 237.

NOTE

If the car is equipped with a steering wheelkeypad with a thumbwheel*, these can beused instead of the controls in the centreconsole (TUNE, OK/MENU, EXIT), seepage 232.

Views in the TV screen

For each main source there are four basictypes of views:

• Normal view (2) - normal mode for thesource

• Shortcut menu (3) - shows commonlyused menu options in the main sourcesTEL and MEDIA (accessed by pressing theactive source's main source button (1)).

• Quick view (4) - fast mode when TUNE isturned, e.g. for changing disc tracks, radiostation, etc.

• Menu view (5) - for menu navigation(accessed by pressing OK/MENU).

The views have different appearances depend-ing on the source, in-car equipment, settings,etc.

Pop-up menu8 video and TV*

Press OK/MENU when a video file is beingplayed back or TV* is being shown in order toaccess the pop-up menu.

FAV - store a preset

The FAV button can be used to store functionsthat are used frequently so that the function

can be started simply by pressing FAV. Youcan select a favourite (e.g. Equalizer) for eachfunction as follows:

In RADIO mode:

• AM

• FM1/FM2

• DAB1*/DAB2*

In MEDIA mode:

• DISC

• USB*

• iPod*

• Bluetooth*

• AUX

• TV*

It is also possible to select and store a favouritefor MY CAR, CAM* and NAV*. Favourites canalso be selected and stored under MY CAR.For more information on the menu system MY

CAR, see page 198.

To store a function in the FAV button:

1. Select a main source (e.g. RADIO,MEDIA).

2. Select a wavelength or source (AM, Disc,etc.).

8 Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV*.



06


3. Press and hold the FAV button until the"favourites menu" is shown.

4. Turn TUNE to select an option from the listand press OK/MENU to save.> When the main source (e.g. RADIO,

MEDIA) is active the stored function isavailable via a short press on FAV.

General audio settings

Press SOUND to access the audio settingsmenu (Bass, Treble, etc.). Scroll forward withSOUND or OK/MENU to your selection (e.g.Treble).

Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and savethe setting with OK/MENU.

Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU toaccess other options:

• Surround9 - Can be set to the On/Off posi-tion. When On is selected, the systemselects the setting for optimal sound repro-duction. Normally DPLII and thenappear in the TV screen. If the recording ismade with Dolby Digital technology thenplayback will take place with this setting,

then appears in the TV screen.

When Off is selected, 3-channel stereo isavailable.

• Bass - Bass level.

• Treble - Treble level.

• Fader – Balance between the front andrear speakers.

• Balance – Balance between the left andright-hand speakers.

• Subwoofer*9 - Bass speaker level.

• DPL II centre level3 channel centre

level9 - Volume for centre speaker.

• DPL II surround level9, 10 – Level for sur-round.

Advanced audio settings

Equalizer11

The volume level can be adjusted separatelyfor different wavelengths.

1. Press OK/MENU to access Audio

settings and select Equalizer.

2. Select wavelength by turning TUNE andconfirm with OK/MENU.

3. Adjust the audio settings by turningTUNE and confirm with OK/MENU. Con-tinue in the same way with other wave-lengths you want to change.

4. When you have finished with audio set-tings, press EXIT to confirm and return tonormal view.

For general information on menu navigation,see page 234 and menu overview, seepage 237.

Sound stage9

The sound experience can be optimised for thedriver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat.If there are passengers in both the front andrear seats then the option recommended is;both front seats. The options can be selectedunder Audio settings Sound stage.


Audio volume and automatic volume

control

The audio system compensates for disruptingnoises in the passenger compartment byincreasing the volume in relation to the speed

9 Only Premium Sound Multimedia.10Only when Surround is activated.11Not Performance.



06

237

of the car. The compensation level can be setto low, medium, high or off. Select the levelunder Audio settings Volume

compensation.


External audio source audio volume

If an external audio source (e.g. an MP3 playeror iPod ) is connected to the AUX input thenthe audio source that is connected can have adifferent volume than the audio system's inter-nal volume (e.g. radio). Correct this by adjust-ing the volume of the input:

1. Press the MEDIA button and turn TUNE toAUX and wait a few seconds or press OK/

MENU.

2. Press OK/MENU and then turn TUNE toAUX input volume. Confirm with OK/

MENU.

3. Turn TUNE to adjust the volume for theAUX input.

NOTE

If the external audio source's volume is toohigh or too low, the quality of the sound maydeteriorate. The audio quality may also beimpaired if the player is charged while theinfotainment system is in AUX mode. Inwhich case, avoid charging the player viathe 12 V socket.

Optimum sound reproduction

The audio system is pre-calibrated for opti-mum sound reproduction by means of digitalsignal processing.

This calibration takes into account loudspeak-ers, amplifiers, passenger compartmentacoustics, listener position etc. for each com-bination of car model and audio system.

There is a also a dynamic calibration that takesinto account the position of the volume control,radio reception and vehicle speed.

The controls explained in these operatinginstructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and Equalizer,are only intended for the user to be able toadapt the sound reproduction according topersonal taste.

Menu overview

Menus RADIO

Main menu AM

AM menu

Show presets12

Scan

Audio settings13

Sound stage14

Equalizer15

Volume compensation

Reset all audio settings

Main menu FM1/FM2

FM menu

TP

Show radio text

Show presets12

Scan

News settings

12Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.13The menu options for audio settings are the same for all audio sources.14Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.15Does not apply to Performance.



06


Advanced settings

REG

Alternative frequency

EON

Set TP favourite

PTY settings

Reset all FM settings

Audio settings16

Main menu DAB1*/DAB2*

DAB menu

Ensemble learn

PTY filtering

Turn off PTY filtering

Show radio text

Show presets12

Scan

Advanced settings

DAB linking

DAB band

Sub channels

Show PTY text

Reset all DAB settings

Audio settings16

Menus MEDIA

Main menu CD Audio

Disc menu

Random

Scan

Audio settings16

Main menu CD/DVD12 Data

Disc menu

Play/Pause

Stop

Random

Repeat folder

Change subtitles

Change audio track

Scan

Audio settings16

Main menu DVD12 Video

DVD Video Menu

DVD disc menu

Play/Pause/Continue

Stop

Subtitles

Audio tracks

Advanced settings

Angle

DivX® VOD code

Audio settings16

Main menu iPod15

iPod menu

Random

Scan

Audio settings16

Main menu USB15

USB menu

Play/Pause

16For submenus, see "Main menu AM".12Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.15Does not apply to Performance.



06

��


Stop

Random

Repeat folder

Select USB device

Change subtitles

Change audio track

Scan

Audio settings16

Main menu Media Bluetooth15

Bluetooth menu

Random

Change device

Remove Bluetooth device

Scan

Bluetooth software version in car

Audio settings16

Main menu AUX

AUX menu

AUX input volume

Audio settings16

Main menu TV*

TV menu

Select country

Reorganise presets

Autostore

Scan

Audio settings16

Pop-up menu17 video and TV*

Press OK/MENU when a video file is beingplayed back or TV* is being shown in order toaccess the pop-up menu.

Image settings

Source menu18

DVD disc menu19

DVD disc TOP menu19

Menus TEL

Main menu Bluetooth handsfree15

Phone menu

All calls

All calls

Missed calls

Answered calls

Dialled calls

Call duration

Phone book

Search

New contact

Speed dials

Receive vCard

Memory status

Clear phone book

Change phone

Remove Bluetooth device

16For submenus, see "Main menu AM".15Does not apply to Performance.17Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV*.18What is shown in the pop-up menu for the source menu depends on what is being played back or displayed, it can be e.g. CD/DVD data menu or USB menu.19Only applies to DVD video discs.



06

240

Phone settings

Discoverable

Sounds and volume

Download phone book

Bluetooth software version incar

Call options

Auto answer

Voicemail number

Disconnect phone


Radio

06


General

Centre console, controls for radio functions.

RADIO button for selecting the wavelength(AM, FM1, FM2, DAB1*, DAB2*).

Station presets (0-9)

Select the desired frequency/station ornavigate in the radio menu by turningTUNE.

Confirm your selection or go to the radiomenu by pressing OK/MENU.

Hold in the button for next/previous avail-able station. Short press for preset.

NOTE

If the car is equipped with a steering wheelkeypad* and/or remote control* then inmany cases these can be used instead ofthe buttons in the centre console. For adescription of the steering wheel keypad,see page 232. For a description of theremote control, see page 275.

Menus

The menus inRADIO are controlled from thecentre console and the steering wheel key-pad*. For general information on menu naviga-tion, see page 234 and menu overview, seepage 237.

Radio AM/FM

Tuning

NOTE

The reception is dependent both on howgood the signal strength and signal qualityare. The transmission may be disturbed byvarious factors such as tall buildings or thetransmitter being far away. Coverage levelcan also vary depending on where in thecountry you are located.

Automatic tuning

1. Press RADIO, turn TUNE until the desiredwavelength (AM, FM1 etc.) is shown, pressOK/MENU.

2. Hold in / in the centre console (orin the steering wheel keypad*). The radiosearches for the next/previous availablestation.

Station list1

The radio automatically compiles a list of thestrongest FM stations whose signals it is cur-rently receiving. This enables you to find a sta-tion when you drive into an area where you donot know the radio stations and their frequen-cies.

To go to the list and select a station:

1. Select the desired wavelength (FM1 orFM2).

2. Turn TUNE one step in either direction.This displays the list of all stations in thearea. The currently tuned station is indi-cated with enlarged text in the list.

3. Turn TUNE again in either direction toselect a station from the list.

4. Confirm your selection with OK/MENU.

1 Does not apply to Performance.


Radio

06

242

NOTE

• The list only shows the frequencies ofstations that are currently beingreceived, not a complete list of all radiofrequencies on the selected wave-length.

• If the signal from the currently receivedstation is weak, this may prevent theradio from updating the station list. Ifthis occurs, press the button(while the station list is shown in the dis-play screen) in order to change to man-ual tuning and set a frequency. If thestation list is no longer shown, turnTUNE one step in either direction toshow the list again, and press toswitch.

The list disappears from the TV screen after afew seconds.

If the station list is no longer shown, turnTUNE one step in either direction and press the

button in the centre console to changeto manual tuning (or to return from manual tun-ing to the function for "Station list").

Manual tuning

The preset from the factory is that the radioshows the station list of the strongest stations

in the area when you turn TUNE (see the sec-tion "Station list", page 241). When the stationlist is shown, press the button in the cen-tre console to change to manual tuning. Thisallows you to select a frequency from the list ofall available radio frequencies in the selectedwavelength. In other words, if turn TUNE onestep in a manual search the frequency ischanged from e.g. 93.3 to 93.4 MHz, etc.

To manually select a station:

1. Press the RADIO button, turn TUNE untilthe desired wavelength (AM, FM1 etc.) isshown, press OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to select a frequency.

NOTE

The preset from the factory is that the radioautomatically searches for the stations inthe area where you are driving (see previoussection "Station list" above).

But if you have changed over to manual tun-ing (by pressing the button in the cen-tre console when the station list wasshown), then the radio remains set in thefunction for manual tuning the next time youswitch on the radio. To change back to thefunction for "Station list", turn TUNE onestep (to show the complete list of stations)and press the button .

Note that if you press when the sta-tion list is not shown then INFO is activated.For more information on this function, seepage 231.

Preset

10 presets can be stored per wavelength (AM,FM1 etc.).

The stored presets are selected using the pre-set buttons.

1. Tune into a station (see "Tuning", page241).

2. Hold in one of the preset buttons for a fewseconds, the sound disappears during this


Radio

06

243

time and returns when the station is stored.The preset button can now be used.

A list of pre-selected channels can be shown2

in the TV screen. The function is activated/deactivated in FM/AM mode under FM menu

Show presets or AM menu Show

presets.

RDS functions

RDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmittersinto a network. An FM transmitter in such anetwork sends information that gives an RDSradio the following functions:

• Automatically switches to a stronger trans-mitter if reception in the area is poor.

• Searches for programme type, such astraffic information or news.

• Receives text information on current radioprogramme.

NOTE

Some radio stations do not use RDS or onlysome if its functionality.

If a required programme type is located theradio can switch stations interrupting the audiosource currently in use. For example, if the CD

player is in use, it is paused. The interruptingtransmission is played at a preset volume, seepage 245. The radio returns to the previousaudio source and volume when the set pro-gramme type is no longer broadcast.

The programme functions alarm (ALARM!),traffic information (TP), news (NEWS), and pro-gramme types (PTY) interrupt one another inorder of priority, where alarm has the highestpriority and programme types has the lowest.For additional settings of programming inter-ruptions (EON Distant and EON Local), seethe section "Enhanced Other Networks –EON" below. Press EXIT to return to the inter-rupted audio source, press the OK/MENU toclear the message.

Alarm

This function is used to warn of serious acci-dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot betemporarily interrupted or deactivated. Themessage ALARM! appears on the TV screenwhen an alarm message is transmitted.

Traffic information – TP

This function allows traffic information sentwithin a set station's RDS network to breakthrough. The TP symbol indicates that thefunction is activated. If the preset station can

send traffic information then this is shown byTP glowing brightly in the TV screen, otherwiseTP will be grey.

– Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM

menu TP.

Enhanced Other Networks – EON

This function is useful in urban areas with manyregional radio stations. It allows the distancebetween the car and the radio station trans-mitter to determine when programme functionsshould interrupt the current audio source.

– Activate/deactivate in FM mode by select-ing one of the options under FM menu

Advanced settings EON:

• Local – interrupts only if the radio stationtransmitter is close.

• Distant3 – interrupts if the station trans-mitter is far away, even if there is a lot ofstatic.

TP from selected station/all stations

The radio can only interrupt for traffic informa-tion from the selected station or all stationswithin the RDS network.

– Go in FM mode to FM menu Advanced

settings Set TP favourite to change.

2 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.3 Factory settings.


Radio

06

244

News

This function allows news broadcasts sentwithin a set station's RDS network to breakthrough. The NEWS symbol indicates that thefunction is active.


menu News settings News.

News from selected station/all stations

The radio can only interrupt for news from theselected station or all stations in the RDS net-work.

– Go in FM mode to FM menu News

settings Set news favourite to change.

Programme types – PTY

The PTY function can be used to select one ormore programme types, such as pop musicand serious classic. The PTY symbol indicatesthat the function is active. This function allowsprogramme types broadcast within a set sta-tion's RDS network to break through.

1. Activate in FM mode by first selecting theprogramme types under FM menu

Advanced settings PTY settings

Select PTY.

2. Then the PTY function must be activatedunder FM menu Advanced settings

PTY settings Receive traffic

bulletins from other networks.

An indicator is shown in the TV screen whenPTY is activated.

Deactivation of the PTY function is performedin FM mode under FM menu Advanced

settings PTY settings Receive traffic

bulletins from other networks. Selected pro-gramme types (PTY) are not reset.

Resetting and removing PTY are performedunder FM menu Advanced settings

PTY settings Select PTY Clear all.

PTY search

This function searches the entire wavelengthfor the selected programme type.

1. In FM mode select one or more PTY underFM menu Advanced settings PTY

settings Select PTY.

2. Go to FM menu Advanced settings

PTY settings Seek PTY.

To finish searching, press EXIT.

– To continue searching for another broad-cast of the selected programme types,press on or .

Display of programme type

The programme type of the current station canbe shown on the TV screen.


menu Advanced settings PTY

settings Show PTY text.

Radio text4

Some RDS stations transmit information onprogramme content, artists, etc. This informa-tion can be shown on the TV screen.


menu Show radio text.

Automatic frequency update – AF

The function selects the strongest transmitterfor the set station. In order to find a strongtransmitter the function may, in exceptionalcases, need to search the entire FM wave-length.


menu Advanced settings

Alternative frequency.

4 Only cars with 7-inch screen


Radio

06


Regional radio programmes – REG

This function causes the radio to continue witha regional transmitter even if its signal strengthis low. The symbol REG shows that the func-tion is active.


menu Advanced settings REG.

Resetting RDS functions

All radio settings can be reset to the originalfactory settings.

– The reset is carried out in FM mode underFM menu Advanced settings

Reset all FM settings.

Volume control, programme types

The interrupting programme types, e.g.NEWS or TP, are heard at the volume selectedfor each respective programme type. If the vol-ume level is adjusted during the programmeinterruption, the new level is saved until thenext programme interruption.

Scan wavelength

The function automatically searches for avail-able channels and takes into account any pro-gramme type filtering. When a station is found,it is played for approx. 10 seconds beforescanning is resumed. When a station is playingback it can be saved as a preset in the usualway, see the section Preset, page 242.

– To start scanning go in FM/AM mode toFM menu Scan or AM menu Scan.

NOTE

Scanning stops if a station is saved.

Radio system - DAB*

General

DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digitalbroadcasting system for radio. This systemsupports DAB, DAB+ and DMB.

NOTE

Coverage for DAB is not available in all loca-tions. If there is no coverage then the mes-sage No reception is shown in the displayscreen.

Service and Ensemble

• Service - Channel, radio channel (onlyaudio services are supported by the sys-tem).

• Ensemble - A collection of radio channelson the same frequency.

Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn)

When the vehicle is moved to a new broad-casting area, programming of existing channelgroups in the area may be necessary.

Programming of channel groups creates anupdated list of all available channel groups.The list is not updated automatically.

Programming is carried out in the menu systemin DAB mode under DAB menu Ensemble

learn. Programming can also take place as fol-lows:

1. Turn TUNE one step in either direction.> Ensemble learn is shown in the list of

available channel groups.

2. Press OK/MENU.> New programming is started.

Programming can be cancelled with EXIT.

Navigation in channel group list

(Ensemble)

To navigate in and access the channel grouplist turn TUNE. The name of the Ensemble isshown in the upper part of the TV screen. Whenswitching to the new Ensemble the namechanges to the new one.

• Service - Shows channels irrespective ofthe channel group to which they are allo-cated. The list can also be filtered using theselection of programme type (PTY

filtering), see below.


Radio

06

246

Scanning

The function automatically searches the cur-rent wavelength for strong stations. When astation is found, it is played for approx. 10 sec-onds before scanning is resumed. When a sta-tion is playing back it is saved as a preset in theusual way. For more information on presets,see "Preset" below.

– Go in DAB mode to DAB menu Scan tostart scanning.

NOTE

Scanning stops if a station is saved.

Scanning can also be selected in DAB-PTYmode. In which case only channels of the pre-selected programme type are played.

Programme type (PTY)

Various types of radio programmes can beselected using the programme type function.There are a number of different programmetypes which also include different programmecategories. After selecting a programme type,navigation only takes place within the channelsthat are broadcasting that type.

Programme type is selected in DAB modeunder DAB menu PTY filtering. Exit thismode as follows:

– Press EXIT.> An indicator is shown in the TV screen

when PTY is activated.

In certain cases DAB radio will exit PTY modewhen DAB to DAB linking (see below) is imple-mented.

Preset

10 station presets can be stored per wave-length. DAB has 2 memories for presets:DAB1 and DAB2. Storage of presets is madeby means of a long press on the desired presetbutton, for more information see page 242. Thestored presets are selected using the presetbuttons.

A preset contains one channel but no sub-channels. If a subchannel is being played anda preset is saved then only the main channel isregistered. This is because subchannels aretemporary. At the next attempt to retrieve thepreset, the channel which contained the sub-channel will be played. The preset is notdependent on the channel list.

A list of pre-selected channels can be shown5

in the TV screen. The function is activated/deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu

Show presets.

NOTE

The audio system's DAB system does notsupport all functions available in the DABstandard.

Radio text

Some radio stations transmit information onprogramme content, artists, etc. This informa-tion is shown on the TV screen.

The function is deactivated/activated in DABmode under DAB menu Show radio text.

NOTE

Only one of the functions "Show radiotext" and "Show presets" can be acti-vated at a time. If one of them is activatedwhen the other is already activated, then thepreviously activated function is deactivatedautomatically. Both functions can be deac-tivated.

5 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.


Radio

06

247

Advanced settings

DAB to DAB link

DAB to DAB linking means that the DAB radiocan go from one channel with poor or no recep-tion to the same channel in another channelgroup with better reception. There may be acertain delay when changing channel group.There may be a period of silence between thecurrent channel no longer being available to thenew channel becoming available.

The function can be activated/deactivated inDAB mode under DAB menu Advanced

settings DAB linking.

Wavelength

DAB can be transmitted on two6 wavelengths:

• Band III - covers most areas.

• LBand - available only in a few areas.

By selecting for example Band III on its own,channel programming takes place morequickly than if both Band III and LBand havebeen selected. It is not certain that all channelgroups will be found. Wavelength selectiondoes not affect the stored memories.

Wavelengths can be deactivated/activated inDAB mode under DAB menu Advanced

settings DAB band.

Subchannel

Secondary components are usually namedsubchannels. These are temporary and cancontain e.g. translations of the main pro-gramme into other languages.

If one or more subchannels are broadcast thenthe symbol is shown to the left of the chan-nel name in the TV screen. A subchannel isindicated by the - symbol appearing to the leftof the channel name in the TV screen.

Press to access the subchannels.

Subchannels can only be accessed on theselected main channel and not on any otherchannel without selecting it.

Display of subchannels can be deactivated/activated in DAB mode under DAB menu

Advanced settings Sub channels

Programme type text

Some radio stations broadcast informationabout programme type and programme cate-gory, for information on Programme types –PTY, see page 244. This information is shownon the TV screen.

The function is activated/deactivated in DABmode under DAB menu Advanced

settings Show PTY text.

Resetting the DAB settings

All DAB settings can be reset to the originalfactory settings.

– The reset is carried out in DAB mode underDAB menu Advanced settings

Reset all DAB settings.

6 Not all areas/countries use both wavelengths.


Media player

06


CD/DVD1 functions

Centre console control panel.

Disc insert and eject slot

MEDIA button, activates last active mediasource. If you are already in a media sourceand press the MEDIA button then a short-cut menu is shown for commonly usedmenu options.

Disc eject

Input of numbers and letters.

Select the disc tracks/folders, or navigatethrough menu options by turning TUNE.

Confirm your selection or go to the menufor the selected media source by pressingOK/MENU.

Fast forward/reverse and change disctrack or chapter2.

The media player supports and can play thefollowing main types of discs and files:

• Pre-recorded CD discs (CD Audio).

• Burned CD discs with audio and/or videofiles1.

• Pre-recorded DVD video discs1.

• Burned DVD discs1 with audio and/or videofiles.

For more information about the supported for-mats, see page 251.

NOTE


Menus

The menus inMEDIA are controlled from thecentre console and the steering wheel key-pad*. For general information on menu naviga-tion, see page 234 and menu overview, seepage 237.

Starting playback of a disc

Press the MEDIA button, turn TUNE untilDisc is shown, press OK/MENU. If there is adisc in the media player then the disc startsplaying back automatically, otherwise Insert

disc is shown in the TV screen. Then insert adisc, with text side up. The disc starts to playback automatically.

If a disc with audio/video files is inserted intothe player then the disc's folder structureneeds to be loaded. Depending on the qualityof the disc and the quantity of information theremay be a certain delay before playback starts.

Disc eject

A disc remains in the ejected position forabout 12 seconds, after which it is insertedback into the player for safety reasons.

Pause

When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTEis pressed, the media player is paused. Whenthe volume is increased or MUTE is pressed

1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.2 Only applies to DVD discs.


Media player

06


again, the media player starts. It is also possi-ble to pause via the menu system3, press OK/

MENU, select Play/Pause.

Playback and navigation

CD audio discs

Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist andnavigate in the list. Use OK/MENU to confirmthe selection of the disc track and start play-back. Press EXIT to cancel and exit the playlist.A long press on EXIT leads to the playlist's rootlevel.

Disc tracks can also be changed by pressingon / on the centre console or thesteering wheel keypad*.

Burned discs audio/video files1

Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist/folderstructure and navigate in the list/structure. UseOK/MENU to confirm either selection of sub-folder or start of playback of the selectedaudio/video file. Press EXIT to either stop andexit the playlist or go up (back) in the folderstructure. A long press on EXIT leads to theplaylist's root level.

Audio/video files can also be changed bypressing / on the centre console or thesteering wheel keypad*.

Audio files have the symbol , video files1

have the symbol and folders have thesymbol .

When playback of a file is complete the play-back of the other files (of the same type) in thatparticular folder continues. Change4 of foldertakes place automatically when all the files inthe current folder have been played back. Thesystem automatically detects and changessetting when a disc containing only audio filesor only video files is loaded into the mediaplayer and then plays back these files. How-ever, the system does not change setting if adisc containing a mixture of audio and videofiles is loaded into the media player, but insteadthe player continues to play back the previousfile type.

NOTE

A video film is only shown when the car isstationary. When the car is moving at aspeed of over about 8 km/h no picture isshown and No visual media availablewhile driving appears on the displayscreen, although the audio is heard duringthis time. The picture is shown again assoon as the car's speed falls below about 6km/h.

NOTE

Some audio files that are copy-protected byrecord companies or privately copied audiofiles cannot be loaded by the player.

DVD video discs1

For playback of DVD video discs, seepage 250.

Fast forward/reverse

Hold in the buttons / to fast forward/rewind. Audio files are fast forwarded/rewoundat one speed, while video files are fast forwar-ded/rewound at several speeds. Repeatedlypress the buttons / to increase the fast

3 Does not apply to CD Audio1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.4 If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place.


Media player

06


forward/rewind speed for video files. Releasethe button to return to viewing at normal speed.

Scan5

This function plays the first ten seconds ofeach disc track/audio file. To scan:

1. Press OK/MENU

2. Turn TUNE to Scan

> The first 10 seconds of each disc trackor audio file are played.

3. Cancel the scan with EXIT, the disc trackor audio file being played back will con-tinue playing.

Random5

This function plays the tracks in random order.To listen to the tracks in random order:

1. Press OK/MENU

2. Turn TUNE to Random

3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivatethe function.

Disc tracks/audio files can be changed bypressing / on the centre console or thesteering wheel keypad*.

Repeat folder6

This function makes it possible to play files ina folder over and over again. When the last filehas been played out, playback of the first filestarts again.

1. Press OK/MENU

2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder

3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivatethe function.

Playback of DVD video discs1

Playback

When playing back a DVD video disc a discmenu may appear on the display screen. Thedisc menu gives access to additional functionsand settings, such as selecting subtitles, lan-guage and scene selection.

NOTE

A video film is only shown when the car isstationary. When the car is moving at aspeed of over about 8 km/h no picture isshown and No visual media availablewhile driving appears on the displayscreen, although the audio is heard duringthis time. The picture is shown again assoon as the car's speed falls below about 6km/h.

Navigation in the DVD video disc's menu

Navigation in the DVD video disc's menu isperformed using the number keys in the centreconsole as illustrated above.

5 Does not apply to DVD video discs.6 Only applies to audio/video files on burned discs or USB.1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.


Media player

06


Changing chapter or title

Turn TUNE to access the list of chapters andnavigate through them (if the film is beingplayed back then it is paused). Press OK/

MENU to select the chapter, this also leadsback to the original position (if the film wasbeing played back then it is restarted). PressEXIT to access the title list.

Titles are selected in the title list by turningTUNE and the selection is confirmed with OK/

MENU, this also leads back to the chapter list.Press OK/MENU to activate the selection andreturn to the start position. Use EXIT to cancelthe selection and this leads back to the originalposition (without any selection being made).

The chapter can also be changed by pressingon / on the centre console or thesteering wheel keypad*.

Advanced settings7

Angle

If the DVD video disc supports it, the functioncan be used to choose from which cameraposition a particular scene should be shown.Go in disc mode to Disc menu Advanced

settings Angle.

DivX Video On Demand

The media player can be registered in order toplay DivX VOD type files from burned discs orUSB. The code for registration can be found inthe menu system MY CAR Settings

Information DivX® VOD code. For generalinformation on menus, see under MY CAR, seepage 198.

For more information visit www.divx.com/vod.

Picture settings7

You can adjust the settings (when the car isstationary) for brightness and contrast.

1. Press OK/MENU and select Image

settings, confirm with OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to the adjustment option andconfirm with OK/MENU.

3. Adjust the setting by turning TUNE andconfirm with OK/MENU.

To return to the settings list, press the OK/

MENU or EXIT.

The picture settings can be reset to factorysettings with the Reset option.

Compatible file formats

The media player can play back a variety of filetypes and is compatible with the formats in thefollowing table.

NOTE

Dual format, double-sided discs (DVD Plus,CD-DVD format) are thicker than regular CDdiscs and therefore playback cannot beguaranteed and malfunction may arise.

If a CD contains a mixture of MP3 and CDDAtracks, all MP3s will be ignored.

Audio formatA CD audio, mp3,wma

Audio formatB CD audio, mp3,wma, aac, m4a

Video formatC CD video,DVD video, divx, avi,asf

A Applies to Performance.B Does not apply to Performance.C Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium

Sound Multimedia.

7 Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.


External audio source via AUX/USB* input

06


General

Connection points for external audio sources.

An external audio source, e.g. an iPod or MP3player, can be connected to the audio systemvia any of the connections in the centre con-sole. An audio source connected to the USBinput can then be handled1 with the car's audiocontrols. A device connected via the AUX inputcannot be controlled via the car.

NOTE


An iPod or MP3 player with rechargeable bat-teries is recharged (when the ignition is on orthe engine is running) if the device is pluggedinto the USB connection.

To connect the audio source:

1. Press MEDIA, turn TUNE to the desiredaudio source USB, iPod or AUX, pressOK/MENU.> If USB is selected then Connect USB is

shown in the TV screen.

2. Connect your audio source to one of theconnections in the centre console's stor-age compartment (see previous illustra-tion).

The text Reading USB is shown in the TVscreen when the system is loading the storagemedia's file structure. Depending on the file

structure and number of files there may besome delay before loading is finished.

NOTE

The system supports most iPod modelsproduced in 2005 or later.

NOTE

To prevent damage to the USB connection,this is shut off if the USB connection isshort-circuited or if a connected USB unit istaking too much power (this may happen ifthe unit connected does not meet the USBstandard). The USB connection is reactiva-ted automatically the next time the ignitionis turned on, unless the fault persists.

Menus

The menus inMEDIA are controlled from thecentre console and the steering wheel key-pad*. For general information on menu naviga-tion, see page 234 and menu overview, seepage 237.

1 Only applies to the media source connected via the USB connection.



06

��


Playback and navigation2

Turn TUNE to access the playlist/folder struc-ture and navigate in the list/structure. Use OK/

MENU to either confirm selection of subfolderor start of playback of the selected audio/videofile. Press EXIT to either stop and exit the play-list or go up (back) in the folder structure. A longpress on EXIT leads to the playlist's root level.

Audio/video files can also be changed bypressing / on the centre console or thesteering wheel keypad*.

Audio files have the symbol , video files3

have the symbol and folders have thesymbol .

When playback of a file is complete the play-back of the other files (of the same type) in thatparticular folder continues. Change4 of foldertakes place automatically when all the files inthe current folder have been played back. Thesystem automatically detects and changessetting when a device containing only audiofiles or only video files is connected to the USBport and then it plays back these files. How-ever, the system does not change setting if a

device containing a mixture of audio and videofiles is connected to the USB port, but insteadthe player continues to play back the previousfile type.

Fast forward/reverse2

See page 249.

Scan2

See page 250.

Random2

See page 250.

Search function2

The keypad on the control panel in the centreconsole can be used to find a filename in thecurrent folder.

The search function is accessed either by turn-ing TUNE (to access the folder structure) or bypressing one of the letter keys. As a letter orcharacter in a search string is entered you getcloser to your search target.

Start playback of a file by pressing OK/

MENU.

Repeat folder5

See page 250.

Pause

When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTEis pressed, the media player is paused. Whenthe volume is increased or MUTE is pressedagain, the media player starts. It is also possi-ble to pause via the menu system6, press OK/

MENU, select Play/Pause.

Audio sources

USB memory

To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick,only store music files on it. It takes a lot longerfor the system to load storage media that con-tains anything other than compatible musicfiles.

2 Only applies to USB and iPod .3 Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.4 If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place.5 Only applies to USB.6 Does not apply to iPod



06


NOTE

The system supports mobile media compli-ant with USB 2.0 and the FAT32 file systemand can handle 1000 folders with a maxi-mum of 254 subfolders/files in every folder.The top level, which can handle up to 1000subfolders/files, is an exception to this.

NOTE

When using a longer model USB memorystick the use of a USB adapter cable is rec-ommended. This is to avoid mechanicalwear to the USB input and the connectedUSB memory stick.

USB hub

It is possible to connect a USB hub to the USBconnection and thereby connect multiple USBdevices simultaneously. Selection of USBdevice is made in USB mode under USB menu

Select USB device.

MP3 player

Many MP3 players have their own file systemsthat are not supported by the audio system. Foruse in the system, an MP3 player must be setin USB Removable device/Mass Storage

Device mode.

iPod

An iPod is charged and supplied with powerby the USB connection* via the player's con-nection cable.

NOTE

The system only supports the playback ofaudio files from iPod .

NOTE

When an iPod is used as audio source, thecar's infotainment system has a menustructure that is similar to the iPod player'sown menu structure.

Compatible file formats via the USBconnection

Audio and video files in the following table aresupported by the system for playback via theUSB connection.

Audio format mp3, wma, aac,m4a

Video formatA divx, avi, asf

A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and PremiumSound Multimedia.


Media Bluetooth *

06


General

The car's media player is equipped withBluetooth 1 and can wirelessly play streamingaudio files from external devices withBluetooth , such as mobile phones and PDAs.Navigation and control of the sound can becarried out via the centre console buttons or viathe steering wheel keypad*. In some externaldevices it is also possible to change tracksfrom the device.

To play back the audio the car's media playermust first be set in Bluetooth mode.

NOTE

The Bluetooth media player must supportthe Audio/Video Remote Control Profile(AVRCP) and Advanced Audio DistributionProfile (A2DP). The player should useAVRCP version 1.3, A2DP 1.2. Otherwisesome functions may not work.

Not all mobile phones and external mediaplayers available in the market are fully com-patible with the Bluetooth function in thecar's media player. Volvo recommends thatyou contact an authorised Volvo dealer orvisit www.volvocars.com for information oncompatible phones and external mediaplayers.

NOTE

The car's media player can only play theaudio files via the Bluetooth function.

Menus

The menus in MEDIA are controlled from thecentre console and the steering wheel key-pad*. For general information on menu naviga-tion, see page 234 and menu overview, seepage 237.

Overview


VOL – volume

MEDIA button. Last active source (e.g.iPod ) is activated automatically. If a

source is activated and you press MEDIA

then a shortcut menu is shown with com-monly used menu options.

Navigate in the menu by turning TUNE.

Confirm your selection or go to the menuby pressing OK/MENU.

EXIT - leads up in the menu system, stopsthe function in progress.

Short presses are used to scroll betweenaudio files. Long presses are used to fastforward and rewind audio files.

NOTE


1 Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.


Media Bluetooth *

06


Getting started

Connect an external Bluetooth device

A maximum of ten external devices can be reg-istered. The connection is made in the sameway as for the phone, see Connect an externalBluetooth® device, page 259.

Automatic connection

When the Bluetooth function is active and thelast external device connected is in range it isconnected automatically. When the infotain-ment system searches for the last device con-nected its name is shown in the TV screen. Toconnect to another device, press EXIT. Con-nect a new external device, see "Change toanother external device" below.

Change to another external device

It is possible to change a connected devicewith another device if there are several devicesin the car. However, the device must first havebeen paired, see "Connect an external Blue-tooth® device" above. To change to anotherdevice:

1. Press MEDIA, turn TUNE until Bluetooth

is shown, press OK/MENU.

2. Check that the external device is searcha-ble/visible via Bluetooth , see the manualfor the external device.

3. Press OK/MENU.

4. Turn TUNE to Change device, and con-firm with OK/MENU.> After a while, the external device's name

is shown in the TV screen. If severalexternal devices have been paired thenthese are also shown.

5. Select the device to be connected by turn-ing TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU.> Connection of the external device takes

place.

Change audio file by pressing / on thecentre console or the steering wheel keypad*.

Disconnecting the device

Automatic disconnection takes place if theexternal device moves out of the infotainmentsystem's range. For more information on con-nection, see page 256.

Remove the connected device

1. Press Bluetooth mode on OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to Remove Bluetooth

device and confirm with OK/MENU.

3. Select the device to be removed by turningTUNE, and confirm with OK/MENU.> A prompt asking whether or not you

want to remove the connection is shownin the TV screen.

4. Press OK/MENU to confirm.

EXIT cancels.

Random2

This function plays back the audio files on theexternal device in random order. Activate/deactivate the random function in Bluetoothmode under Bluetooth menu Random.

Change audio file by pressing / on thecentre console or the steering wheel keypad*.

Scanning of audio files in external

device2

This function play backs the first ten secondsof each audio file. Activate/deactivate the func-tion in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth menu

Scan.

Cancel scanning with EXIT.

2 Not supported by all mobile phones.


Media Bluetooth *

06


Version information Bluetooth

The car's current Bluetooth version can beseen in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth

menu Bluetooth software version in car.


Bluetooth handsfree*

06


General

A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth canbe connected wirelessly to the Infotainmentsystem1. The infotainment system then workshandsfree, with the option to control a range ofthe mobile phone's functions remotely. Themicrophone used is located by the driver's sunvisor (2). The mobile phone can be operated byits own keys irrespective of whether or not it isconnected.

NOTE

Only a selection of mobile phones are fullycompatible with the handsfree function.Volvo recommends that you seek assis-tance from an authorised Volvo dealer orvisit www.volvocars.com for information oncompatible phones.

Menus

The menus in TEL are controlled from the cen-tre console and the steering wheel keypad*.For general information on menu navigation,see page 234 and menu overview, seepage 237.

Overview

System overview

Mobile phone

Microphone


Centre console control panel

Phone functions, controls overview


Number and letter buttons

TEL button activates/searches last con-nected phone. If a phone is already con-nected, and TEL is pressed, a shortcutmenu is shown with commonly used menuoptions for the phone.

TUNE - Turn in normal view to the right toaccess the phone book, and to the left forthe call register for all calls; also used fornavigation among the options on the TVscreen.

1 Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.



06


Accept incoming calls, confirm your selec-tion or go to the Phone menu by pressingOK/MENU.

EXIT - Cancels/rejects phone calls, deletesinput characters, leads up in the menu sys-tem and cancels the current function.

NOTE


Remember

Activate

A short press on TEL activates/searches lastconnected phone. If a phone is already con-nected, and TEL is pressed, a shortcut menuis shown with commonly used menu optionsfor the phone. The symbol indicates thata phone is connected.

Connect an external Bluetooth device

A maximum of ten external devices can be reg-istered. Registration is performed once perdevice. After registration the device no longerneeds to be activated as visible/searchable.

It is possible to have two Bluetooth devicesconnected simultaneously. One phone andone media device, which it is possible to switchbetween, see page 260 or see page 256. It isalso possible to use the phone while streamingaudio files from a connected device.

Connecting an external device takes place indifferent ways depending on whether or not thedevice has been connected previously.

To connect a device for the first time, follow theconnection alternatives below.

There are two possible ways of connectingdevices, either search for the external devicefrom the car, or search for the car from theexternal device. If one option does not workthen try with the other.

Alternative 1 - search for the external devicevia the car's menu system

1. Make the external device searchable/visi-ble via Bluetooth , see the external devi-ce's manual or www.volvocars.com.

2. Press TEL.> The car searches for previously con-

nected devices.

3. Activate Bluetooth in the car. Press OK/

MENU, select Add phone or Change

phone if another phone is already con-nected.

If one or more devices have already beenconnected then these are also shown.Select the device you want to connect andpress OK/MENU.> The menu option is shown on the TV

screen.

4. Check that the external device'sBluetooth function is switched on andpress OK/MENU.> The car searches for external devices in

the vicinity. The search takes approxi-mately 30 seconds. The external devi-ces detected are specified with theirrespective Bluetooth name in the TVscreen. The handsfree function'sBluetooth name is shown in the exter-nal device as My Volvo Car.

5. Turn TUNE to select one of the externaldevices shown on the car's TV screen andconfirm with OK/MENU.

6. Enter the series of numbers (PIN code) thatis shown on the car's TV screen via themobile phone's keypad and press themobile phone's button to confirm theselection.

The external device is now connected to thecar and can be controlled from the car.



06


If connecting the phone is not successful:Press EXIT and connect in accordance withAlternative 2.

If connecting the media device is not success-ful: Connect in accordance with Alternative 2.

Alternative 2 - search for the car via the exter-nal device

1. Press TEL.

If an external device is already connected,disconnect it.> The car searches for previously con-

nected devices.

2. Make the car searchable/visible viaBluetooth . Press OK/MENU, selectPhone settings Discoverable.

3. Search for the car with the external devi-ce's Bluetooth function, see the manualfor the external device.

4. Select My Volvo Car in the list of devicesdetected in your external device.

5. Enter a PIN code of your choice in theexternal device via the external device'skeypad when prompted for a PIN. Thenenter the same PIN code via the car's key-pad.

6. Choose to connect to My Volvo Car fromthe external device.

When the connection is established, the exter-nal device's Bluetooth name is shown in thecar's TV screen. Now the external device canbe controlled from the car.

Automatic connection

When the handsfree function is active and thelast mobile phone connected is in range it isconnected automatically. If the last connectedmobile phone is not available then the systemwill try to connect a mobile phone that waspaired earlier. When the audio systemsearches for the last phone connected its nameis shown in the TV screen.

Manual connection

If you want to change the connected mobilephone, go in phone mode to Phone menu

Change phone.

Change to another external device

It is possible to change a connected devicewith another device if there are several devicesin the car. However, the device must first havebeen registered to the car, see Connect anexternal Bluetooth® device. To change toanother device:

1. Check that the external device is searcha-ble/visible via Bluetooth , see the manualfor the external device.

2. Press TEL and then select Change

phone.> The car searches for previously con-

nected devices. The external devicesdetected are specified with their respec-tive Bluetooth name in the TV screen.

3. Select the device to be connected by turn-ing TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU.> Connection of the external device takes

place.

To call

1. Make sure that the symbol appearsat the top of the TV screen and that thehandsfree function is in phone mode.

2. Dial either the desired number or speeddial number, see page 265. Or in normalview turn TUNE to the right to access thephone book, and to the left for the call reg-ister for all calls. For information on thephone book, see page 262.

3. Press OK/MENU.

The call is interrupted with EXIT.

Disconnecting the mobile phone

Automatic disconnection takes place if themobile phone moves out of the audio system'srange. The connection to the mobile phone canbe manually broken in phone mode under



06


Phone menu Disconnect phone. For moreinformation on connection, see page 259.

The handsfree function is deactivated whenthe engine is switched off and the door isopened2.

When the mobile phone has been discon-nected an ongoing call can be continued byusing the mobile phone's built-in microphoneand speaker.

NOTE

Even when your mobile phone has beenmanually disconnected, some mobilephones may automatically couple up to thelast handsfree unit connected, e.g. when anew call begins.

Remove the device

A connected mobile phone can be deregis-tered and removed. This is performed in phonemode under Phone menu Remove

Bluetooth device.

Making and receiving calls

Incoming call

– Press OK/MENU to answer the call, evenif the audio system is in e.g. RADIO orMEDIA mode.

Refuse or end with EXIT.

Automatic answer

The automatic answer function means thatcalls are accepted automatically.

– Activate/deactivate in phone mode underPhone menu Call options Auto

answer.

In call menu

Press OK/MENU during an ongoing call toaccess the following functions:

• Mute - audio system microphone ismuted.

• Mobile phone - the call is transferred fromhandsfree to the mobile phone. For somemobile phones the connection is interrup-ted. This is normal. The handsfree functionasks if you want to reconnect.

• Dial number - option to call a third partyusing the number keys (current call set instandby).

Call lists

The call lists are copied to the handsfree func-tion at each new connection and are thenupdated during the connection. In normal view,turn to the left with TUNE to see the call registerfor All calls .

In phone mode it is possible to see all the calllists under Phone menu All calls:

• All calls

• Missed calls

• Answered calls

• Dialled calls

• Call duration

NOTE

Certain mobile phones show a list of the lastdialled numbers in reverse order.

Voice mailbox

In normal view a speed dial number for thevoice mailbox can be programmed in and thenaccessed later via a long press on 1.

Voice mailbox number is changed in phonemode under Phone menu Call options

Voicemail number Change number. If

2 Only Keyless Drive.



06


there is no number stored then this menu canbe reached with one long press on 1.

Audio settings

Phone call volume

The phone call volume can only be changedduring a call. Use the steering wheel keypad*or turn the VOL control.

Audio system volume

Providing there is no ongoing call taking place,the audio system volume is controlled as usualby turning VOL.

If an audio source is active during an incomingcall then it can be muted automatically. Acti-vate/deactivate in phone mode under Phone

menu Phone settings Sounds and

volume Mute radio/media.

Ring volume

In phone mode go to Phone menu Phone

settings Sounds and volume Ring

volume and adjust by turning VOL. Press OK/

MENU to hear the audio volume. Press EXIT

to save.

Ring signals

The handsfree function has integrated ring sig-nals that can be selected in phone mode underPhone menu Phone settings Sounds

and volume Ring signals Ring signal 1

etc.

NOTE

For some mobile phones, the ringtone onthe phone connected will not be switchedoff when one of the inbuilt signals for thehandsfree system is used.

In order to select the connected phone's ringsignal3, go in phone mode to Phone menu

Phone settings Sounds and volume

Ring signals Mobile phone ring signal.

Phone book

There are two phone books. These are mergedinto one in the car and are displayed as a singlephone book in the car.

• The car downloads the mobile phone'sphone book and only displays this phonebook when the mobile phone from which

this phone book was downloaded is con-nected.

• The car also has a built-in phone book. Thiscontains all the contacts stored in the carirrespective of which phone was con-nected when saving them. These contactsare visible for all users, regardless of themobile phone that is connected to the car.If a contact is saved in the car then thesymbol is shown in front of the con-tact in the phone book.

NOTE

Changes made from the car to a record inthe mobile phone's telephone book willresult in a new record in the car's telephonebook, i.e. changes will not be saved to thephone. From the car, this will now look likeyou have double records, with differenticons. Note also that when a shortcut num-ber is saved or a change to a contact ismade, this will result in a new record in thecar's phone book.

All use of the phone book requires that the symbol appears at the top of the TV

screen and that the handsfree function is inphone mode.

3 Not supported by all mobile phones.



06

��


The audio system stores a copy of the phonebook from each paired mobile phone. Thephone book can be copied automatically to theaudio system during each connection.

– Activate/deactivate the function in phonemode under Phone menu Phone

settings Download phone book.

If the phone book contains a ringing caller'scontact information then this is shown in the TVscreen.

Quick search for contacts

In normal view turn TUNE to the right to obtaina list of contacts. Turn TUNE to select andpress OK/MENU to call.

Under the name of the contact is the phonenumber that is selected by default. If the sym-bol appears to the right of the contact thenthere are several phone numbers stored for thecontact. Press OK/MENU to show the num-bers. Change and dial a number other than thatselected by default by turning TUNE. PressOK/MENU to dial.

Search in the list of contacts by using the cen-tre console's keypad to key in the start of thecontact's name (see "Character table keypadin centre console" for button functions).

The list of contacts can also be accessed fromnormal view by pressing and holding the buttonon the centre console's keypad with the letter

that the contact searched for starts with. Forexample, a long press on the button for 6 givesinstant access to that part of the list where thecontacts with the letter M are located.

Character table keypad in centre

console

Key Function

Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1

A B C Å Ä Æ À Ç 2

D E F È É 3

G H I Ì 4

J K L 5

M N O Ö Ø Ñ Ò 6

P Q R S ß 7

T U V Ü Ù 8

W X Y Z 9

Shift between upper and lowercase letter.

Key Function

+ 0 p w

# *

Searching for contacts

Search contacts using the text wheel.

Character list

Changing the input mode (see table below)

Phone book

To search for or edit a contact, go in phonemode to Phone menu Phone book

Search.



06


NOTE

There is no text wheel for High Performance,so TUNE cannot be used there to inputcharacters: only the digit and letter buttonson the control panel in the centre consolecan be used for this.

1. Turn4 TUNE to the desired letter, pressOK/MENU to confirm. The number andletter buttons on the control panel in thecentre console can also be used.

2. Continue with the next letter and so on. Theresult of the search is shown in the phonebook (3).

3. To change the input mode to numbers orspecial characters, or to go to the phonebook, turn TUNE to one of the options (seeexplanation in the table below) in the list forchanging the input mode (2), press OK/

MENU.

123/ABC

Change between letters andnumbers with OK/MENU.

More Change to special characterswith OK/MENU.

Leads to the phone book (3).Turn TUNE to select a contact,press OK/MENU to see thesaved numbers and other infor-mation.

A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-acter. A long press on EXIT will clear all enteredcharacters.

By pressing a number key in the centre consolewhen the text wheel is shown (see illustrationabove), a new character list (1) appears in theTV screen. Continue repeatedly pressing thenumber key to the desired letter and thenrelease. Continue with the next letter and soon. When a button is depressed the entry isconfirmed when another button is depressed.

To enter a number, hold in the correspondingnumber key.

New contact

Entering letters for New contact.

Changing the input mode (see table below)

Input field

New contacts can be added in phone modeunder Phone menu Phone book New

contact.

NOTE

There is no text wheel for High Performance,so TUNE cannot be used there to inputcharacters: only the digit and letter buttonson the control panel in the centre consolecan be used for this.




06

��


1. When the Name row is selected, pressOK/MENU to reach the input mode (illus-tration above).

2. Turn4 TUNE to the desired letter, pressOK/MENU to confirm. The number andletter buttons on the control panel in thecentre console can also be used.

3. Continue with the next letter and so on. Thename entered is shown in the input field (2)in the TV screen.

4. To change the input mode to numbers,special characters, change betweenuppercase/lowercase letters, etc., turnTUNE to one of the options (see explana-tion in the table below) in the list (1) andthen press OK/MENU.

When the name has been fully entered, selectOK in the list on the TV screen (1) and pressOK/MENU. Now continue with the telephonenumber in the same way as above.

When the telephone number has been entered,press OK/MENU and select a telephone num-ber type (Mobile phone, Home, Work orGeneral). Press OK/MENU to confirm.

When all details have been filled in, select Save

contact in the menu to save the contact.

123/ABC

Change between letters andnumbers with OK/MENU.

More Change to special characterswith OK/MENU.

OK Save and go back to Add con-

tact with OK/MENU.

Change between uppercase andlowercase letters with OK/

MENU.

Press OK/MENU, the cursormoves to the input field (2) at thetop of the TV screen. The cursorcan now be moved, with TUNE,to the appropriate place to e.g.insert new letters or delete withEXIT. To be able to insert newletters first go back to the inputmode, by pressing OK/MENU.

Speed dial numbers

Use phone mode to add speed dial numbersunder Phone menu Phone book Speed

dial.

Dialling with speed dial numbers can be per-formed in phone mode using the number keyson the keypad in the centre console, by press-

ing a number key and then pressing OK/

MENU. If there is no contact stored on thespeed dial number then an option is shown tosave a contact to the selected speed dial num-ber.

Receiving a vCard

It is possible to receive a vCard to the car'sphone book from other mobile phones (otherthan the one currently connected to the car). Inorder to allow this the car is set to visible modefor Bluetooth . The function is activated inphone mode under Phone menu Phone

book Receive vCard.

Memory status

Memory status of the car's phone book and theconnected mobile phone's phone book can beseen in phone mode under Phone menu

Phone book Memory status.

Delete phone book

The car's phone book can be deleted, this iscarried out in phone mode under Phone menu

Phone book Clear phone book.




06


NOTE

Deleting the car's telephone book only dele-tes contacts in the car's telephone book.Contacts in the mobile phone's phone bookare not deleted.

Version information Bluetooth

The car's current Bluetooth version can beseen in phone mode under Phone menu

Phone settings Bluetooth software

version in car.


Voice recognition* mobile phone

06


General

The infotainment system's voice recognition1

allows the driver to voice-activate certain func-tions in a Bluetooth -connected mobile phoneor in Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road andTraffic Information System).

NOTE

• The information in this sectiondescribes the use of voice commandsto control a mobile phone connected

using Bluetooth . For detailed infor-mation on using a mobile phone con-nected using Bluetooth with the car'sInfotainment system see page 258.

• The Volvo navigation system RTI (Roadand Traffic Information System) has aseparate user manual which containsmore information on voice control andvoice commands to control that sys-tem.

Voice commands offer convenience and helpthe driver to avoid being distracted, andinstead concentrate on driving and focusattention on the road and traffic conditions.

WARNING

The driver always holds overall responsibil-ity for driving the vehicle in a safe mannerand complying with all applicable rules ofthe road.

The voice recognition system allows the driverto voice-activate certain functions of aBluetooth -connected mobile phone and inVolvo's navigation system - RTI (Road andTraffic Information System), while the drivercan keep his/her hands on the wheel at thesame time. The input data are in dialogue formwith spoken commands from the user and ver-bal replies from the system. The voice recog-nition system uses the same microphone asthe Bluetooth handsfree system (see illustra-tion on page 258) and the voice recognitionsystem's replies come via the car's speakers.

Language

Language list.

Voice recognition is not possible for all lan-guages. Languages available for voice recog-nition are marked with an icon in the languagelist - . Changing the language is performedin the menu system MY CAR, see page 200.

1 Only applies to vehicles equipped with Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and Traffic Information System).



06


Remember

Steering wheel keypad.

Button for voice recognition

To activate the system

Before voice commands to a mobile phone canbe used the mobile phone must be paired andconnected via Bluetooth handsfree. If a tele-phone command is given and no mobile phoneis paired, then the system will provide informa-tion about this. For information on pairing andconnecting a mobile phone, see page 259.

• Press the button for voice recognition (1) inorder to activate the system and initiate adialogue with voice commands. The sys-tem will then display commonly used com-mands in the TV screen in the centre con-sole.

Keep the following things in mind when you usethe voice recognition system:

• For a command - speak after the tone, withnormal voice at normal speed.

• Do not speak while the system is replying(the system cannot understand commandsduring this time).

• The car's doors, windows and sunroof*must be closed.

• Avoid background noise in the passengercompartment.

NOTE

If the driver is unsure of which command touse, he (she) can say "Help" - the systemthen responds with a few different com-mands which can be used in the current sit-uation.

Voice commands can be disabled by:

• saying "Cancel"

• not speaking

• a long press on the steering wheel but-ton for Voice recognition

• Press EXIT or another main source but-ton (e.g. MEDIA).

Help functions for voice recognition

• Instructions: A function that helps you getfamiliar with the system and the procedurefor giving commands.

• Voice training: A function that enables thevoice recognition system to learn to knowyour voice and your accent. The functionprovides an opportunity to voice train twouser profiles.

The help functions can be accessed by press-ing the MY CAR button on the control panel inthe centre console and then turning TUNE tothe desired menu option.

Instructions

The instructions can be started in two ways:

NOTE

This instruction and voice training can onlybe started when the car is parked.

• Press the button for Voice recognition andsay "Voice instructions".

• Activate the instructions in the menu sys-tem MY CAR under Settings Voice

settings Voice tutorial. For a descrip-tion of the menu system, see page 198.

The instructions are divided into 3 lessons,which take around 5 minutes in total to com-plete. The system starts with the first lesson.



06

��


To skip a lesson and go to the next one, pressthe button for voice recognition and say"Next". Go back to the previous lesson by say-ing "Previous".

Exit the instructions by means of a long presson the button for voice recognition.

Voice training

The system displays up to fifteen phrases foryou to say. Voice training can be started in themenu system MY CAR under Settings

Voice settings Voice training. Choosebetween User 1 or User 2. For a descriptionof the menu system, see page 198.

After voice training has been completed,remember to set your user profile under Voice

user setting.

Additional settings in MY CAR

• User setting - Two user profiles can beset, the function is activated in the menusystem MY CAR under Settings Voice

settings Voice user setting. Choosebetween User 1 or User 2. For a descrip-tion of the menu system, see page 198.

• Voice volume - Can be changed in themenu system MY CAR under Settings

Voice settings Voice output volume.For a description of the menu system, seepage 198.

Using voice commands

The driver initiates a dialogue with the voicecommands by pressing the button for voicerecognition (see illustration on page 268).

Once a dialogue has been started, commonlyused commands will be shown in the TVscreen. Greyed-out text or text within bracketsis not included in the spoken command.

When the driver becomes accustomed to thesystem, he/she can speed up the commanddialogue and skip the prompts from the sys-tem, by briefly pressing the button for voicerecognition.

Commands can be given in several ways

The command "Phone call contact" can bepronounced as e.g.:

• "Phone > Call contact" - Say "Phone", waitfor the system's reply, and then continueby saying "Call contact."

or

• "Phone call contact" - Say the whole com-mand in one sequence.

Quick commands

Quick commands for the phone can be foundin the menu system MY CAR under Settings

Voice settings Voice command list

Phone commands and General commands.


Dial a number

The system understands the numbers 0 (zero)to 9 (nine). These numbers can be pronouncedindividually, in groups of several numbers at atime, or the whole number all at once. Numbersgreater than 9 (nine) cannot be handled by thesystem, e.g. 10 (ten) or 11 (eleven) are not pos-sible.

The following is an example of a dialogue withvoice commands. The system's reply will varydepending on the situation.

The user starts the dialogue by saying:

Phone > call number

or

Phone call number

System reply

Number?

User action

Start saying the numbers (as individual units,i.e. six-eight-seven, etc.) in the phone number.If you say several numbers and pause, the sys-tem will repeat them, and then say "Continue".

Continue to say the numbers. When finished,finish the command by saying "Call".

• You can also change the number by sayingthe commands "Correct" (which deletes



06


the last spoken group of numbers) or"Delete" (which deletes the whole spokenphone number).

Dialling from the call register

The following dialogue allows you to make aphone call from one of your mobile phone's callregisters.


Phone > call from the call register

or

Phone call from the call register

Continue by responding to the system'sprompts.

Call a contact

The following dialogue allows you to call yourpre-defined contacts in the mobile phone.


Phone > call contact

or

Phone call contact


Consider the following when you call a contact:

• If there are several contacts with similarnames, they will be presented in the dis-

play in the numbered rows and the systemprompts you to select a row number.

• If there are more rows in the list than canbe displayed simultaneously, saying"Down" allows you to scroll down in the list(and saying "Up" allows you to scroll up inthe list).

Calling voice mailbox

The following dialogue allows you to call yourvoice mailbox to check if you have receivedany messages. The phone number for yourvoice mailbox must be registered in theBluetooth function, see page 261.


Phone > call voice mailbox

or

Phone call voice mailbox



TV*

06


General

NOTE

This system only supports TV transmissionsin countries which transmit signals inmpeg-2 format and follow the DVB-T stand-ard. The system does not support TV trans-missions in mpeg-4 format or analoguetransmissions.

NOTE

The TV picture is only shown when the caris stationary. When the car is moving at aspeed over about 6 km/h the picture disap-pears, No visual media available whiledriving appears on the display screen,although the audio is heard during this time.The picture reappears when the car hasstopped.

Cars with RSE do not shut off the rearscreens.

NOTE

The reception is dependent both on howgood the signal strength and signal qualityare. The transmission may be disturbed byvarious factors such as tall buildings or theTV transmitter being far away. Coveragelevel can also vary depending on where inthe country you are located.

IMPORTANT

A TV licence is required for this product insome countries.

Menus

The menus in MEDIA are controlled from thecentre console and the steering wheel key-pad*. For general information on menu naviga-tion, see page 234 and menu overview, seepage 237.

Overview


MEDIA button. Last active source (e.g.iPod or TV) is activated. If a source is acti-vated and you press MEDIA then a short-

cut menu is shown with commonly usedmenu options.

Station presets, numeric input.

Navigate in channel lists or menus by turn-ing TUNE.

Confirm your selection or go to the menuby pressing OK/MENU.

EXIT - leads up in the menu system, stopsthe function in progress.

The next available channel is shown bypressing / .

NOTE



TV*

06


Watch TV

– Press MEDIA, turn TUNE until TV is shownin the TV screen, press OK/MENU.> A search starts and after a short while

the most recently used channel isshown.

Changing channel

It is possible to change channel as follows:

• Turn TUNE, a list of all available channelsin the area is shown. If any of these chan-nels is already saved as a preset then itspreset number is shown to the right of thechannel name. Continue turning TUNE toreach the desired channel and press OK/

MENU.

• By pressing the preset buttons (0-9).

• Via a short press on the / buttonsthe next available channel in the area isshown.

NOTE

If the car has been moved within the coun-try, for example, from one city to another, itis not certain that the presets are availableat the new location as the frequency rangemay have changed. In which case, carry outa new search and save a new preset list, seethe function "Save the available TV channelsas presets", page 273.

NOTE

If no reception is available on the presetbuttons, it may be because the car is at alocation other than where the scan of TVchannels was run, for example, if the carwas driven from Germany to France. A newselection of country and a new search maythen need to be carried out.

Searching TV channels/Preset list

1. Press TV mode on OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK/

MENU.

3. Turn TUNE to Select country and pressOK/MENU.> If one or more countries have previously

been selected then they are shown in alist.

4. Turn TUNE to either Other countries orone of the previously selected countries.Press OK/MENU.> A list of all available countries is shown.

5. Turn TUNE to the desired country (e.g.Sweden) and press OK/MENU.> An automatic scan for available TV

channels starts, this scan takes a littlewhile. During this time the figure foreach channel found and added as a pre-

set is shown. When the scan is com-plete a message is shown and the pic-ture is shown. A preset list (max. 30 pre-sets) has now been created and is avail-able. To change channel, seepage 272.

The scan and preset storage can be cancelledwith EXIT.

Channel management

The preset list can be edited. You can changethe order of the channels that are shown in thepreset list. A TV channel can have more thanone place in the preset list. The TV channelpositions can also vary in the preset list.

To change the order in the preset list, go in TVmode to TV menu Reorganise presets.

1. Turn TUNE to the channel you want tomove in the list and confirm with OK/

MENU.> The selected channel is highlighted.

2. Turn TUNE to the new location in the listand confirm with OK/MENU.> The channels change places with each

other.

After the preset channels (max. 30) come all theother channels available in the area. It is pos-


TV*

06

��


sible to move a channel up to a place in thepreset list.

Save the available TV channels as

presets

If the car has been moved within the country,for example, from one city to another, it is notcertain that the presets are available at the newlocation as the frequency range may havechanged. In which case, carry out another scanand save a new preset list.

1. Press TV mode on OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK/

MENU.

3. Turn TUNE to Autostore and press OK/

MENU.> An automatic scan for available TV

channels starts, this scan takes a littlewhile. During this time the figure foreach channel found and added as a pre-set is shown. When the scan is com-plete a message is shown and the pic-ture is shown. A preset list (max. 30 pre-sets) has now been created and is avail-able. To change channel, seepage 272.

Scanning the TV channels

This function automatically scans through thefrequency range for all channels available in the

area where you are. When a channel is found,it is shown for approx. 10 seconds beforescanning is resumed. Scanning is stopped withEXIT, then the channel that you just watchedcontinues to be shown. Scanning does notaffect the preset list.

Activate scanning in TV mode under TV menu

Scan.

Teletext

It is possible to read Teletext. Follow thesesteps:

1. Press the button on the remote con-trol.

2. Enter the page number (3 digits) with thenumber keys (0-9) to select page.> The page is shown automatically.

Enter new page number, or press the remotecontrol buttons / to go to the next page.

Return to TV screen with EXIT or by pressingthe button on the remote control.

It is also possible to control the teletext with thecoloured buttons on the remote control.

Information about the currentprogramme

Press the INFO button in order to display theinformation about the current programme, thenext programme and its start time. If theINFO button is pressed once more then addi-tional information on the current programmecan sometimes be displayed, such as start andend times and a brief description of the currentprogramme. For more information on theINFO button, see page 231.

To return to the TV picture, wait several sec-onds or press EXIT.

Picture settings

The settings for brightness and contrast can beadjusted. For more information, see page 251.

The reception is lost

If the reception for the TV channel that is beingshown disappears then the picture will freeze.Shortly after this a message appears informingthat the reception has been lost for the currentTV channel, and a new search for the channelcontinues. When the reception returns the dis-play of the TV channel starts immediately. It ispossible to change channel at any time whenthe message is shown.

If the message Reception lost, searching isshown then this is because the system has


TV*

06


detected that there is no reception for all TVchannels. One possible reason may be that aborder has been crossed and that the systemis set to the wrong country. In which case,change to the right country in accordance with"Searching TV channels/Preset list", seepage 272.


Remote control*

06


General*

Corresponds to TUNE in the centre con-sole.

The remote control can be used for all func-tions in the infotainment system. The remotecontrol's buttons have the same functions asthe buttons in the centre console or steeringwheel keypad*.

When using the remote control, first press theremote control's button to position F.Then aim the remote control at the IR receiver,which is located to the right of the INFO button(see page 231) in the centre console.

WARNING

Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,cameras, remote controls for accessories,etc. in the glove compartment or other com-partments. Otherwise they may injure peo-ple in the car in the event of sudden brakingor a collision.

NOTE

Do not expose the remote control to directsunlight (e.g. on the instrument panel) - oth-erwise problems may arise with the batter-ies.

functions

Key Function

F = Front TV screen

Change to navigation*

Change to radio source (AM,FM1 etc.)

Change to media source (Disc,TV* etc.)

Change to Bluetooth hands-free*

Scroll/fast rewind, change track/song.

Play/pause

Stop

Scroll/fast forward, changetrack/song.

Menu

To previous, cancels function,deletes input characters


Remote control*

06


Key Function

Navigate up/down

Navigate right/left

Confirm selection or go to themenu system for the selectedsource

Volume, decrease

Volume, increase

0-9 Preset channels, number and let-ter input

Shortcuts for favourite setting.

Information about the currentprogramme, song, etc. Also usedwhen there is more informationavailable than can be shown inthe TV screen.

Selection of language for sound-track

Key Function

Subtitles, selection of languagefor text

Teletext*, On/Off

Replacing the battery in the remotecontrol

NOTE

Battery life is normally 1-4 years anddepends on how much the remote controlis used.

The remote control is powered by four batter-ies of the AA/LR6 type.

Take along extra batteries for a long journey.

1. Push down the catch on the battery coverand slide the battery cover in the directionof the infrared lens.

2. Remove the used batteries, turn the newbatteries in accordance with the symbolsin the battery compartment and fit them.

3. Refit the cover.

NOTE

Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batter-ies in an environmentally safe manner.


06

277

278

Recommendations during driving......................................................... 280Refuelling.............................................................................................. 283Fuel....................................................................................................... 284Loading................................................................................................. 288Cargo area ........................................................................................... 291Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 292Towing and recovery............................................................................. 298

DURING YOUR JOURNEY


Recommendations during driving

07

280

General

Economical driving

Driving economically means driving smoothlywhile thinking ahead and adjusting your drivingstyle and speed to the prevailing conditions.

• Drive in the highest gear possible, adaptedto the current traffic situation and road -lower engine speeds result in lower fuelconsumption.

• Avoid driving with open windows.

• Avoid sudden unnecessary accelerationand heavy braking.

• Remove unnecessary items from the car -the greater the load the higher the fuel con-sumption.

• Use engine braking to slow down, when itcan take place without risk to other roadusers.

• A roof load and ski box increase air resis-tance, leading to higher fuel consumption- remove the load carriers when not in use.

• Do not run the engine to operating tem-perature at idling speed, but rather drivewith a light load as soon as possible - acold engine consumes more fuel than awarm one.

• A car with D2, D3, D4 or D5 engine in com-bination with a 6-speed manual gearbox isstarted in 2nd gear.

For more information and further advice, seethe pages 12 and 376.

WARNING

Never switch off the engine while moving,such as downhill, this deactivates importantsystems such as the power steering andbrake servo.

Driving in water

The car can be driven through water at a maxi-mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercisedwhen passing through flowing water.

During driving in water, maintain a low speedand do not stop the car. When the water hasbeen passed, depress the brake pedal lightlyand check that full brake function is achieved.Water and mud for example can make thebrake linings wet resulting in delayed brakefunction.

• Clean the electric contacts of the electricengine block heater and trailer couplingafter driving in water and mud.

• Do not let the car stand with water over thesills for any long period of time - this couldcause electrical malfunctions.

IMPORTANT

Engine damage can occur if water entersthe air filter.

In depths greater than 25 cm, water couldenter the transmission. This reduces thelubricating ability of the oils and shortensthe service life of these systems.

In the event of the engine stalling in water,do not try restart - tow the car from the waterto a workshop - an authorised Volvo work-shop is recommended. Risk of enginebreakdown.

Engine, gearbox and cooling system

Under special conditions, for example harddriving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there isa risk that the engine and drive system mayoverheat - in particular with a heavy load.

For information about overheating when driv-ing with a trailer, see page 292.

• Remove any auxiliary lamps from in frontof the grille when driving in hot climates.

• If the temperature in the engine's coolingsystem is too high the instrument panel'swarning symbol is illuminated and there isa text message displayed there High

engine temp Stop safely - stop the car ina safe way and allow the engine to run atidling speed for several minutes to cooldown.



07

281

• If the text message High engine temp

Stop engine or Coolant level low, Stop

engine is shown then the engine must beswitched off after stopping the car.

• In the event of overheating in the gearboxa built-in protection function is activatedwhich, amongst other things, illuminatesthe instrument panel's warning symbol andthere is a text message displayed thereTransmission hot Reduce speed orTransmission hot Stop safely - followthe recommendation given and lower thespeed and stop the car in a safe way andallow the engine to run at idling speed fora few minutes to allow the gearbox to cooldown.

• If the car overheats, the air conditioningmay be switched off temporarily.

• Do not turn the engine off immediately youstop after a hard drive.

NOTE

It is normal for the engine's cooling fan tooperate for a while after the engine has beenswitched off.

Open boot lid

WARNING

Do not drive with the boot lid open. Toxicexhaust fumes can be drawn into the carthrough the cargo area.

Do not overload the battery

The electrical functions in the car load the bat-tery to varying degrees. Avoid using the keyposition II when the engine is switched off.Instead use the I mode - which uses lesspower.

Also, be aware of different accessories thatload the electrical system. Do not use functionswhich use a lot of power when the engine isswitched off. Examples of such functions are:

• ventilation fan

• headlamps

• windscreen wiper

• audio system (high volume).

If the battery voltage is low the information dis-play shows the text Low battery Power save

mode. The energy-saving function then shutsdown certain functions or reduces certainfunctions such as the ventilation fan and/oraudio system.

– In which case, charge the battery by star-ting the engine and then running it for at

least 15 minutes - battery charging is moreeffective during driving than running theengine at idling speed while stationary.

Before a long journey

• Check that the engine is working normallyand that fuel consumption is normal.

• Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oilor other fluid).

• Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.

• Carrying a warning triangle is a legalrequirement in certain countries.

Winter driving

Check the following in particular before thecold season:

• The engine coolant must contain at least50% glycol. This mixture protects theengine against frost erosion down toapproximately –35 °C. To achieve optimumantifreeze protection, different types of gly-col must not be mixed.

• The fuel tank must be kept filled to preventcondensation.

• Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils withlower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star-ting in cold weather and also reduce fuelconsumption while the engine is cold. Formore information on suitable oils, seepage 371.



07

282

IMPORTANT

Low viscosity oil must not be used for harddriving or in hot weather.

• The condition of the battery and chargelevel must be inspected. Cold weather pla-ces great demands on the battery and itscapacity is reduced by the cold.

• Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in thewasher fluid reservoir.

To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec-ommends using winter tyres on all wheels ifthere is a risk of snow or ice.

NOTE

The use of winter tyres is a legal requirementin certain countries. Studded tyres are notpermitted in all countries.

Slippery driving conditions

Practise driving on slippery surfaces undercontrolled conditions to learn how the carreacts.


Refuelling

07

283

Refuelling

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap

Open the fuel filler flap using the button on thelighting panel - the flap opens when the buttonis released.

The arrow on the information display'ssymbol reminds which side of the car

the fuel filler cap is located.

• Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in untila click confirms that it is closed.

Opening the fuel filler flap manually

The fuel filler flap can be opened manuallywhen electric opening from the passengercompartment is not possible.

1. Open/remove the side hatch in the cargoarea (same side as fuel filler flap) and locatethe green cord with handle.

2. Pull the cord gently straight back until thefuel filler flap folds out with a "click".

IMPORTANT

Pull the wire gently - minimal force isrequired to disengage the hatch lock.

Opening/closing the fuel cap

The fuel filler cap can be attached onto the flap.

A certain overpressure may arise in the tank inthe event of high outside temperatures. Openthe cap slowly.

• After refuelling - refit the cap and turn ituntil one or more clicking sounds areheard.

Filling up with fuel

• Do not overfill the tank but fill until thepump nozzle cuts out.

NOTE

Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hotweather.


Fuel

07

284

General information on fuel

Fuel of a lower quality than that recommendedby Volvo must not be used as engine powerand fuel consumption is negatively affected.

WARNING

Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get-ting fuel splashes in the eyes.

In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove anycontact lenses and rinse the eyes in plentyof water for at least 15 minutes and seekmedical attention.

Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol,bioethanol and mixtures of them and dieselare highly toxic and could cause permanentinjury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medicalattention immediately if fuel has been swal-lowed.

WARNING

Fuel which spills onto the ground can beignited.

Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star-ting to refuel.

Never carry an activated mobile phonewhen refuelling. The ring signal could causespark build-up and ignite petrol fumes,leading to fire and injury.

IMPORTANT

Mixing different types of fuel or the use offuel not recommended invalidates Volvo'sguarantees, and any associated serviceagreement. This applies to all engines.NOTE: It does not apply to cars with enginesthat are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85).

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, driving with atrailer or driving at high altitudes in combi-nation with fuel grade are factors that couldaffect the car's performance.

Catalytic converters

The purpose of the catalytic converters is topurify exhaust gases. They are located close tothe engine so that operating temperature isreached quickly.

The catalytic converters consist of a monolith(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channelwalls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho-dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts,i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem-ical reaction without being used up them-selves.

Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor

The Lambda-sond is part of a control systemintended to reduce emissions and improve fueleconomy.

An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen contentof the exhaust gases leaving the engine. Thisvalue is fed into an electronic system that con-tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuelto air directed to the engine is continuouslyadjusted. These adjustments create optimalconditions for efficient combustion, andtogether with the three-way catalytic converterreduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, car-bon monoxide and nitrous oxides).

Petrol

Petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard. Mostengines can be run with octane ratings of 95and 98 RON. Only in exceptional cases should91 RON be used.

• 95 RON can be used for normal driving.

• 98 RON is recommended for optimum per-formance and minimum fuel consumption.

When driving in temperatures above +38 °C,fuel with the highest possible octane rating isrecommended for optimum performance andfuel economy.


Fuel

07

285

IMPORTANT

• Always refuel with unleaded petrol so asnot to damage the catalytic converter.

• Do not use additives not recommendedby Volvo.

Bioethanol E85

Do not modify the fuel system or its compo-nents, and do not replace components withparts that are not specifically designed for usewith bioethanol.

WARNING

Methanol must not be used. A decal on theinside of the fuel filler flap shows the correctalternative fuel.

The use of components not designed forbioethanol engines could cause fire, injuryor engine damage.

Reserve fuel can

The reserve fuel can should be filled with petrol,see the NOTE box, page 114.

IMPORTANT

Make sure the reserve fuel can is securelyfastened and that its cap is sealed.

WARNING

Ethanol is sensitive to sparks, and explosivegases could form in the reserve fuel can if itis refuelled with ethanol.

Diesel

Only use diesel fuel from well-known produc-ers. Never use diesel of dubious quality. Dieselshould fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204 stand-ards. Diesel engines are sensitive to contami-nants in the fuel, such as excessively high vol-umes of sulphur particles for example.

At low temperatures (-6 °C to -40 °C), a paraffinprecipitate may form in the diesel fuel, whichmay lead to ignition problems. Special dieselfuel designed for low temperatures aroundfreezing point is available from the major oilcompanies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem-peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre-cipitate.

The risk of condensation in the fuel tank isreduced if the tank is kept well filled. When

refuelling, check that the area around the fuelfiller pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto thepaintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-gent and water.

IMPORTANT

Only ever use fuel that fulfils the Europeandiesel standard.

The sulphur content must be a maximum of50 ppm.

IMPORTANT

Diesel type fuels that must not be used:

• Special additives

• Marine diesel fuel

• Heating oil

• FAME1 (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) andvegetable oil.

These fuels do not fulfil the requirements inaccordance with Volvo recommendationsand generate increased wear and enginedamage that is not covered by the Volvowarranty.

Empty tank

The design of the fuel system in a diesel enginemeans that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of FAME, but further amounts must not be added.


Fuel

07


tank may need to be vented in the workshop inorder to restart the engine after fuelling.

Once the engine has stopped due to fuel star-vation, the fuel system needs a few momentsto carry out a check. Do this before starting theengine, once the fuel tank has been filled withdiesel:

1. Insert the remote control key in the ignitionswitch and push it in to the end position(see page 76).

2. Press the START button without depress-ing the brake and/or clutch pedal.

3. Wait approx. 1 minute.4. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/

or clutch pedal and then press theSTART button again.

NOTE

Before filling with fuel in the event of fuelshortage:

• Stop the car on as flat/level ground aspossible - if the car is tilting there is arisk of air pockets in the fuel supply.

Draining condensation from the fuel filter

The fuel filter separates condensation from thefuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera-tion.

The fuel filter must be drained at the intervalsspecified in the Service and Warranty Bookletor if you suspect that the car has been filledwith contaminated fuel.

IMPORTANT

Certain special additives remove the waterseparation in the fuel filter.

Diesel particle filter (DPF)

Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,which results in more efficient emission con-trol. The particles in the exhaust gases are col-lected in the filter during normal driving. So-called "regeneration" is started in order to burnaway the particles and empty the filter. Thisrequires the engine to have reached normaloperating temperature.

Regeneration of the filter is automatic and nor-mally takes 10-20 minutes. It may take a littlelonger at a low average speed. Fuel consump-tion may increase slightly during regeneration.

Regeneration in cold weather

If the car is frequently driven short distances incold weather then the engine does not reachnormal operating temperature. This means thatregeneration of the diesel particle filter doesnot take place and the filter is not emptied.

When the filter has become approximately80% full of particles, a warning triangle on theinstrument panel illuminates, and the messageSoot filter full See manual is shown on theinstrument panel display.

Start regeneration of the filter by driving the caruntil the engine reaches normal operating tem-perature, preferably on a main road or motor-way. The car should then be driven for approx-imately 20 minutes more.

NOTE

A smaller reduction of engine power may benoticed temporarily during regeneration.

When regeneration is complete the warningtext is cleared automatically.

Use the parking heater* in cold weather so thatthe engine reaches normal operating tempera-ture more quickly.

IMPORTANT

If the filter fills up with particles then it canbe difficult to start the engine and the filterwill be incapable of functioning. Then thereis a risk that the filter will have to bereplaced.


Fuel

07

287

Fuel consumption and emissions ofcarbon dioxide

Fuel consumption figures may change if the caris equipped with extra equipment that affectsthe car's weight. See information on weightspage 365 and table page 376.

The manner in which the car is driven, andother non-technical factors can also affect fuelconsumption.

Consumption is higher and power output lowerfor fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, driving with atrailer or driving at high altitudes in combi-nation with fuel grade are factors that couldaffect the car's performance.


Loading

07

288

General information on loading

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. Thetotal of the weight of the passengers and allaccessories reduces the car's payload by acorresponding weight. For more detailed infor-mation on weights, see page 365.

The boot lid is opened via a button onthe lighting panel or the remote con-

trol key, see page 57.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics changedepending on the weight and distribution ofthe load.

To bear in mind when loading

• Position the load firmly against the rearseat's backrest.

Note that objects must not prevent the functionof the WHIPS system for the front seats if anyof the rear seat's backrests is folded down,seepage 27.

• Centre the load.

• Heavy objects should be placed as low aspossible. Avoid placing heavy loads onlowered backrests.

• Cover sharp edges with something soft toavoid damaging the upholstery.

• Secure all loads to the load retaining eye-lets with straps or web lashings.

WARNING

A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in afrontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carrythe impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.

WARNING

The protection provided by the inflatablecurtain in the headlining may be compro-mised or eliminated by high loads.

• Never load cargo above the backrest.

WARNING

Always secure the load. During heavy brak-ing the load may otherwise shift, causinginjury to the car's occupants.

Cover sharp edges and sharp corners withsomething soft.

Switch off the engine and apply the parkingbrake when loading/unloading long items.Otherwise you may accidentally knock thegear lever or gear selector with the load intoa drive position - and the car could thenmove off.

Front seat

The passenger seat backrest can also befolded for an extra long load, see page 78.

Roof load

Using load carriers

To avoid damaging the car and for maximumpossible safety while driving, the load carriersdesigned by Volvo are recommended.

Carefully follow the installation instructionssupplied with the carriers.

• Check periodically that the load carriersand load are properly secured. Lash theload securely with retaining straps.

• Distribute the load evenly over the loadcarriers. Put the heaviest objects at thebottom.

• The size of the area exposed to the wind,and therefore fuel consumption, increasewith the size of the load.

• Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,heavy braking and hard cornering.

WARNING

The car's centre of gravity and driving cha-racteristics are altered by roof loads. Forinformation on maximum permitted roofload, including load carriers and any spacebox, see page 365.


Loading

07


Lowering the rear seat backrest

If the rear seat backrest needs to be lowered,see page 80.

Load retaining eyelets

The folding load retaining eyelets1 are used tofasten straps in order to anchor items in thecargo area.

WARNING

Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects that areloose or protrude could cause injury duringheavy braking. Always secure large andheavy objects with a seatbelt or cargoretaining straps.

Bag holder*

Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor.

The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place andprevents them from overturning and spreadingtheir contents across the cargo area.

1. Fold up the holder, which is part of the floorhatch.

2. Fasten the bags with strap and secure thecarrying handle in the hooks.

1 Number of eyes and their location varies depending on market.


Loading

07


12 V electrical socket*

Raise the cover to access the electrical socket.

• The socket also provides voltage when theremote control key is not in the ignitionswitch.

IMPORTANT

Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W).

NOTE

Remember that using the electrical socketwith the engine switched off involves therisk of discharging the car's battery.

NOTE

The compressor for temporary emergencypuncture repair has been tested andapproved by Volvo. For information on theuse of Volvo's recommended temporaryemergency puncture repair (TMK), seepage 315.


Cargo area

07

291

Ski hatch

The hatch in the backrest can be opened totransport long narrow items.

Fold the right-hand backrest forward.

Release the hatch in the rear seat backrestby sliding the bolt up while pressing thehatch down/forward.

Fold back the backrest with the hatchopen.

Use the seatbelt to prevent the load from mov-ing.

WARNING

Stop the engine and apply the parking brakewhen loading and unloading. Otherwise thegear lever/selector can accidentally beknocked and moved to a driving position.

Removing the hatch

After the hatch has been released and thebackrest folded backwards, open the hatchapprox. 30 degrees and pull it straight up.

Attaching the hatch

Refit the hatch in the grooves behind theupholstery and close the hatch.


Driving with a trailer

07


General

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. Thetotal of the weight of the passengers and allaccessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car'spayload by a corresponding weight. For moredetailed information on weights, seepage 365.

If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, thenthe car is delivered with the necessary equip-ment for driving with a trailer.

• The car's towing bracket must be of anapproved type.

• If the towbar is retrofitted, check with yourVolvo dealer that the car is fully equippedfor driving with a trailer.

• Distribute the load on the trailer so that theweight on the towing bracket complieswith the specified maximum towball load.

• Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-mended pressure for a full load. For tyrepressure label location, see page 311.

• The engine is loaded more heavily thanusual when driving with a trailer.

• Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car isbrand new. Wait until it has been driven atleast 1000 km.

• The brakes are loaded much more thanusual on long and steep downhill slopes.Downshift to a lower gear and adjust yourspeed.

• For safety reasons, the maximum permit-ted speed for the car when coupled with atrailer should not be exceeded. Follow theregulations in force for the permittedspeeds and weights.

• Maintain a low speed when driving with atrailer up long, steep ascents.

• Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines ofmore than 12%.

Trailer cable

An adapter is required if the car's towingbracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approvedby Volvo. Make sure the cable does not dragon the ground.

Direction indicators and brake lights on

the trailer

If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indica-tors are broken, then the combined instrumentpanel's symbol for direction indicators flashesfaster than normal and the display shows thetext Bulb fail - Ind. signal trailer.

If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake lightare broken then the Bulb fail - Stop lamp

trailer text is shown.

Level control*

The rear shock absorbers maintain a constantheight irrespective of the car's load (up to themaximum permissible weight). When the car is

stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,which is normal.

Trailer weights

For information on Volvo's permitted trailerweights, see page 366.

NOTE

The stated maximum permitted trailerweights are those permitted by Volvo.National vehicle regulations can further limittrailer weights and speeds. Towbars can becertified for higher towing weights than thecar can actually tow.

WARNING

Follow the stated recommendations fortrailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailermay be difficult to control in the event ofsudden movement and braking.

Manual gearbox

Overheating

When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hotclimate there may be a risk of overheating.

• Do not run the engine at higher revolutionsthan 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm)- otherwise the oil temperature maybecome too high.



07

293

Diesel engine 5-cyl

• In the event of a risk of overheating theoptimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000rpm for optimal circulation of the coolant.

Automatic gearbox

Overheating

When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hotclimate there may be a risk of overheating.

• An automatic gearbox selects the optimumgear related to load and engine speed.

• In the event of overheating a warning sym-bol illuminates on the instrument panelcombined with a text message - follow therecommendation given.

Steep inclines

• Do not lock the automatic transmission ina higher gear than the engine "can copewith" - it is not always a good idea to driveat a high gear with low engine revolutions.

IMPORTANT

See also the specific information on slowdriving with trailer for cars with thePowershift automatic transmission on page121.

Parking on a hill

1. Depress the foot brake.

2. Activate the parking brake.

3. Move the gear selector to position P.

4. Release the foot brake.

• Move the gear selector to park position Pwhen parking an automatic car with ahitched trailer. Always use the parkingbrake.

• Block the wheels with chocks when park-ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.

Starting on a hill

1. Depress the foot brake.

2. Move the gear selector to driving posi-tion D.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.

Towing bracket

If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar,the installation instructions for the loose sec-tion must be followed carefully, see page 295.

WARNING

If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachabletowbar:

• Follow the installation instructions care-fully.

• The detachable section must be lockedwith the key before setting off.

• Check that the indicator window showsgreen.

Important checks

• The towbar's towball must be cleaned andgreased regularly.

NOTE

If a towball hitch with vibration damper isused, it is not necessary to grease the tow-ball.



07

294

Storing the detachable towbar

Towbar storage space.

IMPORTANT

Always remove the towbar after use andstore it in the appointed location in the car.

Specifications

G02

1485

Dimensions, mounting points (mm)

A 998

B 80

C 854

D 427

E 109

F 282

G Side member

H Ball centre



07

��

295

Attaching the towbar

G01

8928

Remove the protective cover by first press-ing in the catch and then pulling thecover straight back .

G02

1487

Ensure that the mechanism is in theunlocked position by turning the key clock-wise.

G02

1488

The indicator window must show red.

G02

1489

Insert the towbar until you hear a click.

G02

1490

The indicator window must show green.

G00

0000

Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi-tion. Remove the key from the lock.



07

296

G02

1494

Check that the towbar is secure by pullingit up, down and back.

WARNING

If the towbar is not fitted correctly then itmust be detached and reattached inaccordance with the previous instructions.

IMPORTANT

Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,the remainder of the towbar should be cleanand dry.

G02

1495

Safety cable.

WARNING

Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable tothe correct place.

Removing the towbar

Insert the key and turn it clockwise to theunlocked position.

Push in the locking wheel and turn itanticlockwise until you hear a click.

Turn the locking wheel down fully, until itcomes to a stop. Hold it in this positionwhile pulling the towbar rearward andupward.

WARNING

Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in thecar, see page 294.



07


G01

8929

Push the protective cover until it snapstight.

Trailer Stability Assist - TSA*

The TSA system (Trailer Stability Assist) servesto stabilise the car and trailer combination if itbegins to snake.

The TSA function is part of the DSTC system(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control), seepage 142.

Function

The snaking phenomenon can occur with anycar/trailer combination. Normally, snakingoccurs at extremely high speeds. But, there isa risk of it occurring at lower speeds(70-90 km/h) if the trailer is overloaded or theload is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.

In order for snaking to occur, there must be atriggering factor, e.g.:

• Car with trailer subjected to a sudden andpowerful side wind.

• Car with trailer drives on an uneven roadsurface or in a pothole.

• Sweeping steering wheel movements.

Operation

If snaking has started, it could be difficult oreven impossible to suppress. This makes thecar/trailer combination difficult to control andthere is a risk that you could, for example, endup in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway.

TSA system continually monitors car move-ments, particularly lateral movements. If snak-ing is detected, the front wheels are individuallybraked. This serves to stabilise the car/trailercombination. This is often enough to help thedriver regain control of the car.

If snaking is not eliminated the first time theTSA system comes into action, the car/trailercombination is braked with all wheels andengine power is reduced. Once snaking hasbeen gradually suppressed and the car/trailercombination is once again stable, the TSA sys-tem stops regulating and the driver once againhas full control of the car.

Miscellaneous

The TSA system can engage within the speedinterval 60 to 160 km/h.

NOTE

TSA function is switched off if the driverselects Sport mode, see page 142.

TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses severesteering wheel movements to try to rectify thesnaking because in such a situation the TSAsystem cannot determine whether it is thetrailer or the driver that is causing the snaking.

The DSTC symbol in the combinedinstrument panel flashes when the

TSA is working.


Towing and recovery

07

298

Towing

Find out the statutory maximum speed limit fortowing before towing begins.

1. Unlock the steering lock by inserting theremote control key in the ignition switchand giving a long press on the START/

STOP ENGINE button - key position II isactivated, see page 76 for more informa-tion on key positions.

2. The remote control key must remain in theignition switch while the car is being towed.

3. Keep the towline taut when the towingvehicle reduces speed by holding your footgently pressed on the brake pedal -thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.

4. Be prepared to brake to stop.

WARNING

• Check that the steering lock is unlockedbefore towing.

• The remote control key must be in keyposition II - in position I all airbags aredeactivated.

• Never remove the remote control keyfrom the ignition switch when the car isbeing towed.

WARNING

The brake servo and power steering do notwork when the engine is switched off - thebrake pedal needs to be depressedabout 5 times more heavily and the steeringis considerably heavier than normal.

Manual gearbox

Prior to towing:

– Move gear lever into neutral and releasethe parking brake.

Automatic gearbox Geartronic

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be towed withthe wheels rolling forward.

• Cars with automatic gearbox must notbe towed at speeds above 80 km/h orfurther than 80 km.

Prior to towing:

– Move the gear selector to position N andrelease the parking brake.

Automatic gearbox Powershift

The model with Powershift transmissionshould not be towed as it is dependent on theengine running in order to receive sufficient

lubrication. If towing still has to take place, theroute must be as short as possible and thenwith very low speed.

In the event of uncertainty as to whether or notthe car is equipped with Powershift transmis-sion, this can be verified by checking the des-ignation on the transmission's label under thebonnet - see page 362. The designa-tion ”MPS6” means that it is Powershift – trans-mission otherwise it is Geartronic automatictransmission.

IMPORTANT

Avoid towing.

• However, the car can be towed for ashort distance at low speed to move itfrom a dangerous position - not furtherthan 10 km and not faster than10 km/h. Note that the car must alwaysbe towed with the wheels rolling for-ward.

• In the event of moving a longer distancethan 10 km, the car must be transportedwith the drive wheels raised from theroad - professional recovery is recom-mended.

Prior to towing:

– Move the gear selector to position N andrelease the parking brake.


Towing and recovery

07

299

Jump starting

Do not tow the car to bump start the engine.Use a donor battery if the battery is dischargedand the engine does not start, see page 116.

IMPORTANT

The catalytic converter may be damagedduring attempts to tow-start the engine.

Towing eye

The towing eye is screwed into a threadedsocket behind a cover on the right-hand sideof the bumper, front or rear.

Attaching the towing eye

Remove the front and rear covers.

Take out the towing eye that is locatedunder the floor hatch in the cargo area.

The cover for the towing eye's attachmentpoint is available in two variants whichmust be opened in different ways:

• Open the variant with a recess using acoin or similar inserted in the recess,turning it outwards. Then turn out thecover completely and remove it.

• The second variant has a marking alongone side or in a corner: Press the mark-ing with a finger and fold out the oppo-site side/corner at the same time usinga coin or similar - the cover turns aroundits axis and can then be removed.

Screw the towing eye right in up to itsflange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g.using the wheel wrench.

After use, unscrew the towing eye andreturn it to its place.

Finish by refitting the cover onto thebumper.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye is only designed for towingon roads - not for pulling the car unstuck orout of a ditch. Call a recovery service forrecovery assistance.

NOTE

On certain cars with towbar fitted the towingeye cannot be attached in the rear bracket.Attach the towrope in the towbar.

For this reason it is advisable to store thedetachable towbar's towball in the car.


Towing and recovery

07

300

Recovery

Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be transpor-ted with the wheels rolling forward.

• An All Wheel Drive car (AWD) with raisedfront suspension must not be towed atspeeds above 70 km/h. It should not betowed further than 50 km.


07

301


General ................................................................................................. 304Changing wheels .................................................................................. 308Tyre pressure ....................................................................................... 311Warning triangle and first-aid kit*.......................................................... 312Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*........................................................ 313Emergency puncture repair (TMK) ....................................................... 315

WHEELS AND TYRES

08 Wheels and tyres

General

08

304

Driving characteristics

Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte-ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pres-sure and speed rating are important for how thecar performs.

Direction of rotation

G02

1778

The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.

Tyres with a tread pattern which are designedto only turn in one direction have the directionof rotation marked with an arrow. The tyre mustalways rotate in the same direction throughoutits lifespan. Tyres should only be switchedbetween front and rear positions, neverbetween left and right-hand sides, or viceversa. If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car'sbraking characteristics and capacity to forcerain and slush out of the way are adverselyaffected.

Tyres with the greatest tread depth shouldalways be fitted to the rear of the car (todecrease the risk of skidding).

NOTE

Ensure that tyres of the same type anddimensions, and also the same make, arefitted to all four wheels.

Follow the recommended tyre pressuresspecified in the tyre pressure table, seepage 380.

Tyre care

Tyre age

All tyres older than 6 years old should bechecked by an expert even if they seemundamaged. Tyres age and decompose, evenif they are hardly ever or never used. The func-tion can therefore be affected. This applies toall tyres that are stored for future use. Exam-ples of external signs which indicate that thetyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discol-oration.

New tyres

Tyres are perishable. After a few years theybegin to harden at the same time as the frictioncapacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate.For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres aspossible when you replace them. This is espe-cially important with regard to winter tyres. Thelast four digits in the sequence mean the weekand year of manufacture. This is the tyre'sDOT marking (Department of Transportation),and this is stated with four digits, for example1510. The tyre in the illustration was manufac-tured in week 15 of 2010.

Summer and winter tyres

When summer and winter wheels are changedthe wheels should be marked with which sideof the car they were mounted on, for exampleL for left and R for right.

08 Wheels and tyres

General

08


Wear and maintenance

The correct tyre pressure results in more evenwear, see page 311. Driving style, tyre pres-sure, climate and road condition affect howquickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif-ferences in tread depth and to prevent wearpatterns arising, the front and rear wheels canbe switched with each other. A suitable dis-tance for the first change is approx. 5000 kmand then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recom-mends that you contact an authorised Volvoworkshop for checking if you are uncertainabout tread depth. If significant differences inwear (>1 mm difference in tread depth)between tyres have already occurred, the leastworn tyres must always be placed on the rear.Understeer is normally easier to correct thanoversteer, and leads to the car continuing for-wards in a straight line rather than having therear end skidding to one side, resulting in pos-sible complete loss of control over the car. Thisis why it is important for the rear wheels neverto lose grip before the front wheels.

Wheels should be stored lying down or hangingup - and not standing up.

WARNING

A damaged tyre can lead to loss of controlof the car.

Tyres with tread wear indicators

G02

1829

Tread wear indicators.

Tread wear indicators are narrow treadlessbands across the width of the tread. On theside of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread WearIndicator). When the tyre's tread depth is downto 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in heightwith the tread wear indicators. Change to newtyres as soon as possible. Remember thattyres with little tread depth provide very poorgrip in rain and snow.

Rims and wheel bolts

IMPORTANT

The wheel bolts must be tightened to140 Nm. Overtightening can damage thenuts and the bolts.

Only use rims that are tested and approved byVolvo and which are Volvo genuine accesso-ries. Check the torque with a torque wrench.

Locking wheel bolts*

Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both alu-minium and steel rims. Under the cargo areafloor there is space for the sleeve for the lock-able wheel bolts.

Tools

Located under the cargo area floor are thecar's towing eye, jack* and wheel wrench*.There is also space for the sleeve for the lock-able wheel bolts.

08 Wheels and tyres

General

08


Jack*

The original jack should only be used forchanging to the spare wheel. The jack's threadmust always be well greased.

Tools - returning into place

G02

9336

The tools and jack* must be returned to theircorrect places after use. The jack needs to becranked together to the correct position inorder to have space.

IMPORTANT

The tools and jack* must be stored in theintended location in the car's cargo areawhen not in use.

Winter tyres

Volvo recommends winter tyres with particulardimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependenton engine variant. When driving on winter tyres,the correct type of tyres must be fitted to allfour wheels.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvodealer about which wheel rim and tyre typesare most suitable.

Studded tyres

Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for500-1000 km so the studs settle properly intothe tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially thestuds, a longer service life.

NOTE

The legal provisions for the use of studdedtyres vary from country to country.

Tread depth

Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-peratures place considerably higher demandson tyres than summer conditions. Volvo there-fore recommends not to drive on winter tyresthat have a tread depth of less than 4 millime-tres.

Using snow chains

Snow chains may only be used on the frontwheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).

Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snowchains. Avoid driving on bare ground as thiswears out both the snow chains and tyres.

WARNING

Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva-lent chains designed for the car model, andtyre and rim dimensions. In the event ofuncertainty Volvo recommends that youconsult an authorised Volvo workshop. Thewrong snow chains may cause seriousdamage to your car and lead to an accident.

Specifications

The car has whole vehicle approval. Thismeans that certain combinations of wheels andtyres are approved. For the permissible com-binations, see page 380

Wheel (rim) dimensions

Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimen-sions, for example: 7Jx16x50.

7 Rim width in inches

J Rim flange profile

08 Wheels and tyres

General

08

307

16 Rim diameter ininches

50 Off-set in mm (dis-tance from wheelcentre to wheel con-tact surface againstthe hub)

Tyre dimensions

The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.Example of designation: 215/55R16 97W.

215 Tyre width (mm)

55 Ratio between tyre wall height andtyre width (%)

R Radial ply

16 Rim diameter in inches (")

97 Codes for the maximum permittedtyre load, tyre load index (LI)

W Speed rating for maximum permittedspeed, speed rating (SS). (In this case270 km/h).

Load index

Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load,a load index (LI). The car's weight determinesthe load capacity required of the tyres. Mini-

mum permitted index is specified in the table,see page 380.

Speed ratings

Each tyre can withstand a certain maximumspeed, a speed rating (Speed Symbol; SS).

Tyre speed class must at least correspond withthe car's top speed. Minimum permitted speedrating is specified in the table, see page 380.

The only exception to these conditions is win-ter tyres (both those with metal studs and thosewithout), where a lower speed rating may beused. If such a tyre is chosen, the car must notbe driven faster than the speed rating of thetyre (for example, class Q can be driven at amaximum of 160 km/h).

Traffic regulations determine how fast a carcan be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.

NOTE

It is the maximum permitted speed that isstated in the table.

Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)

T 190 km/h

H 210 km/h

V 240 km/h

W 270 km/h

Y 300 km/h

WARNING

The car must be fitted with tyres which havethe same or a higher load index (LI) andspeed rating (SS) than specified. If a tyrewith too low a load index or speed rating isused, it may overheat.

08 Wheels and tyres

Changing wheels

08


Spare wheel*

The following instructions are applicable

only if a spare wheel has been purchased as

an optional extra with the car. If the car doesnot have a spare wheel, see page 315 for infor-mation on temporary tyre sealing (TMK).

The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is onlyintended for use temporarily and must bereplaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as pos-sible. The car's handling may be altered by theuse of the spare wheel. The spare wheel issmaller than the normal wheel. The car'sground clearance is affected accordingly. Payattention to high kerbs and do not machinewash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on thefront axle, you cannot use snow chains at thesame time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive onthe rear axle can be disconnected. The sparewheel must not be repaired. The correct tyrepressure for the spare wheel is stated in thetyre pressure table, see page 380.

IMPORTANT

Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a sparewheel on the car.

IMPORTANT

The car must never be driven fitted withmore than one temporary spare wheel.

The spare wheel is supplied in a bag whichmust be placed on the cargo area floor in thecargo area and be secured with straps.

Cars with two load retaining eyelets.

Turn the handle on the spare wheel bag intowards the rear seat. Attach the sewn-in ten-sioning strap hooks in the load retaining eye-lets. Attach the long strap into one of the loadretaining eyelets, run the strap around thespare wheel and through the lower handle.Tighten the short tensioning strap onto the longone. Attach the second load retaining eyeletand tighten.

Cars with four load retaining eyelets.

Turn the handle on the spare wheel bag outtowards you. Attach the sewn-in tensioningstrap hooks in the front load retaining eyelets.Attach the long strap into one of the front loadretaining eyelets, run the strap diagonally overthe spare wheel and through the upper handle.Tighten the short tensioning strap onto the longone. Attach the rear load retaining eyelet andtighten.

Taking out the spare wheel

1. Loosen the straps, lift out the spare wheelfrom the cargo area and remove it from thespare wheel bag.

2. Fold up the cargo area floor.

3. Lift the tools and jack out from the foamblock.

08 Wheels and tyres

Changing wheels

08


Removing

Set up the warning triangle, see page 312 if awheel must be replaced at a busy location. Thecar and jack* must be on a firm horizontal sur-face.

1. Apply the parking brake and engagereverse gear, or position P if the car has anautomatic gearbox.

WARNING

Check that the jack is not damaged, that thethreads are thoroughly lubricated and that itis free from dirt.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack* thatbelongs to the car model in question, whichis indicated on the jack's label.

The label also indicates the jack's maximumlift capacity at a specified minimum liftingheight.

2. Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* andremoval tool for wheel covers* locatedunder the cargo floor in the cargo area. Ifanother jack is selected, see page 322.

3. Place chocks in front of and behind thewheels which will remain on the ground.

Use heavy wooden blocks or large stonesfor example.

4. Cars with steel rims have removable wheelcovers. Use the removal tool to hook in andpull off any full-wheel wheel covers. Alter-natively, the wheel covers can be pulledaway by hand.

5. Screw together the towing eye with thewheel wrench* until the stop position asillustrated below.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye must be screwed into allthreads in the wheel bolt wrench.

6. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anticlock-wise with the wheel wrench.

WARNING

Never position anything between theground and the jack, nor between the jackand the car's jacking point.

7. There are two jacking points on each sideof the car. There is a recess in the plasticcover at each point. Crank the foot of the

08 Wheels and tyres

Changing wheels

08

310

jack down so it is pressed squarely on theground.

IMPORTANT

The ground must be firm, smooth and level.

8. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.Remove the wheel bolts and lift off thewheel.

Installation

1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheeland hub.

2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel boltsthoroughly.

3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannotrotate.

4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It isimportant that the wheel bolts are tight-ened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Checkthe torque with a torque wrench.

5. Refit any full wheel covers.

NOTE

The wheel cover outlet for the valve must bepositioned over the valve on the wheel rimduring fitting.

WARNING

Never crawl under the car when it is raisedon the jack.

Passengers must leave the car when it israised on the jack.

Park the car so that passengers have the car- or preferably a crash barrier - betweenthem and the road.

NOTE

The car's regular jack is designed only foruse occasionally and for a short time, suchas when changing a wheel with a puncturedtyre, switching between summer tyres andwinter tyres, etc. Only the jack belonging tothe specific model is to be used to jack upthe car. If the car is to be jacked up moreoften, or for a longer time than is requiredjust to change a wheel, use of a garage jackis recommended. In this instance, follow theinstructions for use that come with theequipment.

08 Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressure

08

311

Tyre pressure

G02

1830

The tyre pressure decal on the driver's sidedoor pillar (between frame and rear door)shows which pressures the tyres should haveat different loads and speed conditions. This isalso specified in the tyre pressure table, seepage 380.

• Tyre pressure for the car's recommendedtyre dimension

• ECO pressure1

NOTE

Temperature differences change thetyre pressure.

Fuel economy, ECO pressure

At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyrepressure is recommended (applies for both fullload and light load) in order to obtain optimumfuel economy.

Checking the tyre pressure

The tyre pressures must be checked everymonth.

Check tyre pressures on cold tyres. "Coldtyres" means the tyres are the same tempera-ture as the ambient temperature. After severalkilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and thepressure increases.

Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con-sumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairsthe car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyrepressure that is too low could result in the tyresoverheating and being damaged. Tyre pres-sure affects travelling comfort, road noise andsteering characteristics.

NOTE

Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is anatural phenomenon. Tyre pressure alsovaries depending on ambient temperature.

1 ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.

08 Wheels and tyres

Warning triangle and first-aid kit*

08


Warning triangle The warning triangle is fitted on the inside ofthe boot lid with two clips.

Detach the warning triangle case by pullingboth of the snap latches outwards.

Take the warning triangle from the case,fold out and assemble the two loose sides.

Fold out the warning triangle's supportlegs.

Follow the regulations for the use of a warningtriangle. Position the warning triangle in a suit-able place with regard to traffic.

Ensure the warning triangle and its case areproperly secured in the cargo area after use.

First aid kit*

A case with first aid equipment is located in thecargo area.

08 Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*

08


General

TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)*warns the driver when the pressure is too lowin one or more of the car's tyres. It uses sensorslocated inside the air valve in each wheel.When the car is driven at about 40 km/h thesystem detects the tyre pressure. If the pres-sure is too low then a warning lamp on theinstrument panel illuminates and a message isshown on the display.

Only factory fitted wheels are equipped withTPMS sensors in the valves.

If wheels without TPMS sensors are used thenTyre press. syst Service required will beshown every time the car is driven faster than40 km/h for more than 10 minutes.

Always check the system after changing awheel in order to ensure that replacementwheels work with the system.

For information on correct tyre pressures, seepage 380.

The system does not replace normal tyre main-tenance.

IMPORTANT

If a fault should arise in the tyre pressuresystem a warning lamp on the instru-ment panel will illuminate and a messagewill be shown. This can be for various rea-sons, e.g. fitting a wheel not equipped witha sensor adapted for Volvo's tyre pressuremonitoring system.

Adjusting tyre pressure monitoring

Tyre pressure monitoring can be adjusted inorder to follow Volvo's tyre pressure recom-mendations, when driving with a heavy load forexample.

NOTE

The engine must not be running when thetyres are calibrated.

The settings are made with the control in thecentre console, see page 199.

1. Inflate the tyres to the required pressureand select key position I or II.

2. Select the menu system MY CAR to openthe menus to Settings Tyre pressure

3. Select Calibrate tyre pressure.

4. Press OK.

5. Start the car and drive at least at 40 km/hfor a total of at least 1 minute and checkthat the message disappears.> Calibration is complete.

Rectifying low tyre pressure

If a message for low tyre pressure is shown inthe display:

1. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres.

2. Inflate the tyre(s) to the correct pressure.

3. Drive at least at 40 km/h for a total of atleast 1 minute and check that the messagedisappears.

Deactivating/activating tyre pressure

monitoring

NOTE

The engine must not be running when tyrepressure monitoring is activated/deacti-vated.

The settings are made with the control in thecentre console, see page 199.

1. Select key position I or II.

2. Select the system MY CAR to open themenus to Car settings Tyre pressure

3. Select Tyre pressure system and pressOK.

08 Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*

08


> A X is shown in the display if the systemis activated, the option disappears if thesystem is deactivated.

Recommendations

• Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors arefitted to all wheels on the car.

• Volvo recommends that sensors are notmoved between different wheels.

WARNING

When inflating a tyre equipped with TPMS,hold the nozzle of the pump directly againstthe valve to avoid damaging the valve.

Driveable punctured tyres*

If Self Supporting run flat Tyres (SST)* havebeen selected then the car is also equippedwith TPMS.

This type of tyre has a specially reinforced sidewall that makes continued driving possible toa limited extent despite the tyre losing all orsome of its pressure. These tyres are fitted ona special rim. (Normal tyres can also be fittedto this rim).

If an SST tyre loses tyre pressure then the yel-low TPMS lamp on the instrument panel illumi-nates and a message is shown in the textpanel. If this occurs, reduce speed to

max. 80 km/h. The tyre must be replaced assoon as possible.

Drive carefully, in some cases it can be difficultto see which tyre is faulty. In order to establishwhich tyre needs attention, check all four tyres.

WARNING

SST tyres should only be fitted by individu-als with expertise on SST tyres.

SST tyres must only be fitted together withTPMS.

After a fault message on low tyre pressurehas been shown, do not drive faster than80 km/h.

Maximum driving distance to tyre change is80 km.

Avoid hard driving such as sudden brakingor turning.

SST tyres must be replaced if they are dam-aged or punctured.

08 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair (TMK)

08

315

General

Emergency puncture repair (TMK; TemporaryMobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture andcheck and adjust tyre pressure. It consists of acompressor and a bottle with sealing fluid. Thekit works as a temporary repair. The sealingfluid bottle must be replaced before its expira-tion date and after use.

The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc-tured in the tread.

NOTE

The emergency puncture repair kit is onlyintended for sealing tyres with a puncture inthe tread.

The emergency puncture repair kit has limitedcapacity to seal tyres which have punctures in

the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergencypuncture repair kit if they have larger slits,cracks or similar damage.

Connect the compressor to one of the car's 12V sockets, see pages 225 and 290. Choose theelectrical socket that is nearest the puncturedtyre.

IMPORTANT

If the compressor for emergency puncturerepair is connected to one of the two sock-ets in the tunnel console, see page 225, noother current consumer must be connectedto the other one.

NOTE

The compressor for temporary emergencypuncture repair has been tested andapproved by Volvo.

Location of the emergency puncture

repair kit

Set up the warning triangle if a tyre is beingsealed in a trafficked location. The emergencypuncture repair kit is located under the floor inthe cargo area.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than 80 km/hafter the emergency tyre repair kit has beenused. Volvo recommends that you visit anauthorised Volvo workshop for inspection ofthe sealed tyre (maximum driving distanceis 200 km). The staff there can determinewhether or not the tyre can be repaired or ifit needs to be replaced.

Overview

Label, maximum permitted speed

Switch

Cable

Bottle holder (orange cap)

Protective cap

08 Wheels and tyres


08

316

Pressure reducing valve

Air hose

Sealing fluid bottle

Pressure gauge

Sealing punctured tyres

G01

4338

For information on the function of the parts, seepreceding illustration.

1. Open the lid of the emergency puncturerepair kit.

2. Detach the label for maximum permittedspeed and affix it to the steering wheel.

WARNING

The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In thecase of contact with skin, wash away thefluid with soap and water.

3. Check that the switch is in position 0 andlocate the cable and the air hose.

NOTE

Do not break the bottle's seal before use.The seal is broken automatically when thebottle is screwed in.

4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew thebottle's stopper.

5. Screw the bottle into its holder.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equippedwith a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screwin the air hose valve connection to the bot-tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket andstart the car.

08 Wheels and tyres


08

317

NOTE

If the compressor is connected to one of thetwo 12 V sockets, in the tunnel console, noother current consumer must be connectedto the other one.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car withoutsupervision when the engine is running.

8. Flick the switch to position I.

WARNING

Never stand next to the tyre when the com-pressor is running. If cracks or unevennessarise then the compressor must beswitched off immediately. The journeyshould not be continued. Contacting anauthorised tyre centre is recommended.

NOTE

When the compressor starts, the pressurecan increase up to 6 bar but the pressuredrops after approximately 30 seconds.

9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor mustnot run for more than 10 minutes.

10. Switch off the compressor to check thepressure on the pressure gauge. Minimumpressure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar.(Release air with the pressure reducingvalve if the tyre pressure is too high.)

WARNING

If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the holein the tyre is too big. The journey should notbe continued. Contacting an authorised tyrecentre is recommended.

11. Switch off the compressor and unplug thecable from the 12 V socket.

12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fitthe valve cap.

13. As soon as possible, drive approximately3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h sothat the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.

Rechecking the repair and pressure

1. Reconnect the equipment.

2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressuregauge.

• If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre isinsufficiently sealed. The journey shouldnot be continued. Contact a tyre centre.

• If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3bar, the tyre must be inflated to the pres-sure specified in accordance with thetyre pressure table, see page 380 (1bar=100 kPa). Release air using thepressure reducing valve if the tyre pres-sure is too high.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equippedwith a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

3. Make sure the compressor is switched off.Detach the air hose and cable. Refit thedust cap.

NOTE

The sealing fluid bottle and the hose mustbe replaced after use. Volvo recommendsthat this replacement is performed by anauthorised Volvo workshop.

08 Wheels and tyres


08

318

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure regularly.

Volvo recommends that you drive to the near-est authorised Volvo workshop for the replace-ment/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise theworkshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than 80 km/hafter the emergency tyre repair kit has beenused. Volvo recommends that you visit anauthorised Volvo workshop for inspection ofthe sealed tyre (maximum driving distanceis 200 km). The staff there can determinewhether or not the tyre can be repaired or ifit needs to be replaced.

Inflating the tyres

The car's original tyres can be inflated by thecompressor.

1. The compressor must be switched off.Make sure that the switch is in position 0and locate the cable and air hose.

2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screwin the air hose valve connection to the bot-tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

WARNING

Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result indanger to life. Never leave the engine run-ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf-ficient ventilation.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car withoutsupervision when the engine is running.

3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 Vsockets and start the car.

4. Start the compressor by flicking the switchto position I.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor mustnot run for more than 10 minutes.

5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified inaccordance with the tyre pressure table,see page 380. (Release air using the pres-sure reducing valve if the tyre pressure istoo high.)

6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the airhose and cable.

7. Refit the dust cap.

Replacing the sealing fluid canister

Replace the bottle when the expiration datehas passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-mentally hazardous waste.

WARNING

The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and naturalrubber-latex.

Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergicreaction in the event of skin contact.

Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.

Store out of the reach of children.

08 Wheels and tyres

08

319

320

Engine compartment............................................................................. 322Lamps................................................................................................... 329Wiper blades and washer fluid.............................................................. 335Battery................................................................................................... 337Fuses..................................................................................................... 343Car care................................................................................................ 354

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE


Engine compartment 09

322

General

Volvo service programme

To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi-ble, follow the Volvo service programme asspecified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.Volvo recommends engaging an authorisedVolvo workshop to perform the service andmaintenance work. Volvo workshops have thepersonnel, special tools and service literatureto guarantee the highest quality of service.

IMPORTANT

For the Volvo warranty to apply, check andfollow the instructions in the Service andWarranty Booklet.

Check regularly

Check the following oils and fluids at regularintervals, e.g. when refuelling:

• Coolant

• Engine oil

• Power steering fluid

• Washer fluid

WARNING

Remember that the radiator fan (located atthe front of the engine compartment, behindthe radiator) may start automatically someafter the engine has been switched off.

Always have the engine cleaned by a work-shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine ishot.

Raising the car

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack thatbelongs to the car model in question. If ajack is selected other than the one recom-mended by Volvo, follow the instructions foruse supplied with the equipment.

If the car is raised with a workshop jack; posi-tion the jack against the front edge on theengine's subframe.

Do not damage the splashguard under theengine. Ensure that the workshop jack is posi-tioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack.Always use axle stands or similar.

If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshoplift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms arefixed under the lifting points. See precedingillustration.

Opening and closing the bonnet

The handle for bonnet opening is always on theleft-hand side.



323

Turn the handle about 20-25 degreesclockwise. You will hear when the catchreleases.

Move the catch to the left and open thebonnet. (The catch hook is locatedbetween the headlamp and grille, see illus-tration.)

WARNING

Check that the bonnet locks properly whenclosed.

Engine compartment, overview

The appearance of the engine compartment mayvary depending on engine variant.

Coolant expansion tank

Power steering fluid reservoir

Engine oil dipstick1

Radiator

Filling engine oil

Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid(located on the driver's side)

Battery

Relay and fuse box

Filling washer fluid

Air filter

WARNING

The ignition system has very high voltageand output. The voltage in the ignition sys-tem is highly dangerous. The remote controlkey must always be in 0 position when workis being done in the engine compartment,see page 76.

Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coilwhen the remote control key is in II positionor when the engine is hot.

Checking the engine oil

1 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).



324

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.

When driving under adverse conditions, seepage 370.

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for theengine's service intervals all engines arefilled with a specially adapted syntheticengine oil at the factory. The choice of oilhas been made very carefully with regard toservice life, starting characteristics, fuelconsumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used inorder that the recommended service inter-vals can be applied. Only use a prescribedgrade of oil for both filling and oil change,otherwise you will risk affecting service life,starting characteristics, fuel consumptionand environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribedgrade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.

Volvo uses different systems for warning oflow/high oil level or low/high oil pressure. Cer-tain variants have an oil pressure sensor, andthen the lamp for oil pressure is used. Othervariants have an oil level sensor, and then the

driver is informed via the warning symbol in thecentre of the instrument unit as well as by dis-play texts. Certain models have both variants.Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.

Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord-ance with the intervals specified in the Serviceand Warranty Booklet.

Using oil of a higher than specified grade ispermitted. If the car is driven in adverse con-ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of ahigher grade, see page 370.

For capacities,see page 371 and onwards.

Engine with oil dipstick2

G02

1734

Dipstick and filler pipe.

Checking the oil level in a new car is especiallyimportant before the first scheduled oil change.

Volvo recommends checking the oil level every2 500 km. The most accurate measurementsare made on a cold engine before starting. Themeasurement will be inaccurate if taken imme-diately after the engine is switched off. Thedipstick will indicate that the level is too lowbecause the oil has not had time to flow downinto the oil sump.

G02

1737

The oil level must be between the MIN and MAXmarks.

Measurement and filling if required

1. Ensure that the car is level. After switchingoff the engine it is important to wait

2 Only applies to petrol and 4-cyl. diesel.



325

5 minutes to allow the oil time to run backto the sump.

2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick.

3. Re-insert the dipstick.

4. Pull it out and check the level.

5. If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litresshould be added. If the level is significantlybelow, then an additional amount isrequired.

6. If required, check the level again, do it afterdriving a short distance. Then repeat steps1 - 4.

WARNING

Never fill above the MAX mark. The levelshould never be above MAX or below MINas this could lead to engine damage.

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifolddue to the risk of fire.

Engine with electronic oil level sensor3

Filler pipe.4

You do not need to take action with respect tothe engine oil level before a message is shownin the display, see the illustration below.

Message and graph in the display.

Message

Engine oil level

The oil level is checked using the electronic oillevel gauge with the thumbwheel when theengine is switched off,see page 196.

WARNING

If the message Oil service required isshown, visit a workshop. The oil level maybe too high.

3 Only applies to 5-cyl. diesel.4 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).



326

IMPORTANT

In the event of the message Oil level lowRefill 0.5 Ltr, only fill with 0.5 litres.

NOTE

The oil level is only detected by the systemduring driving. The system cannot directlydetect changes when the oil is filled ordrained. The car must be drivenabout 30 km before the oil level display iscorrect.

WARNING

Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4)appears as shown in the illustration below.The level must never be above MAX orbelow MIN, as this could lead to enginedamage.

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifolddue to the risk of fire.

Measuring the oil level

If the oil level needs to be checked then itshould be carried out in accordance with thesequence below.

1. Activate key position II, see page 76.

2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-handstalk switch to position Engine oil level

Wait....> You will then see information displayed

about the engine oil level.

The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fillmore oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recom-mended filling level is 4.

Coolant

Checking the level and topping up

When topping up the coolant, follow theinstructions on the packaging. It is importantthat the mixture of coolant concentrate andwater is correct for the prevailing weather con-ditions. Never top up with water only. The riskof freezing increases with both too little and toomuch coolant concentrate.

WARNING

Coolant can be very hot. If the coolantrequires topping up when the engine is atoperating temperature, unscrew the expan-sion tank cap slowly to gently release theoverpressure.



327

For capacities and for standards regardingwater quality, see page 373.

Check the coolant regularly

The level must lie between the MIN and MAX

marks on the expansion tank. If the system isnot filled sufficiently, high temperatures couldoccur, causing a risk of damage to the engine.

IMPORTANT

• A high content of chlorine, chloridesand other salts may cause corrosion inthe cooling system.

• Always use coolant with anti-corrosionagent as recommended by Volvo.

• Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%water and 50% coolant.

• Mix the coolant with approved qualitytap water. In the event of any doubtabout water quality, used ready-mixedcoolant in accordance with Volvo rec-ommendations.

• When changing coolant/replacing cool-ing system components, flush the cool-ing system clean with approved qualitytap water or flush with ready-mixedcoolant.

• The engine must only be run with a well-filled cooling system. Otherwise, tem-peratures that are too high may occurresulting in the risk of damage (cracks)in the cylinder head.

Brake and clutch fluid

Checking the level

Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser-voir. The level must be between the MIN andMAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir.Check the level regularly.

Change the brake fluid every other year or atevery other regular service.

For capacities and recommended fluid grade,see page 373. The fluid should be changedannually on cars driven in conditions requiringhard, frequent braking, such as driving inmountains or tropical climates with highhumidity.

WARNING

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in thebrake fluid reservoir, do not drive furtherbefore topping up the brake fluid. Volvo rec-ommends that the reason for the loss ofbrake fluid is investigated by an authorisedVolvo workshop.



328

Filling

Brake fluid reservoir location.

The fluid reservoir is protected under the coverover the cold zone in the engine compartment.The round cover must be removed first beforethe reservoir cap can be reached.

1. Turn and open the cover located on thecovering.

2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.The level must be between the MIN andMAX marks, which are located on theinside of the reservoir.

IMPORTANT

Do not forget to refit the cap.

Power steering fluid

IMPORTANT

Keep the area around the power steeringfluid reservoir clean when checking. Thecover must not be opened.

Check the level frequently. The fluid does notrequire changing. The fluid level must bebetween the MIN and MAX marks. For capaci-ties and recommended fluid grade, seepage 373.

NOTE

If a fault should arise in the power steeringsystem or if the engine is switched off andthe car must be towed, it can still be steered.

Air conditioning system

Troubleshooting and repair

The air conditioning system contains fluores-cent tracing agents. Use ultraviolet light whenlooking for leaks.

Volvo recommends that you contact an author-ised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

The air conditioning system contains pres-surised refrigerant R134a. This system mustonly be serviced and repaired by an author-ised workshop.


Lamps 09

329

General

All bulbs are specified, see page 334. The fol-lowing list contains locations of bulbs andother light sources that are specialised orunsuitable for changing except at a workshop:

• Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenonlamps)

• Direction indicators, door mirrors

• Approach lighting, door mirrors

• Courtesy lighting

• Glovebox lighting

• General interior lighting in the roof

• Reading lamps

• LED lights, general

WARNING

On cars with Xenon headlamps, thereplacement of Xenon lamps must be car-ried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvoworkshop is recommended. Working withXenon lamps demands extreme cautionbecause the headlamp is equipped with ahigh voltage unit.

WARNING

The car’s electrical system must be in keyposition 0 when replacing bulbs, seepage 76

IMPORTANT

Never touch the glass part of the bulbs withyour fingers. Grease and oils from your fin-gers are vaporised by the heat, coating thereflector and then causing damage.

Headlamps front All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via theengine compartment. Loosen and remove thewhole headlamp.

Removing the headlamp

1. Set the car's electrical system in key posi-tion 0, see page 76:

2. (First illustration)

Pull out the headlamp's locking pins.

Release the headlamp by alternatelytilting and pulling it out.

IMPORTANT

Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con-nector.


Lamps 09

330

3. (Second illustration)

Detach the headlamp connector bypressing down the clip with your thumb.

At the same time, guide out the con-nector with your other hand.

4. Lift out the headlamp and place it on a softsurface to avoid scratching the lens.

5. Replace the bulb in question.

Securing the headlamp

1. Plug in the connector, a clicking soundshould be heard.

2. Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins.The short pin is fitted closest to the grille.Check that they are correctly inserted.

3. Check the lighting.

The headlamp must be mounted and the con-nector correctly installed before the lighting isswitched on or the remote control key isinserted into the ignition switch.

Removing the cover

Before starting to replace a bulb, seepage 329.

1. Unscrew the cover's four screws with thetool (1) in the tool kit, see page 304. Theyshould not be detached completely.(3 - 4 turns are sufficient.)

IMPORTANT

Use the tool in the toolkit to remove andattach this correctly.

2. Slide the cover to one side.

3. Remove the cover.

Reinstall the cover in reverse order.

Dipped beam, halogen

1. Detach the headlamp, see page 329.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

4. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out.

5. The guide pin on the lamp should bestraight up when it is fitted and a clickingsound should be heard when it clicks intoplace.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.


Lamps 09

��


Main beam, Halogen

1. Detach the headlamp.

2. Remove the cover, see page 330

3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwiseand then pulling straight out


5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socketand turn clockwise in order to secure it. Itcan be secured in one position.


Extra main beam, ABL headlamps*


2. Remove the cover, see page 330.

3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwiseand then pulling straight out


5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socketand turn clockwise in order to secure it. Itcan only be secured in one position.


Direction indicators


2. Detach the cover by pulling it straight out.

3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract thebulb.

4. Press and simultaneously turn the bulb todetach it.



Lamps 09

332

Lamp housing, rear

The bulbs in the rear light cluster are replacedfrom inside the cargo area (not the LED lamps).

1. Remove the covers in the left/right-handpanel to access the bulbs. The bulbs arelocated in a bulb holder.

2. Press the catches together and pull out thebulb holder.

3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it inand turning anticlockwise.

4. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clock-wise.

5. Press the bulb holder into place and refitthe cover.

NOTE

If an error message remains after the brokenbulb has been replaced then we recom-mend that you visit an authorised Volvoworkshop.

Location of rear bulbs

Brake light (LED)

Brake light

Reversing lamp

Direction indicators

Rear fog lamp (one side)

Reversing lamp

1. Open the panel in the boot lid.

2. Detach the bulb holder by turning it anti-clockwise.

3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it inand turning anticlockwise.

4. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clock-wise.

5. Attach the bulb holder by turning it clock-wise.


Lamps 09

��

333

Number plate lighting

1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.

2. Carefully detach the whole lamp housingand withdraw it.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Refit the whole lamp housing and screw itinto place.

Lighting, cargo area

G02

1758

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize sothat the lamp housing comes loose.

2. Replace the bulb.

3. Check that the bulb illuminates and pressback the lamp housing.

Vanity mirror lighting

Removal of lamp lens

1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lensand gently prize up the lug on the edge.

2. Carefully detach and lift aside the lamplens.

3. Use needle-nose pliers to pull the bulbstraight out to the side and replace with anew one. Note! - Do not pinch hard with thepliers. Otherwise the lamp lens could thenbe crushed.

Attaching the lamp lens

1. Refit the lamp lens.

2. Press it into place.


Lamps 09

334

Specification, bulbs

Lighting WA Type

Dipped beam,halogen

55 H7 LL

Main beam,Halogen

65 H9

Extra mainbeam, ABL

65 H9

Front directionindicators

21 HY21W

Courtesy light-ing front

3 T10 SocketW2.1x9.5d

Glovebox light-ing

5 Socket SV8.5Length 43 mm

Vanity mirrorlighting

1.2 T5 SocketW2x4.6d

Cargo arealighting

10 Socket SV8.5Length 38 mm

Number platelighting

5 C5W LL

Direction indi-cators, rear

21 PY21W SV

Brake light 21 P21W LL

Lighting WA Type

Reversing lamp 21 H21W LL

Rear fog lamp 21 H21W LL

A Watt


Wiper blades and washer fluid 09

335

Wiper blades

Service position

Wiper blades in service position.

In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades(for scraping off ice from the windscreen, forexample) they must be in service position.

IMPORTANT

Before placing the wiper blades in the serv-ice position, make sure that they are not fro-zen down.

1. Insert the remote control key in the ignitionswitch1 and briefly press the START/

STOP ENGINE button to set the car's elec-

trical system to key position I. (For detailedinformation on key positions, see page 76.)

2. Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE

button again to set the car’s electrical sys-tem in key position 0.

3. Within 3 seconds, move the right stalkswitch up and hold it in position forapprox. 1 second.> The wipers then move to standing

straight up.

The wipers return to their starting positionwhen you briefly press the START/STOP

ENGINE button to set the car’s electrical sys-tem to key position I (or when the car isstarted).

IMPORTANT

If the wiper arms in service position havebeen folded up from the windscreen, theymust be folded back down onto the wind-screen before the wipers are allowed toreturn to their starting position. This is toavoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.

NOTE

Once the wiper arms have been in serviceposition, the wipers must be activated anddeactivated before service position can beused again.

Replacing the wiper blades

1 Not necessary in cars with Keyless function.


Wiper blades and washer fluid 09

336

Fold up the wiper arm when it is in serviceposition. Press the button located on thewiper blade mounting and pull straight outparallel with the wiper arm.

Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click"is heard.

Check that the blade is firmly installed.

4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the wind-screen.

The wipers return from service position to theirstarting position when you briefly press theSTART/STOP ENGINE button to set the car’selectrical system to key position I (or when thecar is started).

G02

1763

NOTE

The wiper blades are different lengths. Theblade on the driver's side is longer than theblade on the passenger side.

Cleaning

For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, seepage 354 and onwards.

IMPORTANT

Check the wiper blades regularly.Neglected maintenance shortens the serv-ice life of the wiper blades.

Filling washer fluid

The windscreen and headlamp washers sharea common reservoir.

IMPORTANT

Use washer fluid with antifreeze during thewinter to avoid freezing in the pump, reser-voir and hoses.

For capacities, see page 373.


Battery 09

337

Operation

The service life and function of the battery isinfluenced by factors such as the number ofstarts, discharging, driving style, driving con-ditions, climatic conditions etc.

• Never disconnect the battery when theengine is running.

• Check that the cables to the battery arecorrectly connected and properly tight-ened.

WARNING

• The battery can generate oxyhydrogengas, which is highly explosive. A sparkcan be formed if a jump lead is con-nected incorrectly, and this can beenough for the battery to explode.

• The battery contains sulphuric acid,which can cause serious burns.

• If sulphuric acid comes into contactwith eyes, skin or clothing, flush withlarge quantities of water. If acidsplashes into the eyes - seek medicalattention immediately.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if itbecomes discharged repeatedly.

The life of the battery is affected by severalfactors, including driving conditions and cli-mate. Battery starting capacity decreasesgradually with time and therefore needs tobe recharged if the car is not used for alonger time or when it is only driven shortdistances. Extreme cold further limits star-ting capacity.

To maintain the battery in good condition, atleast 15 minutes of driving/week is recom-mended or that the battery is connected toa battery charger with automatic tricklecharging.

A battery that is kept fully charged has amaximum service life.

IMPORTANT

Never use a quick charger to charge thebattery.

IMPORTANT

If the following instruction is not observedthen the energy saving function for infotain-ment may be temporarily disengaged, and/or the message in the information displayabout the main battery's state of chargemay be temporarily inapplicable, followingthe connection of an external battery or bat-tery charger:

• The negative battery terminal on thecar's main battery must never be usedfor connecting an external battery orbattery charger - only the car chassis

may be used as the grounding point.See the section "Start assistance" - for adescription of how the cable clamps mustbe attached.


Battery 09

338

Symbols on the battery

Use protective goggles.

Further information in theowner's manual.

Store the battery out ofthe reach of children.

The battery contains cor-rosive acid.

Avoid sparks and nakedflames.

Risk of explosion.

Must be taken for recy-cling.

NOTE

An expended battery must be recycled in anenvironmentally responsible manner - itcontains lead.

Replacing the main battery

Removal

First of all: Take the remote control key fromthe ignition switch and wait at least 5 minutesbefore any electrical connections are touched- this is because the car's electrical systemneeds to store the necessary information tocontrol modules.


Battery 09


Open the clips on the front cover andremove the cover.

Release the rubber moulding so that therear cover is free.

Remove the rear cover by screwing onequarter turn and lifting it away.

WARNING

Connect and remove the positive and neg-ative cables in the correct order.

Detach the black negative cable.

Detach the red positive cable.

Detach the ventilation hose from the bat-tery.

Loosen the screw holding the batteryclamp.

Move the battery to the side and lift it up.

Cross-stay on the R-Design*

Cross-stay and plenum chamber cover.

Cars with R-Design have a cross-stay thatmust be removed before the main battery canbe replaced.

1. Remove the plenum chamber covers onthe right and left-hand sides. Prize carefullywith a plastic knife or similar.

2. Loosen and remove the screws (one on theright and one on the left-hand side) thathold the cross-stay.

3. Remove the cross-stay.> Now the main battery can be removed

in accordance with the previous section.

• Fitting the cross-stay takes place in thereverse order.


Battery 09


NOTE

Tighten the screws to 30 Nm. Check thetorque with a torque wrench.

Fitting

1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

2. Move the battery inward and to the sideuntil it reaches the rear edge of the box.

3. Tighten the clamp that holds the battery.

4. Connect the ventilation hose.> Check that it is correctly connected to

both battery and outlet in the body.

5. Connect the red positive cable.

6. Connect the black negative cable.

7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal.)

8. Fit the rubber moulding. (See Removal.)

9. Align the front cover and secure it with theclips. (See removal.)

For more information on the car's main battery- see page 383.

Eco Start/Stop DRIVe*

Cars with the Start/Stop function are equippedwith two 12 V batteries - one extra powerfulbattery for starting and one support batterythat helps during the Eco Start/Stop DRIVefunction's starting sequence.

For more information on Start/Stop - seepage 123.

For more information on the car's main battery- see page 116 and 383.

Battery Start Support

Cold startcapacityA,CCA (A)

760 180

SizeB,L×W×H(mm)

278×175×190 150×90×130

Capacity(Ah) 70 10

A In accordance with the SAE standard.B Largest possible size.

IMPORTANT

When replacing batteries in cars with theStart/Stop function, the AGM1 type batter-ies must be fitted.

1 Absorbed Glass Mat


Battery 09

341

NOTE

• The higher the current take-off in the car(extra cooling/heating, etc.) the morethe batteries must be charged =increased fuel consumption.

• When the capacity of the battery hasfallen below the lowest permissible levelthen the Start/Stop function is disen-gaged.

Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function dueto high current take-off means:

• The engine starts automatically2 withoutthe driver depressing the clutch pedal(manual gearbox).

• The engine starts automatically without thedriver lifting his/her foot off the foot brakepedal (automatic gearbox).

Location of the batteries

A: Left-hand drive car. B: Right-hand drive car. 1.Battery for starting3 2. Support battery.

The support battery normally requires no moreservice than the normal battery that is used forstarting. A workshop should be contacted inthe event of questions or problems - an author-ised Volvo workshop is recommended.

IMPORTANT

If the following instruction is not observedthen the Start/Stop function may temporar-ily cease to work after the connection of anexternal battery or battery charger:

• The negative battery terminal on thecar's main battery must never be usedfor connecting an external battery orbattery charger - only the car chassis

may be used as the grounding point.See the section "Start assistance" - for adescription of how the cable clamps mustbe attached.

2 Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.3 The battery for starting is described in detail on page 338.


Battery 09

342

NOTE

If the battery has become so dischargedthat everything is "black" and in principlethe car does not have all the normal electri-cal functions and the engine is subsequentlystarted using an external battery or batterycharger, then the Start/Stop function will beactivated. It will then be possible for theengine to be auto-stopped but in the eventof an auto-stop the Start/Stop function mayfail to auto-start the engine due to inade-quate capacity in the battery.

The battery must first be charged in order toensure a successful auto-start after an auto-stop. At an outside temperature of +15 °Cthe battery needs to be charged for at least1 hour. At a lower outside temperature acharging time of 3-4 hours is recom-mended. The recommendation is that thebattery is charged using an external batterycharger.

If this is not possible then the recommen-dation is to temporarily deactivate theStart/Stop function until the battery hasbeen adequately recharged.

For more information about recharging thebattery, see the section "Battery" in thechapter "Maintenance and service".


Fuses 09

343

General

All electrical functions and components areprotected by a number of fuses in order to pro-tect the car's electrical system from damage byshort circuiting or overloading.

If an electrical component or function does notwork, it may be because the component's fusewas temporarily overloaded and failed. If thesame fuse fails repeatedly then there is a faultin the circuit. Volvo recommends that you visitan authorised Volvo workshop for checking.

Changing

1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.

2. Pull out the fuse and check from the sideto see whether the curved wire has blown.

3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuseof the same colour and amperage.

WARNING

Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with anamperage higher than that specified whenreplacing a fuse. This could cause signifi-cant damage to the electrical system andpossibly lead to fire.

Location, fuse boxes

Central electrical unit locations in a left-handdrive car. In a right-hand drive car the centralelectrical units under the glovebox changesides.

Engine compartment

Under the glovebox

Under the glovebox

Cargo area

Engine compartment cold zone (only Start/Stop*)


Fuses 09

344

Engine compartment


Fuses 09

��


General fuses, engine compartment

On the inside of the cover there are tweezersthat facilitate the procedure for the removaland fitting of fuses.

Positions (see preceding illustration)

Engine compartment, upper

Engine compartment, front

Engine compartment, lower

These fuses are all located in the engine com-partment box. The fuses in (C) are locatedunder (A).

On the inside of the cover is a label that showsthe location of the fuses.

• Fuses 1-7 and 42-44 are of the "Midi Fuse"type and must only be replaced by a work-shop1.

• Fuses 8-15 and 34 are of the "JCASE" typeand should be replaced by a workshop1.

• Fuses 16-33 and 35-41 are of the "MiniFuse" type.

Function A

Primary fuse for the central elec-tronic module (CEM) with fusebox B under the gloveboxA

50

Primary fuse for the central elec-tronic module (CEM) with fusebox B under the glovebox

50

Primary fuse for central electri-cal unit in cargo areaA

60

Primary fuse for central electri-cal unit in passenger compart-ment with fuse box A under thegloveboxA

60

Primary fuse for central electri-cal unit in passenger compart-ment with fuse box A under thegloveboxA

60

- -

PTC element, air preheater*A 100

Headlamp washers* 20

Windscreen wipers 30

Function A

Parking heater* 25

Ventilation fanA 40

- -

ABS pump 40

ABS valves 20

- -

Headlamp levelling*; ActiveXenon headlamps - ABL*

10


20

ABS 5

Speed related power steering* 5

Engine control module; Trans-mission control module; Air-bags

10

Heated washer nozzles* 10



Fuses 09


Function A

- -

Headlamp control 5

- -

- -

- -

Internal relay coils 5

Auxiliary lamps* 20

Horn 15

Relay coil in main relay forengine management system;Engine control module (5, 6-cyl.petrol)

10

Transmission control module 15

Solenoid clutch A/C (not 5-cyl.diesel); Coolant pump (5-cyl.diesel Start/Stop)

15

Function A

Relay coil in relay for solenoidclutch A/C (not 5-cyl. diesel);Relay coil in relay for coolantpump (5-cyl. diesel Start/Stop);Relay coils in central electricalunit in engine compartment coldzone (Start/Stop)

5

Start relayA 30

Ignition coils (4-cyl. petrol);Glow control module (5-cyl. die-sel)

10

Ignition coils (5, 6-cyl. petrol);Capacitor (6-cyl.)

20

Engine control module (petrol) 10

Engine control module (diesel) 15

Function A

Valves (1.6 l petrol); Mass airflow sensor (1.6 l petrol)

Mass air flow sensor (D4162T);Control valve, fuel flow(D4162T)

10

Mass air flow sensor (5-cyl. die-sel, 6-cyl.); Control valves (5-cyl. diesel); Injectors (5, 6-cyl.petrol); Engine control module(5-cyl. petrol, 6-cyl.)

15

Solenoid clutch A/C (5, 6-cyl.);Valves, Engine control module(6-cyl.) Solenoids (6-cyl. withoutturbo); Actuator motors, intakemanifold (6-cyl. without turbo);Mass air flow sensor (4-cyl. 2.0l petrol, 5-cyl. petrol); Oil levelsensor (5-cyl. diesel)

Coolant pump (D4162T)

10

Lambda-sonds (4-cyl. petrol);Lambda-sond (diesel); Controlmodule, radiator roller cover(manual 5-cyl. 2.0 l diesel)

10

EVAP valve (5, 6-cyl. petrol);Lambda-sonds (5, 6-cyl. petrol)

15


Fuses 09

��

347

Function A

Coolant pump (1.6 l petrol Start/Stop, 5-cyl. petrol Start/Stop);Crankcase ventilation heater (5-cyl. Petrol); Oil pump automaticgearbox (5-cyl. petrol Start/Stop)

10

Diesel filter heater 20

Control module, radiator rollercover (5-cyl. petrol)

5

Crankcase ventilation heater (5-cyl. diesel); Oil pump automaticgearbox (5-cyl. diesel Start/Stop)

10

Glow plugs (diesel) 70

Cooling fan (4-cyl., 5-cyl. petrol) 60

Cooling fan (6-cyl., 5-cyl. diesel) 80

Electro-hydraulic power steer-ing

100

A For cars with the Start/Stop function this fuse location isempty - see instead page 352.


Fuses 09


Under the glovebox

Positions

On the inside of the cover is a label that showsthe location of the fuses in fuse box A.

Box A Function A

Primary fuse for audio con-trol module*; Primary fusefor fuses 16-20: Infotain-ment

40

- -

- -

Box A Function A

- -

- -

Door handle (Keyless*) 5

- -

Control panel, driver's door 20

Control panel, front passen-ger door

20

Box A Function A

Control panel, rear passen-ger door, right

20

Control panel, rear passen-ger door, left

20

Keyless* 7.5

Power seat driver's side* 20

Power seat passenger side* 20


Fuses 09

��


Box A Function A

- -

Infotainment control module 5

Audio control unit (ampli-fier)*

Digital radio*; TV*

10

Audio 15

Telematics*; Bluetooth* 5

- -

Sunroof*; Interior lightingroof; Climate sensor*;Damper motors, air intake

5

12 V socket, tunnel console 15

Seat heating, rear right* 15

Seat heating, rear left* 15

- -

Seat heating (passengerside)

15

Seat heating (driver's side) 15

Box A Function A

Parking assistance*; Park-ing camera*; Towbar controlmodule *

BLIS*

5

AWD control module* 15

Active chassis Four-C* 10

Box B Function A

- -

- -

Interior lighting; Driver'sdoor control panel, powerwindows; Power seats,front*; Remote controlledgarage door opener*

7.5

Information display (DIM) 5

Adaptive cruise control,ACC*; collision warning sys-tem*

10

Interior lighting; Rain sensor 7.5

Steering wheel module 7.5

Box B Function A

Central locking system, fuelfiller flap

10

- -

Windscreen washers 15

Unlocking, boot lid 10

Folding head restraint* 10

Fuel pump 20

Movement detector alarm*;Climate panel

5

Steering lock 15

Siren alarm*; Data link con-nector OBDII

5

- -

Airbags 10

Collision warning system* 5

Accelerator pedal sensor,PTC element air preheater*;Dimming, interior rearviewmirror*; Seat heating, rear*

7.5


Fuses 09


Box B Function A

- -

Brake light 5

Sunroof* 20

Immobiliser 5


Fuses 09

��


Cargo area

Positions

Function A

Electric parking brake, left 30

Electric parking brake, right 30

Rear window defroster 30

Trailer socket 2* 15

Function A

- -

12 V socket, cargo area 15

- -

- -

Function A

- -

- -

Trailer socket 1* 40

- -


Fuses 09


Engine compartment, cold zone - Start/Stop*

Location of fuses for the Start/Stop function.

• Fuses A1 and A2 are of the "MEGA Fuse"type and must only be replaced by a work-shop2.

• Fuses 1-11 are of the "Midi Fuse" type andmust only be replaced by a workshop2.

• Fuse 12 is of the "Mini Fuse" type.

For more information on Start/Stop - seepage 123.

Positions

Function A

Main fuse for central electricalunit in the engine compartment

175

Function A

Main fuse for central electronicmodule (CEM) with fuse box Bunder the glovebox, centralelectrical unit in passengercompartment with fuse box Aunder the glovebox, centralelectrical unit in cargo area

175

PTC element, air preheater* 100



Fuses 09

353

Function A


50

Primary fuse for central electri-cal unit in passenger compart-ment with fuse box A under theglovebox

60

Primary fuse for central electri-cal unit in passenger compart-ment with fuse box A under theglovebox

60

Primary fuse for central electri-cal unit in cargo area

60

Ventilation fan 40

- -

- -

Start relay 30

Internal diode 50

Function A

Support battery 70

Central electronic module(CEM) - reference voltage sup-port battery; Charging pointsupport battery

15


Car care 09

354

Washing the car

Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty.Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator.Use car shampoo.

• Remove bird droppings from the paintworkas soon as possible. Bird droppings con-tain chemicals that affect and discolourpaintwork very quickly. An authorisedVolvo workshop is recommended for theremoval of any discoloration.

• Hose down the underbody.

• Rinse the whole car until the loose dirt hasbeen removed in order to reduce the riskof scratches from washing. Do not spraydirectly onto the locks.

• If necessary, use cold degreasing agent onvery dirty surfaces. Note that the surfacesmust not then be warmed up by the sun!

• Wash using a sponge, car shampoo andplenty of lukewarm water.

• Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarmsoap solution or car shampoo.

• Use cold degreasing agent on very dirtysurfaces.

• Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois ora water scraper. If you avoid allowing waterdroplets to dry in strong sunlight then therisk of water stains that may need to bepolished away is reduced.

WARNING

Always have the engine cleaned by a work-shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine ishot.

IMPORTANT

Dirty headlamps have impaired functional-ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling forexample.

Do not use any corrosive cleaning agentsbut use water and a non-scratching spongeinstead.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps, foglamps and rear lamps may temporarily havecondensation on the inside of the lens. Thisis normal, all exterior lighting is designed towithstand this. Condensation is normallyvented out of the lamp housing when thelamp has been switched on for a time.

Cleaning the wiper blades

Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,impair the service life of wiper blades.

For cleaning:

– Set the wiper blades in service position,see page 335.

NOTE

Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg-ularly with lukewarm soap solution or carshampoo.

Do not use any strong solvents.

Automatic car washes

An automatic car wash is a simple and quickway of washing the car, but it cannot reacheverywhere. Handwashing the car is recom-mended for achieving optimum results.

NOTE

During the first few months a new car mustonly be handwashed. This is because thepaintwork is more sensitive when it is new.

High-pressure washing

When using high-pressure washing, usesweeping movements and make sure that thenozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to thesurface of the car (the distance applies to allexterior parts). Do not spray directly onto thelocks.


Car care 09


Testing the brakes

WARNING

Always test the brakes after washing thecar, including the parking brake, to ensurethat moisture and corrosion do not attackthe brake linings and reduce braking per-formance.

Lightly depress the brake pedal now and thenwhen driving long distances in rain or slush.The heat from the friction causes the brake lin-ings to warm up and dry. Do the same thingafter starting in very damp or cold weather.

Exterior plastic, rubber and trim

components

A special cleaning agent available from Volvodealers is recommended for the cleaning andcare of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trimcomponents, such as glossy trim mouldings.When using such a cleaning agent the instruc-tions must be followed carefully.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic andrubber.

When using degreasant on plastic and rub-ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec-essary. Use a soft washing sponge.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wearaway or damage the glossy surface layer.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive mustnot be used.

Rims

Only use rim cleaning agent recommended byVolvo.

Strong rim cleaning agents can damage thesurface and cause stains on chrome-platedaluminium rims.

Polishing and waxing

Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dullor to give the paintwork extra protection.

The car does not need to be polished until it isat least one year old. However, the car can bewaxed during this time. Do not polish or waxthe car in direct sunlight.

Wash and dry the car thoroughly before youbegin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphaltand tar stains using tar remover or white spirit.

More stubborn stains can be removed usingfine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.

Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq-uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on thepackaging carefully. Many preparations con-tain both polish and wax.

IMPORTANT

Only paint treatment recommended byVolvo should be used. Other treatment suchas preserving, sealing, protection, lustresealing or similar could damage the paint-work. Paintwork damage caused by suchtreatments is not covered by Volvo war-ranty.

Water-repellent coating*

Never use products such as car wax,degreaser or similar on glass surfa-

ces as this could ruin their water-repellentproperties.

Take care when cleaning so as not to damagethe glass surface.

To avoid damaging glass surfaces whenremoving ice – only use plastic ice scrapers.

There is natural wear of the water-repellentcoating.

Treatment with a special finishing agent avail-able from Volvo dealers is recommended in


Car care 09

356

order to maintain the water-repellent proper-ties. This should be used first after three yearsand then each year.

Rustproofing – inspection andmaintenance

The car received a thorough and completerustproofing at the factory. Parts of the bodyare made of galvanised sheet metal. Theunderbody is protected by a wear-resistantanti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetratingrustproofing fluid was sprayed into theexposed members, cavities, closed sectionsand side doors.

Under normal conditions the rustproofing doesnot require treatment for approximately 12years. After this period, it should be treated atthree-year intervals. Volvo recommends thatyou engage an authorised Volvo workshop forassistance if the car needs further treatment.

Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it isimportant to keep the car clean. The car's rust-proofing needs to be checked regularly andtouched-up if necessary in order for it to bemaintained.

Cleaning the interior

Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularlyand follow the instructions included with thecar care product.

Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaningagents.

Carpets and cargo area

Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning ofthe floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use avacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.

Each inlay mat is secured with pins.

– Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin andlift the mat straight up.

Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in ateach pin.

WARNING

Before setting off check that the inlaid matin the driver area is firmly affixed andsecured in the pins in order to avoid gettingcaught adjacent to and under the pedals.

A special textile cleaner is recommended forstains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floormats should be cleaned with agents recom-mended by your Volvo dealer!

Stains on fabric upholstery and roof

upholstery

A special fabric cleaning agent, available fromauthorised Volvo dealers, is recommended toavoid impairing the fire retardant qualities ofthe upholstery.

IMPORTANT

Sharp objects and Velcro may damage thefabric upholstery.

Treating stains on leather upholstery

Volvo's leather upholstery is chromium-freeand is treated to preserve its original appear-ance.

Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau-tiful patina over time. The leather is refined andprocessed so that it retains its natural charac-teristics. It is given a protective coating, butregular cleaning is required in order to maintainboth characteristics and appearance. Volvooffers a comprehensive product for the clean-ing and treatment of leather upholstery which,when used in accordance with the instructions,preserves the leather's protective coating.After a period of use the natural appearance ofthe leather will nevertheless emerge, depend-ing more or less on the surface texture of theleather. This is a natural maturing of the leatherand shows that it is a natural product.


Car care 09

357

To achieve best results Volvo recommendscleaning and the application of protectivecream once to four times per year (or more ifnecessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is avail-able from your Volvo dealer.

IMPORTANT

• Certain items of coloured clothing (forexample, jeans and suede garments)may stain the upholstery.

• Never use strong solvents. Such prod-ucts may damage fabric, vinyl andleather upholstery.

Washing instructions for leather

upholstery

1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampenedsponge and squeeze out a strong foam.

2. Work the dirt away with gentle circularmovements.

3. Dab accurately with the sponge on thestains. Allow the sponge to absorb thestain. Do not rub.

4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth andallow the leather to dry completely.

Protective treatment of leather

upholstery

1. Pour a small amount of the protectivecream on the felted cloth and massage ina thin layer of cream with gentle circularmovements on the leather.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutesbefore use.

The leather has now been given improved pro-tection against stains and improved UV pro-tection.

Washing instructions for the leather

steering wheel

• Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-mois-tened sponge and neutral soap.

• Leather needs to breathe. Never cover theleather steering wheel with protective plas-tic.

• Use natural oils. Volvo's leather careagents are recommended for best results.

If the steering wheel has stains:

Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat andblood)

– Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5%ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use asolution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)

Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)

1. Same procedure as group 1.

2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.

Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)

1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.

2. Same procedure as group 1.

Treating stains on interior plastic, metal

and wood parts

A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightlymoistened with water, available from Volvodealers, is recommended for cleaning interiorparts and surfaces.

Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strongstain removers. A special cleaning agent avail-able from Volvo dealers can be used for moredifficult cleaning.

Cleaning seatbelts

Use water and a synthetic detergent. A specialtextile cleaning agent is available from yourVolvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is drybefore allowing it to retract.


Car care 09

358

Touching up minor paintwork damage

Paint is an important part of the car's rust-proofing and should therefore be checked reg-ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damagedpaintwork should be rectified immediately. Themost common types of paintwork damage arestone chips, scratches, and marks on theedges of wings, doors and bumpers.

Materials

• primer1 - for e.g. plastic-clad bumpersthere are special adhesive primers availa-ble in spray cans

• base coat and clear coat - are available inspray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks2

• masking tape

• fine sand paper1.

Colour code (Paint code)

Code for car's colour

It is important that the correct colour is used.For product decal location, see page 362.

Repairing minor paint damage such as

stone chips and scratches

G02

1832

Before work is started, the car must be cleanand dry as well as at a temperature above15 °C.

1. Apply a piece of masking tape over thedamaged surface. Then remove the tape toremove any loose paint.

If the damage has reached down to a metalsurface (sheet steel), it is preferable to usea primer. In the event of damage to a plas-tic surface, an adhesive primer should beused for better results - spray into thespray can's cap and brush thinly.

1 If required.2 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.


Car care 09

359

2. A light sanding with very fine abrasivematerial can be performed locally beforepainting if necessary (e.g. if there are roughedges). Clean the surface thoroughly andallow to dry.

3. Stir the primer well and apply using a finebrush, matchstick or similar. Finish withbase coat and clear coat once the primerhas dried.

4. For scratches, proceed as above, butmask around the damaged area to protectthe undamaged paintwork.

NOTE

If the stone chip has not penetrated downto the meal and an undamaged layer of paintremains in place, fill in with base coat andclear coat as soon as the surface has beencleaned.

360

Type designations................................................................................. 362Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 364Engine specifications............................................................................ 368Engine oil............................................................................................... 370Fluids and lubricants............................................................................. 373Fuel....................................................................................................... 376Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure ......................................... 380Electrical system................................................................................... 383Type approval....................................................................................... 384Symbols in the display.......................................................................... 396

SPECIF ICATIONS

10 Specifications

Type designations

10

362

Label location

10 Specifications

Type designations

10

363

Knowing the car's type designation, vehicleidentification and engine numbers can facili-tate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealerregarding the car and when ordering spareparts and accessories.

Type designation, vehicle identificationnumber, maximum permissible weights,codes for colour and upholstery and typeapproval number. The label is visible whenthe right rear door is opened.

Label for parking heater.

Engine code and engine serial number.

6-cyl.

4-cyl / 5-cyl

Label for engine oil.

Gearbox type designation and serial num-ber.

Manual gearbox

Automatic gearbox

Car's identification number. (VIN VehicleIdentification Number)

Further information on the car is presented inthe registration document.

NOTE

The labels shown in the owner's manual arenot provided as exact reproductions ofthose in the car. The purpose is to showtheir approximate appearance and locationin the car. The information that applies toyour car in particular is available on the labelin question in your car.

10 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

10

364

Dimensions

Dimensions mm

A Wheelbase 2776

B Length 4628

C Load length, floor, folded rearseat 1749

D Load length, floor 965

E Height 1484

F Load height 465

Dimensions mm

G Front track 1588A/

1578B

H Rear track 1585A/

1575B

I Load width, floor 919

J Width 1865

Dimensions mm

K Width including door mirrors 2097

L Width including folded-indoor mirrors 1899

A with 16" wheelB with 17" wheel

10 Specifications


10

365

Weights

Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank90% full and all fluids.

The weight of passengers and accessories,and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, seetable page 366) influences the payload and isnot included in the kerb weight.

Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight -Kerb weight.

NOTE

The documented kerb weight applies tocars in the standard version - i.e. a car with-out extra equipment or accessories. Thismeans that for every accessory added theloading capacity of the car is reduced cor-respondingly by the weight of the acces-sory.

Examples of accessories that reduce load-ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/Summum equipment levels, as well as otheraccessories such as Towbar, Load carriers,Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps,GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Car-pets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc.

Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer-taining the kerb weight of your own partic-ular car.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics changedepending on how heavily it is loaded andhow the load is distributed.

For information on decal location, see page 362.

Max. gross vehicle weight

Max. train weight (car+trailer)

Max. front axle load

Max. rear axle load

Equipment level

Max. load: See registration document.

Max. roof load: 75 kg.

10 Specifications


10

366

Towing capacity and towball load

Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

T3 B4164T3 Manual, MMT6 1600 75

T3 B4164T3 Automatic, MPS6 1600 75

T4B B4164T Manual, MMT6 1600 75

T4B B4164T Automatic, MPS6 1600 75

T4E B5204T8 Automatic, TF-80SCC 1800 90

T4E B5204T8 Automatic, TF-80SDD 1800 90

T4F B4164T2 Manual, MMT6 1600 75

T4F B4164T2 Automatic, MPS6 1600 75

T5 B4204T7 Manual, MMT6 1800 90

T5 B4204T7 Automatic, MPS6 1800 90

T5E B5204T9 Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90

T5E B5254T12 Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90

T6 AWD B6304T4 Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90

D2 D4162T Manual, MMT6 1300 75

D2 D4162T Automatic, MPS6 1300 75

D3 D5204T7 Manual, M66 1600 75

10 Specifications


10

367

Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

D3 D5204T7 Automatic, TF-80SDD 1600 75

D4 D5204T3 Manual, M66 1600 75

D4 D5204T3 Automatic, TF-80SCC 1600 75

D4 D5204T3 Automatic, TF-80SDD 1600 75

D5 D5244T11 Manual, M66 1600 75

D5 D5244T15 Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90

D5 AWD D5244T15 Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 362.B DRIVe for certain markets.C Without Start/Stop.D With Start/Stop.E Only certain markets.

Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

750 50

10 Specifications

Engine specifications

10

368


NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

Engine Engine

codeA

Output(kW/rpm)

Output(hp/rpm)

Torque (Nm/rpm)

No. ofcylin-ders

Bore(mm)

Stroke(mm)

Sweptvolume(litres)

Com-pression

ratio

T3 B4164T3 110/5700 150/5700 240/1600–4000 4 79 81.4 1.596 10.0:1

T4B B4164T 132/5700 180/5700 240/1600-5000 4 79 81.4 1.596 10.0:1

T4C B5204T8 132/5000 180/5000 300/2700–4200 5 81.0 77 1.984 10.5:1

T4F B4164T2 132/5700 180/5700 240/1600–5000 4 79 81.4 1.596 10.0:1

T5 B4204T7 177/5500 240/5500 320/1800-5000 4 87.5 83.1 1.999 10.0:1

T5C B5204T9 157/6000 213/6000 300/2700–5000 5 81.0 77 1.984 10.5:1

T5C B5254T12 187/5400 254/5400 360/1800–4200 5 83.0 92,3 2,497 9.5:1

T6 B6304T4 224/5600 304/5600 440/2100–4200 6 82.0 93.2 2.953 9.3:1

D2 D4162T 84/3600 115/3600 270/1750-2500 4 75 88.3 1.560 16.0:1

D3 D5204T7 100/3500 136/3500 350/1500-2250 5 81.0 77 1.984 16.5:1

D4 D5204T3 120/3500 163/3500 400/1500-2750 5 81.0 77 1.984 16.5:1

10 Specifications


10

369

Engine Engine

codeA

Output(kW/rpm)

Output(hp/rpm)

Torque (Nm/rpm)

No. ofcylin-ders

Bore(mm)

Stroke(mm)

Sweptvolume(litres)

Com-pression

ratio

D5 D5244T11D 158/4000 215/4000 420/1500–3250 5 81.0 93.15 2.400 16.5:1

D5 D5244T15E 158/4000 215/4000 440/1500-3000 5 81.0 93.15 2.400 16.5:1

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 362.B DRIVe for certain markets.C Only certain markets.D Manual gearboxE Automatic gearbox

10 Specifications

Engine oil

10

370

Adverse driving conditions

Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor-mally high oil temperature or oil consumption.Below are some examples of adverse drivingconditions.

Check the oil level more frequently for longjourneys:

• towing a caravan or trailer

• in mountainous regions

• at high speeds

• in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hot-ter than +40 °C

The above also apply to shorter driving dis-tances at low temperatures.

Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adversedriving conditions. It provides extra protectionfor the engine.

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for theengine's service intervals all engines arefilled with a specially adapted syntheticengine oil at the factory. The choice of oilhas been made very carefully with regard toservice life, starting characteristics, fuelconsumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used inorder that the recommended service inter-vals can be applied. Only use a prescribedgrade of oil for both filling and oil change,otherwise you will risk affecting service life,starting characteristics, fuel consumptionand environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribedgrade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.

10 Specifications

Engine oil

10

��

371

Engine oil grade

Engine Engine codeA Recommended oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter

(litres)

T6 B6304T4 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 0W–30

approx 6.8

D4 D5204T3 approx. 5.9

D3 D5204T7 approx. 5.9

D5 D5244T11B approx. 5.9

D5 D5244T15C approx. 5.9

T5 B4204T7 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5


When driving under adverse conditions, use ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.

approx. 5.4

D2 D4162T approx. 3.8

T3 B4164T3 Certified and factory-filled oil: Oil grade WSS-M2C925-A

options for service:

Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5


approx. 4.1

T4D B4164T approx. 4.1

T4F B4164T2 approx. 4.1

10 Specifications

Engine oil

10

372

Engine Engine codeA Recommended oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter

(litres)

T4E B5204T8 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5


approx 5.5

T5E B5204T9 approx 5.5

T5E B5254T12 approx 5.5

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 362.B Manual gearbox.C Automatic gearbox.D DRIVe for certain markets.E Only certain markets.

For filling engine oil, see page 323.

10 Specifications

Fluids and lubricants

10

��

373

Coolant

Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended byVolvo mixed with 50% water1, see the pack-aging.

EngineA Volume

(litres)

T5 B4204T7 10.5

D2 D4162TD

D2 D4162TE 11.1

T4B B5204T8 8.9

T5B B5204T9

T5B B5254T12

T6 B6304T4

D4 D5204T3

D3 D5204T7

D5 D5244T15

D5 D5244T11

EngineA Volume

(litres)

T3 B4164T3D 9.2

T4C B4164TD

T4F B4164T2D

T3 B4164T3E 9.8

T4C B4164TE

T4F B4164T2E

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read onthe engine, see page 362.

B Only certain markets.C DRIVe for certain markets.D Manual gearboxE Automatic gearbox

1 Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.

10 Specifications


10

374

Other fluids and lubricants

Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

MMT6 1.7BOT 350M3

M66 1.9

Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

MPS6 7.3 BOT 341

TF-80SC 7.0 AW1

TF-80SD 7.0 AW1

Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade

Brake fluid Brake system 0.6 DOT 4+

Power steering fluid Power steering - WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.

Washer fluid Cars with headlamp washing 5.4 Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection duringcold weather and below freezing point.

Cars without headlamp washing 4.0

Fuel Petrol engine approx. 67 Petrol: see page 284

Diesel engine approx. 67 Diesel: see page 285

10 Specifications


10

375

NOTE

Under normal driving conditions, the gear-box oil does not need to be changed duringits service life. However, this may be nec-essary under adverse driving conditions,see page 373.

10 Specifications

Fuel

10

376

CO2 emissions and fuel consumption

T3 (B4164T3) 173 7.4 113 4.9 135 5.8

T3 (B4164T3) 224 9.6 129 5.6 164 7.1

T4A (B4164T) 200 8.6 120 5.1 149 6.4

T4A (B4164T) 224 9.6 129 5.6 164 7.1

T4 (B5204T8) 284 12.1 143 6.1 194 8.3

T4FB (B4164T2) 216 (209C) 9.3 (12.7C) 123 (118C) 5.3 (7.2C) 157 (152C) 6.8 (9.3C)

T4FB (B4164T2) 235 (219C) 10.1 (13.3C) 126 (126C) 5.5 (7.7C) 166 (160C) 7.2 (9.7C)

T5 (B4204T7) 261 11.2 140 6.0 184 7.9

T5 (B4204T7) 266 11.4 145 6.2 189 8.1

T6 AWD (B6304T4) 337 14.5 170 7.3 231 9.9

10 Specifications

Fuel

10

��

377

D2 (D4162T) 134 5.1 103 3.9 114 4.3

D2 (D4162T) 130 4.9 105 4.0 114 4.3

D3 (D5204T7) 135 5.1 102 3.9 114 4.3

D3 (D5204T7) 180 6.8 120 4.6 142 5.4

D4 (D5204T3) 135 5.1 102 3.9 114 4.3

D4D (D5204T3) 207 7.9 120 4.6 152 5.8

D4E (D5204T3) 180 6.8 120 4.6 142 5.4

D5 (D5244T11) 149 5.7 101 3.8 119 4.5

10 Specifications

Fuel

10

378

D5 (D5244T15) 211 8.1 121 4.6 154 5.9

D5 AWD (D5244T15) 223 8.5 133 5.1 166 6.3

A DRIVe for certain markets.B Flexifuel engines can be driven on both 95 octane unleaded petrol and bioethanol E85. Both fuels are filled in the common fuel tank so that any variations of mixing ratios between these two fuels

is possible. For more information, see page 115.C E85D Without Start/Stop.E With Start/Stop.

Explanation

gram/km

litre/100 km

Urban driving

Extra-urban driving

Combined driving

NOTE

If the consumption and emission data ismissing then it is included in the enclosedsupplement.

Fuel consumption and emissions of

carbon dioxide

Fuel consumption and emission values in thetable above are based on specific EU cycles1,that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basicversion and without extra equipment. The car'sweight may increase depending on equipment.This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded,increases fuel consumption and carbon diox-ide emissions.

1 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulationno 692/2008 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold startingthe engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0 and 120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - A car with D2, D3, D4 or D5 engine and6-speed manual gearbox is started in 2nd gear. The combined driving value given in the table is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving, in accordance with applicable legislation.CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.

10 Specifications

Fuel

10

379

There are several reasons for increased fuelconsumption compared with the table's val-ues. Examples of this are:

• The driver's driving style.

• If the customer has specified wheels largerthan those fitted as standard on the mod-el's basic version, then resistance increa-ses.

• High speed results in increased wind resis-tance.

• Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,weather and the condition of the car.

Even a combination of the above-mentionedexamples can result in significantly improvedconsumption. For further information, pleaserefer to the regulations referred to1.

Large deviations in fuel consumption may arisein a comparison with the EU driving cycles1

which are used in the certification of the carand on which the consumption figures in thetable are based.

To bear in mind

Tips that the driver can use in order to reduceconsumption:

• Drive gently and avoid unnecessary accel-eration as well as braking too hard.

• Drive with the correct air pressure in thetyres and check this regularly - select ECOtyre pressure for best results, see the tyrepressure table on page 380.

• Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump-tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from adealer.

See further information and more advice onpages 12 and 280.

See page 284 for general information on fuel.

1 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulationno 692/2008 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold startingthe engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0 and 120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - A car with D2, D3, D4 or D5 engine and6-speed manual gearbox is started in 2nd gear. The combined driving value given in the table is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving, in accordance with applicable legislation.CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.

10 Specifications

Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure

10

380

Approved tyre pressures

Engine Tyre size Speed

(km/h)

Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA

Front

(kPa)B

Rear

(kPa)

Front

(kPa)

Rear

(kPa)

Front/rear

(kPa)

T3 (B4164T3)

T4 (B4164T)C

T4F (B4164T2)

D2 (D4162T)

205/60 R 16

215/55 R 16

215/50 R 17

235/45 R 17

235/40 R 18

0 - 160 230 230 260 260 260

160 + 260 240 280 260 -

235/45 R 17 SST0 - 160 230 230 260 260 260

160 + 260 260 280 280 -

T6 (B6304T4)

215/55 R 16

235/45 R 17

0 - 160 230 230 260 260 260

160 + 280 240 300 260 -

215/50 R 17

235/40 R 18

0 - 160 240 240 260 260 260

160 + 300 240 320 280 -

235/45 R 17 SST0 - 160 230 230 260 260 260

160 + 280 280 300 300 -

10 Specifications


10

��

381


(km/h)


Front

(kPa)B

Rear

(kPa)

Front

(kPa)

Rear

(kPa)

Front/rear

(kPa)

T4 (B5204T8)D

T5 (B5204T9)D

T5 (B4204T7)

T5 (B5254T12)D

D4 (D5204T3)

D3 (D5204T7)

D5 (D5244T11)

D5 (D5244T15)E

215/55 R 16

215/50 R 17

235/45 R 17

235/40 R 18

0 - 160 230 230 260 260 260

160 + 260 240 280 260 -

235/45 R 17 SST

0 - 160 230 230 260 260 260

160 + 260 260 280 280 -

10 Specifications


10

382


(km/h)


Front

(kPa)B

Rear

(kPa)

Front

(kPa)

Rear

(kPa)

Front/rear

(kPa)

D4 AWD (D5244T17)

D5 AWD (D5244T15)

215/55 R 16

235/45 R 17

0 - 160 230 230 260 260 260

160 + 260 240 280 260 -

215/50 R 17

235/40 R 18

0 - 160 240 240 260 260 260

160 + 280 240 300 260 -

235/45 R 17 SST0 - 160 230 230 260 260 260

160 + 260 260 280 280 -

Temporary Spare Tyre max. 80 420 420 420 420 -

A Economical driving.B In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.C DRIVe for certain markets.D Only certain markets.E FWD

NOTE

All engines, tyres or combinations of theseare not always available in all markets.

10 Specifications

Electrical system

10


Electrical system

The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.The electrical system is single-pole and usesthe chassis and engine casing as a conductor.

The battery capacity is dependent upon theequipment level in the vehicle.

IMPORTANT

If the battery is replaced, replace it with abattery of the same cold start capacity andreserve capacity as the original (see thedecal on the battery).

Battery

Engine Voltage (V) Cold start capacity,

CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A)

Reserve capacity

(minutes)

Petrol (Ethanol) 12 520–800 100–160

Diesel 12 700–800 135–160

Petrol/Diesel with Start/Stop function 12 760A 135

A Battery type AGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) must be used in cars with the Start/Stop function.

NOTE

• The battery's container size should beconsistent with the original battery'sdimensions.

• The battery's height is different depend-ing on size.

Eco Start/Stop DRIVe*

For information on batteries in cars withEco Start/Stop DRIVe, see page 340.

10 Specifications

Type approval

10


Remote control key system

Lock system, standard

Country

EU, China

Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)

Country

EU

Korea

Country

China

Hong Kong

Radar system

Country

Singapore

IDA: Infocomm DevelopmentAuthority of Singapore.

Brazil

Sensors, tyre pressure monitoring -TPMS (Tyre Pressure MonitoringSystem)*

Country

Brazil

10 Specifications

Type approval

10

��

385

Bluetooth

Declaration of Conformity (Declaration of Conformity)

Country

Countriesin the EU:

Exporting country: Japan

Manufacturer: Alpine Electronics Inc.

Type of equipment: Bluetooth device

For further information visit http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/rtte/faq.htm #informing

10 Specifications

Type approval

10

386

Country

CzechRepublic:

Alpine Electronics, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že tento Bluetooth Module je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnýmiustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.

Denmark: Undertegnede Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr Bluetooth Module overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrigerelevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Germany: Hiermit erklärt Alpine Electronics, Inc., dass sich das Gerät Bluetooth Module in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegendenAnforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.

10 Specifications

Type approval

10

��

387

Country

Estonia: Käesolevaga kinnitab Alpine Electronics, Inc. seadme Bluetooth Module vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatuddirektiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.

UK Hereby, Alpine Electronics, Inc., declares that this Bluetooth Module is in compliance with the essential requirements and otherrelevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Spain: Por medio de la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que el Bluetooth Module cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquieraotras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Greece: ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Alpine Electronics, Inc. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ Bluetooth Module ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.

France: Par la présente Alpine Electronics, Inc. déclare que l'appareil Bluetooth Module est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autresdispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.

Italy: Con la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. dichiara che questo Bluetooth Module è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altredisposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.

Latvia: Ar šo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklarē, ka Bluetooth Module atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar tosaistītajiem noteikumiem.

Lithuania: Šiuo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis Bluetooth Module atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvosnuostatas.

Nether-lands:

Hierbij verklaart Alpine Electronics, Inc. dat het toestel Bluetooth Module in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andererelevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.

Malta: Hawnhekk, Alpine Electronics, Inc., jiddikjara li dan Bluetooth Module jikkonforma mal- ti ijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti o rajnrelevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.

Hungary: Alulírott, Alpine Electronics, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a Bluetooth Module megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.

10 Specifications

Type approval

10

388

Country

Poland: Niniejszym Alpine Electronics, Inc. oświadcza, że Bluetooth Module jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymistosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.

Portugal: Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que este Bluetooth Module está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições daDirectiva 1999/5/CE.

Slovenia: Alpine Electronics, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta Bluetooth Module v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive1999/5/ES.

Slovakia: Alpine Electronics, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že Bluetooth Module spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice1999/5/ES.

Finland: Alpine Electronics, Inc. vakuuttaa täten että Bluetooth Module tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitäkoskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.

Sweden: Härmed intygar Alpine Electronics, Inc. att denna Bluetooth Module står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav ochövriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

Iceland: Alpine Electronics, Inc. hereby certifies that this Bluetooth Module conforms to the essential characteristic requirements and otherrelevant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.

Norway: Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved at utstyret Bluetooth Module er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevantekrav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

10 Specifications

Type approval

10

��

389

Country

China:

•••••

10 Specifications

Type approval

10

390

Country

Taiwan:

CCAB10LP0230T7

10 Specifications

Type approval

10

��

391

Country

SouthKorea: Volvo Car Korea

Alpine Electronics, Inc

Made in Japan

Volvo Car Korea

http://www.volvocars.com/kr

10 Specifications

Type approval

10

392

Country

Singa-pore:

The Uni-ted ArabEmirates:

Jordan: The product that contains the Bluetooth module is approved with the following certification number.

BT module certification number: TRC/LPD/2010/4.

BT module name: IAM2.1BT PWB EU

10 Specifications

Type approval

10

��

393

Country

SouthAfrica:

Uruguay: This product contains URSEC approved transmitter [module name and model name (IAM2.1 BT PWB EU + BVJG905A, BVVE905A,BVLV905A)]

10 Specifications

Type approval

10

394

Country

Jamaica: Approved for use in Jamaica SMA EI: IAM2.1

Thailand: This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement.

Nigeria:

Mexico: Warning

"Este equipo opera a titulo secundario, consecuentemente, debe aceptar interferencias perjudiciales incluyendo equipos de la mismaclase y puede no causar interferencias a sistemas operando a titulo primario."

Bluetooth module installation information

This module board is to be installed only by the professional line operator and used only for car audio produced by ALPINE ELEC-TRONICS, INC. When this Bluetooth Module Board is installed in the Car Audio, we shall consider the following points: 1. Since"IAM2.1 BT PWB US" owns its FCC ID/IC Number, we shall affix an exterior label on the outside of the product if the FCC ID is notvisible. The exterior label shall use wording such as either "Contains Transmitter Module Board FCC ID: A269ZUA130 / IC: 700B-IAM2101" or "Contains FCC ID: A269ZUA130 / IC: 700B-IAM2101". 2. "IAM2.1 BT PWB US" complies with requirements of subsections15.19(a)(3) in FCC Rules Part 15 Subpart C. The manual statement 15.19 (a)(3) is included in User Guide of the product.

COFETEL No. RCPALIA10-0353

10 Specifications

Type approval

10

395

Country

Bot-swana:

Croatia:

10 Specifications

Symbols in the display

10


General

There are a variety of different symbols in thedisplay in the car. The symbols are divided intowarning, indicator and information symbols.Shown below are the most common symbolswith their meanings and a reference to wherein the manual further information can be found.For more information on symbols and textmessages, see pages 70, 72 and 196.

- Red warning symbol, illuminates whena fault has been indicated which could affectthe safety and/or driveability of the car. At thesame time an explanatory text is displayed inthe information display.

- Yellow information symbol, illuminatesin combination with text in the information dis-play, when a deviation in any of the car's sys-tems has occurred. The yellow symbol infor-mation can also illuminate in combination withother symbols.


Indicator and warning symbols in the

combined instrument panel

Symbol Meaning Page

Low oil pres-sure

72

Parkingbrake

72, 133, 135

Airbags -SRS

19, 72

Seatbeltreminder

16, 72

Alternatornot charging

72

Fault in thebrake system

72, 132

Warning,safety mode

19, 30, 72, 73,121

Indicator and information symbols in the


Symbol Meaning Page

Fault in the ABLsystem*

70, 87

Emissions sys-tem

70

Fault in the ABSsystem

70, 132

Rear fog lamp on 70, 88

Stability system,DSTC, Trailerstability assist

70, 143, 297

Stability system,sport mode

70, 143

Engine pre-heater (diesel)

70

Low level in fueltank

70, 217

Information,read display text

70

Main beam on 70, 87

10 Specifications


10

��


Symbol Meaning Page

Left-hand direc-tion indicators

70

Right-handdirection indica-tors

70

DRIVe - Start/Stop*

70, 123, 127

Tyre pressuresystem*

313

Other information symbols in the


Symbol Meaning Page

Adaptive cruisecontrol*

148,152, 158


158

Adaptive cruisecontrol*, DistanceWarning* (DistanceAlert)

158, 163

Symbol Meaning Page


158, 163


158


153, 161


153, 161


152

Radar sensor* 158,163, 175

Start/Stop*, Adap-tive cruise control*

127, 158

Symbol Meaning Page

Speed limiter 146

Camera sensor*,Laser sensor*

167,175,179, 182

Auto Brake*, Dis-tance Warning*(Distance Alert), CitySafetyTM, Collisionwarning system*

163,167, 175

G025102

Fuel-driven engineblock heater andpassenger com-partment heater*

217

ABL system* 87

Fuel filler flap, right-hand side

283

Low battery 217

Parking brake 135

10 Specifications


10


Symbol Meaning Page

Rain sensor* 95

Driver Alert System* 179

Driver Alert Sys-tem*, Lane Depar-ture Warning*

179, 182

Driver Alert Sys-tem*, Lane Depar-ture Warning*

182

Driver Alert Sys-tem*, Time for abreak

179

Information symbols in the roof console

display

Symbol Meaning Page

Seatbelt reminder 18

Airbag, passengerseat, activated

22, 23

Airbag, passengerseat, deactivated

23

10 Specifications

10

399


11

400

A

ACC – Adaptive cruise control................. 150

Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 87

Active chassis – FOUR-C........................ 222

Active Xenon headlamps........................... 87

Adaptation............................................... 115

Adapting driving characteristics.............. 222

Adaptive cruise control............................ 150fault tracing......................................... 158radar sensor........................................ 156

Additional heater (Diesel)......................... 219

Adjusting headlamp pattern...................... 91halogen headlamp................................ 91

Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 82

Airbagactivating/deactivating, PACOS........... 22driver's and front passenger side......... 20key switch off........................................ 22

AIRBAG ..................................................... 20

Airbag system ........................................... 19

Air conditioning........................................ 213general................................................ 206

Air conditioning, AC................................. 213

Air conditioning systemrepair................................................... 328

Air distribution.................................. 208, 214

Air quality system IAQS .......................... 213

Air vents................................................... 208

Alarm.......................................................... 62alarm indicator...................................... 62alarm signals......................................... 63arming................................................... 62checking the alarm............................... 45deactivate............................................. 62deactivating a triggered alarm.............. 63reduced alarm level.............................. 63

Alcolock................................................... 105

Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 207

All-wheel drive, AWD............................... 130

All Wheel Drive (AWD).............................. 130

Approach light, duration...................... 44, 91

Audiosettings............................................... 236surround..................................... 230, 236

audio system .......................................... 231

Audio system........................................... 230functions............................................. 236overview.............................................. 231

Audio volume .......................................... 231phone.................................................. 262phone/media player............................ 262ring signal, phone............................... 262speed/noise compensation................ 236

Autoclimate control settings...................... 212

Automatic car washes............................. 354

Automatic gearbox.................................. 118manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 119towing and recovery........................... 298trailer................................................... 293

Automatic locking...................................... 57

Automatic relocking................................... 55

Auxiliary heater........................................ 219

AUX input......................................... 231, 252

AWD, All-wheel drive............................... 130

B

Backrest..................................................... 78front seat, lowering............................... 78

Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 80

Bag holder .............................................. 289


11

401

Battery............................................. 337, 383maintenance....................................... 337remote control ................................... 276remote control key/PCC....................... 49start assistance................................... 116symbols on the battery....................... 338warning symbols................................. 338

Bioethanol E85........................................ 285

Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 190

BLIS......................................................... 190

Bluetooth handsfree ........................................... 258media ................................................. 255microphone off .................................. 261streaming audio ................................. 255transfer call to mobile ........................ 261

Bonnet, opening...................................... 322

Boot lidlocking/unlocking.................................. 57

Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 327

Brake light.................................................. 88

Brakes...................................................... 131anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 131brake light............................................. 88brake system...................................... 131electric parking brake......................... 133

Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 131emergency brake lights........................ 88filling brake fluid.................................. 328handbrake........................................... 133symbols in the combined instrumentpanel................................................... 132

Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 329

C

Callsincoming............................................. 260operation............................................. 260

Camera sensor................................ 165, 174

Car care................................................... 354

Car care, leather upholstery.................... 356

Cargo arealoading................................................ 288load retaining eyelets.......................... 289

Car upholstery......................................... 356

Car wash.................................................. 354

Catalytic converter................................... 284recovery.............................................. 299

CD ........................................................... 248

Centre console........................................ 198

Chassis settings...................................... 222

Checking and topping up the coolant..... 326

Checking the engine oil level................... 323

Children..................................................... 31child safety locks.................................. 35child seats and side airbags................. 24location in the car................................. 31safety.................................................... 31

Child safety locks...................................... 61

Child seat................................................... 31

Child seats................................................. 31ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 35recommended...................................... 32size classes for child seats with the ISO-FIX fixture system................................. 35upper mounting points for child seats.. 38

Cigarette lighter socket............................ 224

City Safety™............................................ 164

Cleaningautomatic car washes......................... 354car wash............................................. 354rims..................................................... 355seatbelts............................................. 357upholstery........................................... 356

Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 207


11

402

Climate control........................................ 206general................................................ 206sensors............................................... 206

Clock, setting............................................. 73

CO2 emissions ........................................ 376

Collision..................................................... 30

Collision warning............................. 169, 170

Collision warning systemradar sensor........................ 156, 164, 169

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*......... 169

Colour code, paint................................... 358

Combined instrument panel.............. 69, 196

Comfort inside the passenger compart-ment......................................................... 223

Compass................................................. 102calibration........................................... 102

Condensation in headlamps.................... 354

controls centre console ................................... 231

Controlscentre console.................................... 198

Controls, lights........................................... 83

Control symbols......................................... 70

Cooling system........................................ 280

Corner Traction Control .......................... 142

Crash, see Collision................................... 30

Cruise control.......................................... 148

CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 207

D

DAB Radio............................................... 245

Deadlockdeactivation.......................................... 59temporary deactivation......................... 59

Deadlocks.................................................. 59

Defroster.................................................. 213

Diesel....................................................... 285

Diesel particle filter.................................. 286

Dipstick, electronic.................................. 325

Direction indicators.................................... 89

Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 120

Display lighting.......................................... 83

Distance Warning.................................... 161

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II.................... 230

Door mirrors............................................... 99

Driveable punctured tyres........................ 314

Driver Alert Control.................................. 178

Driver Alert System.................................. 177

Driving...................................................... 280cooling system.................................... 280with the boot lid open......................... 281with trailer........................................... 292

Driving in water........................................ 280

Driving with a trailertowball load........................................ 365towing capacity.................................. 365

DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 143

DVD ......................................................... 248

E

ECC, electronic climate control............... 209

Economical driving.................................. 280

ECO pressure.......................................... 311

Eco Start/Stop DRIVe.............................. 123

Electrical socket...................................... 225cargo area........................................... 290front seat............................................. 225

Electric parking brake.............................. 133low battery voltage............................. 133


11

403

releasing automatically....................... 134releasing manually.............................. 134

Emergency equipmentwarning triangle.................................. 312

Emergency puncture repair..................... 315

Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 287

Engineoverheating......................................... 292starting................................................ 109

Engine block heater................................. 114fuel-driven........................................... 216

Engine compartmentcoolant................................................ 326oil........................................................ 323overview.............................................. 323power steering fluid............................ 328

Engine drag control ................................ 142

Engine oil......................................... 323, 370adverse driving conditions.................. 370capacities........................................... 370filter..................................................... 323oil grade.............................................. 370

Engine specifications............................... 368

Environmental labelling, FSC, owner'smanual....................................................... 12

Error messagesAdaptive Cruise Control..................... 158Driver Alert Control............................. 179Lane Departure Warning..................... 182see Messages and symbols....... 135, 158

Error messages in BLIS........................... 192

Error messages in Distance Alert............ 163

ERS - Remote Start................................. 110

ETC, electronic temperature control ....... 210

Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 17

External dimensions................................ 364

F

Fan........................................................... 211

Fault tracing for the camera sensor. 166, 174

First aid equipment.................................. 312

First aid kit .............................................. 312

Flexifuel.................................................... 114adaptation........................................... 115

Fluids, capacities..................................... 373

Fluids and oils.......................................... 373

Fog lampsrear........................................................ 88

Foot brake............................................... 131

FOUR-C – Active chassis........................ 222

FSC, environmental labelling..................... 12

Fuel.......................................................... 284fuel consumption................................ 376fuel economy...................................... 311fuel filter.............................................. 286

Fuse box.................................................. 343glovebox............................................. 348

Fuses....................................................... 343box in cargo area................................ 351changing............................................. 343cold zone............................................ 352general................................................ 343relay/fuse box in engine compartment 344Start/Stop........................................... 352

Fuse tablefuses in engine compartment............. 345

G

Gearbox................................................... 117automatic............................................ 118manual................................................ 117

Gear selector inhibitor............................. 120


11

404

Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen-gagement................................................. 120

Geartronic................................................ 119

Glasslaminated/reinforced............................. 97

Global opening........................................ 206

Glovebox................................................. 224locking.................................................. 57

Gross vehicle weight............................... 365

GSI - Gear selector assistance................ 117

H

Handbrake............................................... 133

Hazard warning flashers............................ 89

Headlamp levelling.................................... 83

Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 91

Headlamp pattern adjustment Active Bending Lights .......................... 91

Headlamps............................................... 329

Head restraintcentre seat, rear.................................... 80lowering................................................ 81

Heated washer nozzles.............................. 96

Heating.................................................... 212rearview and door mirrors.................. 101rear window........................................ 101seats................................................... 211

Heat-reflecting windscreen........................ 97

High engine temperature......................... 292

High-pressure headlamp washing............. 96

HomeLink .............................................. 137

Home safe lighting..................................... 90

Hoot........................................................... 82

Horn........................................................... 82

I

IAQS – Interior Air Quality System........... 207

IC – Inflatable Curtain................................ 26

Ignition keys............................................... 76

Immobiliser................................................ 43

Indicator lamps, PCC................................ 45

Inflatable curtain........................................ 26

Information button, PCC............................ 45

Information displays.................................. 69

Infotainment system ............................... 230menus ................................................ 234overview ............................................. 231source buttons ................................... 231voice control....................................... 267

Inlaid mats............................................... 224

Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 83

Instrument overviewleft-hand drive....................................... 66right-hand drive.................................... 68

Instruments and controls........................... 66

Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 89

Interior rearview mirror............................. 101automatic dimming............................. 101

Intermittent wiping..................................... 95

iPod , connection................................... 252

K

Kerb weight.............................................. 365

Key............................................................. 42

Key blade................................................... 46

Keyless drive...................................... 51, 109

Keyless start (keyless drive)............... 51, 109


11

405

Keypad in the steeringwheel................................. 82, 148, 199, 232

Key positions............................................. 76

L

Labels...................................................... 362

Laminated glass......................................... 97

Lamps, see Lighting................................ 329

Lane Departure Control........................... 181

Laser sensor................................................ 9

Leather upholstery, washing instructions 356

Lighting.................................................... 329Active Xenon headlamps...................... 87approach light, duration................. 44, 91automatic lighting, passenger compart-ment...................................................... 90bulbs, specifications........................... 334controls................................................. 89display lighting...................................... 83headlamp levelling................................ 83home safe lighting................................ 90in passenger compartment................... 89instrument lighting................................ 83main/dipped beam............................... 84

position/parking lamps......................... 88rear fog lamp........................................ 88tunnel detection.................................... 87

Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 329bulb holder, rear, direction indicators. 332cargo area........................................... 333dipped beam halogen......................... 330direction indicators............................. 331main beam, Xenon lamp..................... 331main beam halogen............................ 331number plate lighting.......................... 333vanity mirror........................................ 333

Light switches............................................ 83

Loadingcargo area........................................... 288general................................................ 288load retaining eyelets.......................... 289roof load............................................. 288

Lock confirmation ..................................... 42

Locking/unlockinginside.................................................... 55

Locksautomatic locking................................. 55boot lid.................................................. 57locking.................................................. 55unlocking.............................................. 55

Lubricants................................................ 373

Lubricants, capacities.............................. 373

M

Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 84

Main beam, automatic activation.............. 85

Maintenancerustproofing........................................ 356

Making calls............................................. 260

Manual gearbox....................................... 117GSI - Gear selector assistance........... 117towing and recovery........................... 298

Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 119

Max. roof load ......................................... 365

Media, Bluetooth ................................... 255

media player ........................................... 248

Memory function in seats.......................... 79

Menu navigation, Infotainment ............... 234

Menus/functions...................................... 200

Menus and messages.............................. 196

Menu system MY CAR............................ 198


11

406

Messages and symbolsAdaptive Cruise Control..................... 158Collision Warning with AutoBrake.......................................... 167, 175Distance Alert..................................... 163Driver Alert Control............................. 179Lane Departure Warning..................... 182

Messages in BLIS.................................... 192

Messages in the combined instrumentpanel........................................................ 196

Messages in the information display....... 143

Metersfuel gauge............................................. 70speedometer......................................... 70tachometer........................................... 70

Microphone.............................................. 258

Misting..................................................... 213attending to the windows................... 206condensation in headlamps............... 354remove with the air vents................... 214timer function...................................... 213

Mobile phoneconnect............................................... 259handsfree............................................ 258register phone..................................... 259voice control....................................... 267

Mood lighting............................................. 90

MY CAR................................................... 198

O

Oil, see also Engine oil............................. 370

Oil level low.............................................. 323

Overheating............................................. 292

Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 12

P

PACOS....................................................... 22

PACOS, switch.......................................... 22

Paintworkcolour code......................................... 358damage and touch-up........................ 358

Panel lighting............................................. 83

Panic function............................................ 44

Park assist camera.................................. 187

Parking assistance................................... 184parking assistance sensors................ 186

Parking brake........................................... 133

Parking heater.......................................... 216battery and fuel................................... 216parking on a hill.................................. 216time setting......................................... 218

Passenger compartment......................... 223

Passenger compartment filter................. 207

Passenger compartment heaterfuel-driven........................................... 216

PCC – Personal Car Communicatorfunctions............................................... 43range............................................... 44, 45

Pedestrian protection.............................. 169

Petrol grade............................................. 284

Phoneconnect............................................... 259handsfree............................................ 258incoming calls..................................... 260making calls........................................ 260phone book......................................... 262phone book, shortcut......................... 262receiving a call.................................... 261register phone..................................... 259voice control....................................... 267

Pinch protection, sunroof........................ 104

Polishing.................................................. 355

Position/parking lamps.............................. 88


11

407

Power seat................................................. 79

Powershift gearbox.......................... 121, 298

Power sunroof......................................... 103

Power windows......................................... 97

Privacy locking........................................... 48

Q

Queue Assist............................................ 155

Queue Assistant....................................... 155

R

Radar sensor........................................... 150limitations........................................... 156

Radio ...................................................... 241AM/FM ............................................... 241DAB ................................................... 245

Rain sensor................................................ 95

Rear bulbslocation............................................... 332

Rearview and door mirrorscompass............................................. 102door...................................................... 99

electrically retractable......................... 100heating................................................ 101interior................................................. 101

Rear window, defrosting.......................... 101

Recirculation............................................ 213

Recommendations during driving............ 280

Recommended child seats, table.............. 32

Recovery.................................................. 300

Refrigerant............................................... 328

Refuelling................................................. 283fuel cap............................................... 283fuel filler flap, electrical opening......... 283fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 283refuelling............................................. 283

Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 343

Remote control ....................................... 275battery replacement ........................... 276

Remote control, HomeLink programmable ................................... 137

Remote control key................................... 42battery replacement.............................. 49detachable key blade........................... 46functions............................................... 43range..................................................... 44

Remote control key system, type appro-val............................................................ 384

Remote Start - ERS................................. 110

Resetting the door mirrors....................... 100

Resetting the power windows................... 99

Retractable power door mirrors............... 100

Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 118

Rimscleaning.............................................. 355

Road sign information............................. 144

Roof load, max. weight ........................... 365

Rustproofing............................................ 356

S

Safety mode.............................................. 30

Seat, see Seats.......................................... 78

Seatbeltrear seat................................................ 18seatbelt tensioner................................. 18

Seatbelt reminder...................................... 18

Seatbelts.................................................... 16

Seats.......................................................... 78head restraints, rear.............................. 80


11

408

heating................................................ 211lowering the front backrest................... 78lowering the rear backrest.................... 80power seats.......................................... 79

Sensus....................................................... 75

Service position....................................... 335

Service programme................................. 322

Set time interval....................................... 161

Side airbags............................................... 24

Signal input, external....................... 231, 252

SIPS bags.................................................. 24

Ski hatch.................................................. 291

Soot filter................................................. 286

Soot filter full............................................ 286

Spare wheel............................................. 308

Spin control............................................. 142

Spin control function............................... 142

SST – Self Supporting run flat Tyres....... 314

Stability and traction control system....... 142

Stability system....................................... 142

Stains....................................................... 356

Start assistance....................................... 116

Steering force, speed related.................. 222

Steering force level, see Steering force... 222

Steering lock............................................ 110

Steering wheel........................................... 82keypad.......................... 82, 148, 199, 232keypad, adaptive cruise control......... 152steering wheel adjustment.................... 82

Stone chips and scratches...................... 358

Storage spaces in the passenger compart-ment......................................................... 223

Sun blind.................................................... 99

Sunroofopening and closing........................... 103pinch protection.................................. 104sunscreen........................................... 104ventilation position.............................. 103

Sunscreen, sunroof.................................. 104

Surround.......................................... 230, 236

Symbols................................................... 143indicator symbols................................. 70warning symbols................................... 70

Symbols and messagesAdaptive Cruise Control..................... 158Collision Warning with AutoBrake.......................................... 167, 175Distance Alert..................................... 163

Driver Alert Control............................. 179Lane Departure Warning..................... 182

T

Temperatureactual temperature............................. 206

Temperature control................................ 212

Timer........................................................ 213

Total airing function........................... 56, 206

Towbar detachable, attachment ..................... 295detachable, removal .......................... 296

Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 293

Towing..................................................... 298towing eye.......................................... 299

Towing capacity....................................... 365

Towing equipment................................... 293specifications...................................... 294

Towing eye.............................................. 299

TPMS – Tyre Pressure Monitoring........... 313

Trailer....................................................... 292cable................................................... 292


11

409

driving with a trailer............................ 292snaking............................................... 297

Trailer stability assist .............................. 142

Trailer Stability Assist.............................. 297

Transmission............................................ 117

Transponder.............................................. 97

Trip computer.......................................... 220

Trip meter.................................................. 73

TroubleshootingAdaptive Cruise Control..................... 158

TSA - trailer stability assist ............. 142, 297

Tunnel detection........................................ 87

TV............................................................. 271

Type approval, remote control key sys-tem........................................................... 384

Type designation..................................... 362

Tyresdirection of rotation............................ 304driving characteristics......................... 304maintenance....................................... 304pressure.............................................. 311puncture repair................................... 315specifications...................................... 306speed ratings...................................... 307tread wear indicators.......................... 305

tyre pressure monitoring..................... 313winter tyres......................................... 306

U

Unlockingfrom the inside...................................... 56from the outside................................... 55

USB, connection...................................... 252

V

Vanity mirror...................................... 90, 225

Ventilation................................................ 208

Vibration damper..................................... 293

Voice control, mobile phone.................... 267

Volvo Sensus............................................. 75

W

Warning lampadaptive cruise control....................... 150collision warning system.................... 172stability and traction control system. . 142

Warning lampsairbags SRS.......................................... 72alternator not charging......................... 72fault in brake system............................ 72low oil pressure..................................... 72parking brake applied........................... 72seatbelt reminder.................................. 72warning................................................. 72

Warning soundcollision warning system.................... 172

Warning symbol, airbag system................ 19

Warning symbols....................................... 70

Warning triangle....................................... 312

Washer fluid, filling................................... 336

Washer nozzles, heated............................. 96

Washerswasher fluid, filling.............................. 336windscreen........................................... 96

Water and dirt-repellent coating................ 97

Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 355


11

410

Waxing..................................................... 355

Weightskerb weight......................................... 365

Wheelschanging............................................. 309installation........................................... 310rims..................................................... 305snow chains........................................ 306spare wheel........................................ 308

Wheels and tyres..................................... 304

Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 27

WHIPSchild seat/booster cushion................... 27whiplash injury...................................... 27

Windows, rearview and door mirrors......... 97

Windscreen washing.................................. 96

Windscreen wipers.................................... 95rain sensor............................................ 95

Winter driving........................................... 281

Winter tyres.............................................. 306

Wiper blades............................................ 335changing............................................. 335cleaning.............................................. 336service position................................... 335

Wipers and washing.................................. 95

owners manual -...

Documents